Catccme9000 CCM

™
Evolution Series E9000

Motor Control Centers
Application Guide
imagination at work
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
General – Section A Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches ................................................................3

Product Features Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects........................................................................4
Design Features ..............................................................................................1-4 HPC High Pressure
®
Contact Switches ..............................................................5
NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring................................................................5 Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit Breakers ........................................6
Codes and Standards ..............................................................................................6 Spectra RMS™® and THED/TEDL Circuit Breakers ........................................7
Short-Circuit Considerations ................................................................................7 Ground Break Systems
Fuse Classification ....................................................................................................8 Model BGFL............................................................................................................8
Environmental Considerations ............................................................................8 Type GFM Ground Fault System..................................................................9
Structure – Section B 300-Line Motor Starters ................................................................................10-12
Enclosure Types ..........................................................................................................1 C-2000™ Control Relays ......................................................................................13
Indoor Enclosures................................................................................................1-13 CR120B Machine Tool and Industrial Relays..............................................14
Outdoor Enclosures ................................................................................................14 CR104P Pilot Devices ............................................................................................15
Options ..................................................................................................................15-16 Solid-State Motor Winding Heater ..................................................................16
Bus Selection..............................................................................................................17 POWER LEADER™ EPM..........................................................................................17
POWER LEADER™ PQM ........................................................................................18
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines – Section C POWER LEADER™ Modbus Concentrator ....................................................19
Mains Three-Phase Voltage Monitors ..................................................................20-22
Fused Switch Mains ..........................................................................................1 High-Resistance Ground ......................................................................................23
Circuit Breaker Mains ........................................................................................2 Motor Protection Relay LM10 ....................................................................24-25
Feeders MS2000CNT Input-Output Module ..................................................................26
Fused Switch Feeders ......................................................................................3 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors............................................................27
Circuit Breaker Feeders....................................................................................4
Options for Mains and Feeders ......................................................................4-5 Application Data – Section J
Incoming Line Terminations..................................................................................6 Approximate Motor Full-Load Current Ratings ............................................1
Automatic Transfer Switches................................................................................7 Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Set Positions ..........................2
Transitions......................................................................................................................7 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings for Motor Circuits ....................................3
Overload Heater Tables
Starters – Section D For Ther-Mag Controllers ................................................................................4
General ............................................................................................................................1 For Mag-Break Controllers ........................................................................5-9
Selection Tables Overload Relays................................................................................................10
Circuit Breaker Type......................................................................................2-4 For Fused Controllers ..............................................................................11-12
Fused Switch Type ........................................................................................5-9 Starter Fuse Selection ....................................................................................13-14
Starter Options ..................................................................................................10-11 Control Transformer Fusing................................................................................15
Product Information ........................................................................................12-14 Heat Loss Considerations ....................................................................................15
Miscellaneous Units – Section E Motor Load..................................................................................................................16
Operator and Metering Panels ............................................................................1 Non-Motor Loads..............................................................................................16-19
Relay Panels..................................................................................................................1 Publication References ..................................................................................20-21
Mounting Plates......................................................................................................2-3 Electrical Data ....................................................................................................22-23
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards ............................................................4 Drawings & Testing – Section K
Distribution Transformers E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System............................................................1-3
Three-Phase Transformers ............................................................................5 Paint-Finish....................................................................................................................4
Single-Phase Transformers............................................................................6 Packing and Storage ................................................................................................4
Power Factor Correction Capacitors ............................................................7-8 Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection ............................................5-6
Programmable Logic Control (PLC) – Section F Typical Circuits – Section L
General........................................................................................................................1-2 FVNR Size 1-4 ..........................................................................................................1-2
Selection Application ................................................................................................3 FVNR Size 5-6 ..........................................................................................................3-4
Distributed I/O..............................................................................................................4 FVR Size 1-4 ..................................................................................................................5
GE Fanuc Field Control ............................................................................................5 RVAT Size 2-6 ................................................................................................................6
Genius® I/O System ..............................................................................................6-8 2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4 ..................................................................................7
Connections ..................................................................................................................9 2S1W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4 ..................................................................................8
Solid-State Drives & Starters – Section G 2S-PW Size 1-5 ............................................................................................................9
Adjustable Frequency AC Drives ....................................................................1-2 Wye-Delta Open Transition ................................................................................10
Adjustable Speed Drives Wye-Delta Closed Transition ............................................................................11
Motor Application Data....................................................................................3 Distribution Transformers....................................................................................12
How to Select Drives ....................................................................................3-4 Single-Phase Panelboard ....................................................................................13
AF-600 FP & AF-650GP Series................................................................4-10 Three-Phase Panelboard......................................................................................14
Space Height and Assembly ..............................................................11-12 FVNR with PLC ..........................................................................................................15
Solid-State Starters FVR with PLC ..............................................................................................................15
Overview of ASTAT®-CD Plus & ASTAT®-IBP ..........................................13 RVNR-AT with PLC....................................................................................................16
Features and Benefits....................................................................................14 2S2W with PLC ..........................................................................................................17
Types and Ratings ..........................................................................................15 Solid-State Starter- ASTAT CD ............................................................................18
General Specifications ..................................................................................16 Solid-State Starter - IBP ........................................................................................19
I/O Wiring ............................................................................................................17 AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Variable Speed Drive....................................20-21
Operating Modes..............................................................................................18 High-Resistance Ground ......................................................................................22
ASTAT-IBP Plus Lockout ................................................................................19 LM10 ..............................................................................................................................23
Standard Reduced-Voltage,
Specifications – Section M
Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect ........................................20-22
MCC 600 Volts and Below..................................................................................1-3
Components –® Section H
Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors................................................................1
Spectra RMS – Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors..................................2
The General Electric Evolution Series™ motor control centers buses, wiring channels and compartmented control units.
provide safe and flexible centralizing motor starters and Shipping splits are bolted together to form a single line-up
related control equipment. It permits combination motor assembly. Units are mounted and wired in accordance with
control units, feeder tap units, distribution transformers, the wiring class specified. The entire center may be powered
lighting panels, interlocking relays, programmable control, by incoming line connection at a single point. Where possible,
metering and other miscellaneous devices to be contained motor control centers bear UL section and unit labels.
in a single floor-mounted structural assembly fed from a
common enclosed main bus. The purpose of this publication is to simplify the selection of
GE motor control centers. The following logic flow chart lists
GE motor control centers are constructed of standardized basic items which must be considered for each application.
heavy gauge vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal
PRODUCT FEATURES
NEMA CLASS
APPLICABLE CODES
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT RATING
BUS TYPE AND CAPACITY
ENCLOSURE TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION
INCOMING LINE TERMINATION AND MAINS
STARTERS
FEEDERS
SPECIAL FEATURES REQUIRED
SPECIAL CIRCUIT AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS

General
Product Features
Design Features A
Design flexibility, performance, personnel and equipment
protection, ease of maintenance and installation are all con-
tained in the Evolution Series. Evolution Series features, such
as separate wiring troughs, split-type terminal boards, isolated
bus, drawout starter units, operating mechanisms, and pro- Device bracket mounts 30mm pilot devices in Evolution Series.
visions for starter interchangeability, are designed for a high Bracket swings open to allow easy access to unit components, wiring
level of reliability, safety and convenience. and terminal blocks. Fully insulated – does not require grounding.
These steel-enclosed control centers can be joined together

A polyester-reinforced “sandwich” insulates
to centralize and protect the most complex systems of and isolates the vertical bus and helps prevent
industrial auxiliary drives, or the simplest of fan- or pump- the spread of faults from starter and feeder
motor controls. As the need arises, additional sections can units to vertical or horizontal bus. Small stab
be added to an existing lineup. openings provide effective isolation. 65kA
short circuit bracing is standard for
Evolution Series MCC.
Clear Lexan barriers located in front of the main horizontal bus isolate
the bus from the top horizontal wireway. Maintenance personnel Plug-in stabs are rated 250A and 600A. The 250A stab connections
can easily gain entrance to the top horizontal wireway of the control shown are made with copper unit power stabs which are under double
center without danger of contact with a live bus. spring pressure and engage the vertical bus to provide positive contact.
An incoming-line terminal compartment can be located at the top or All combination starters and feeder units of plug-in construction
bottom of a vertical section to allow cable termination with minimum utilize a positive guidance system.
bending. The standard 600-ampere incoming line terminal com-
partment shown is furnished with mechanical type lugs. Other
incoming line terminal compartments are available for main bus High density two-piece, pull-apart control terminal boards feature
ampacities up to 2500 amperes. up to 18 points in 12” high units. External and internal unit connec-
tions are made on opposite sides, allowing the unit to be withdrawn
without disconnecting control wiring. Accommodates up to (2) #12
AWG wires with ring, fork or bare terminations. Rated 30 Amps, 600
Vac. Meets NEC Article 430.74.
New doors mounted on the case feature a removable hinge pin

providing easy door removal and accurate alignment.
A1
General
Product Features
A Design Features
Large isolated wire trough provides a 4" x 11"
area to “lay in” wire and make control and
load connections. A separate removable door,
adjacent to drawout units, makes wiring
installation and inspection easy. The door
can be opened without disturbing adjacent For flexibility, standard Size 1 and Size 2 FVNR starters are inter-
unit doors. 8" x 11" wire troughs are available changeable in the same 12” high space unit. This design allows
quick, easy field changes when modifications are desired after
installation. Front accessible quarter-turn latches provide for ease
of securing and withdrawal of all plug-in units.
with 24" wide enclosures.
Units can be withdrawn to a disconnected

position and padlocked for maintenance.
A paint finish is applied to all un-plated steel parts. The powder

coating process withstands 1000 Hr. salt spray tests and provides
lasting protection.
An interlock release system is provided so that – if it becomes nec-

essary for maintenance purposes – the disconnect may be closed
with the door open. A by-pass is provided to allow opening the door
with the disconnect closed. Only qualified personnel familiar with
the equipment should use the interlock release and by-pass features.
(Option) A vertical bus shutter mechanism can be supplied which
covers the vertical bus stab area when a plug-in starter or feeder is
withdrawn. Cap plugs are standard to close unused stab openings.
The vertically mounted integral handle can be locked in the OFF

position with up to three padlocks. A drilling pattern is furnished,
allowing the handle to be modified for locking in the ON position
with a single padlock. This modification should only be made after (Option) Vertical Ground Bus and Unit Stab. Vertical copper ground
the user determines it is desirable to lock the disconnect in the ON bus allows direct grounding of unit saddles to the equipment
position. Padlock to have maximum 3⁄8 ” shackle. ground bus. A unit ground bus stab engages the vertical ground
bus before the unit power stabs engage the vertical bus. A load
ground lug is available for customer cable grounding. Termination
points are located at the rear of the bucket, next to starter.
A2
General
Product Features
Design Features A
E9000 MCC can be spliced onto existing 7700 Line, 8000 Line and An optional snap-in steel barrier in the wireway provides added
Spectra MCC for 1200A (supplied with 2" bars) and below. Horizontal isolation for low voltage signal wiring between units.
bus location in E9000 matches the existing bus location.
New oversized laser-engraved unit nameplates on 12” units and

larger feature 1 to 9 lines of up to 20 characters 0.18” high or 4
lines of up to 10 characters 0.30” high. Nameplates use Microsoft®
Windows® Arial font. Custom non-English characters are an option.
Lift up handle design to allow full access to fuses and CB rating

plug. Postion indication ON-TRIP-OFF.
Easily removable plastic knock-outs are provided in the vertical

wireway ladder assembly to allow routing of field wiring into units. S-5 FVNR circuit breaker combination can be provided in 36”,
allowing two size 5 units in one section.
(Option) Motor terminal blocks can be supplied in Size 1 & 2 to

allow disconnecting motor wires when removing a unit. NEMA Type
BT wiring. All case side wireways are roll-formed to provide a 1/2” lip for cross
wiring to rest on, thus preventing skinned insulation.
A3
General
Product Features
A Design Features
Horizontal Handles
Horizontal handles are standard on 6” 150A and 12” 250A
feeder breakers to optimize space. Optional vertical handles
are available, but they affect unit height.
Drawing Software
Windows™-based Engineering Drawing System creates high-
quality detailed front, top, bottom and side views as well as
Wire and Cable
specific device information.
Standard control and power wire includes flame-retardant,
(VW-1) moisture-heat-and oil-resistant thermoplastic insulation
rated 600 volts, with stranded copper conductors, types
MTW and THW.
Standard colors are:

Red – AC Control
Blue – DC Control
Black – AC/DC Power
Green – Ground
White – Neutral
Size 1 FVNR Starter Optional wiring available includes SIS heat-resistant synthetic
50% smaller (1/2X) rubber-covered switchboard wire and XHHW flame-retardant
NEMA rated compact C-2000 starter with 100VA CPT with up cross-linked synthetic polymer, both rated 600 volts with
to a quantity of three 22mm C-2000 pilot devices. stranded copper conductors, and a VW-1 flame rating (no PVC).
Note: Not all colors are available with optional wiring.
Nameplates
Unit service designation nameplates are furnished when
specified. Nameplates can be supplied as blanks suitable for
field engraving, or engraved at the factory.
The standard unit service designation nameplate is of 2-ply

Plug-in Stabs thermoplastic material, black face with white core, 2 5/32" x 3
The 600A stab shown uses a two-step engagement with ver- 1/2", fastened with non-corrosive nylon clips. Plated steel
tical bus for low insertion/withdrawal force. Line side cables screws are available as an option.
crimped directly into spring reinforced tin-plated copper
stabs. No hidden line side cable in rear of units. Tapered Nameplates are engraved with white letters on a black
glass polyester stab mounting base gives positive plug-in background using the Arial typeface found in Microsoft
alignment with vertical bus. Office applications. Standard nameplates carry up to nine
lines of .18" high characters (20 characters per line maxi-
mum) OR up to four lines of .30" characters (10 characters
per line maximum).
Six-inch units and the F-frame circuit breaker come with a

1"x 3" nameplate that accommodates up to three lines of
.18" characters with a maximum of 19 characters on lines 1
and 3 and 15 characters on line 2.
A4
General
NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring Examples of custom drawings are:

Motor control centers are classified by NEMA as • Special identifications for electrical devices A
• Special terminal numbering designations
follows: • Special sizes of drawings
NEMA Class I Definition①
The drawings supplied by the manufacturer shall convey the
Class I motor control centers consist essentially of a mechanical
same information as drawings provided with Class I and II
grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other
motor control centers, additionally modified as specified by
units arranged in a convenient assembly. They include con-
the user.
nections from the common horizontal power bus to the units.
When to Specify Class I
They do not include interwiring or interlocking between
Specify NEMA Class I control centers for independently operated
units or to remotely mounted devices, nor do they include
motors requiring no interlocking or other interconnection
control system engineering.
between units.
Diagrams of the individual units only are supplied.
When to Specify Class II
When factory interconnections are desired to provide such
NEMA Class II Definition①
functions as sequencing and other interlocking or intercon-
Class II motor control centers consist of a grouping of
nection, the control centers required are NEMA Class II.
combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units
designed to form a COMPLETE CONTROL SYSTEM. They
When to Specify Class IS and IIS
include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring
When custom drawings are desired to show special device
between units and interlocking provisions to remotely
identification, special terminal numbering, or special diagram
mounted devices in addition to the connections from the
size, etc. the control centers required are Class IS or IIS.
horizontal common power bus to the units.
Wiring Type
The control manufacturer shall provide a suitable diagram
The NEMA classes are sub-divided into A, B and C depending
to illustrate operation of the control associated with the
on the type wiring furnished, with type B further having type
motor control center.
B-D for customer load wiring direct to the device and B-T for
customer wiring to a load TB (size 1 and 2 starters).
NEMA Class IS and IIS Definition①
Class IS and IIS motor control centers shall be the same as Note: For feeders and large starters, customer must wire direct to unit device terminals.
Class I and II motor control centers except custom drawings
Note: In addition to NEMA prescribed wiring types, GE offers a NEMA 1A Modified MCC.
shall be provided in lieu of standard drawings. This type of MCC will be supplied without wiring and without control diagrams. GE can
mount low voltage control devices on the pilot device bracket and supply terminal
① From NEMA Standard 18-2001. boards. This would be considered on OEM product.
Wiring Features by NEMA Classification

Class I Class IS Class II Class IIS
Type of Power or Control Termination Furnished A B C A B C B C B C
Pull-apart and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter–Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stationary and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter – Sizes 5, 6 and 7 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pull-apart and numbered power terminal boards on unit starter –Sizes 1 and 2.
(On Type A wiring: Same type of numbered terminals on starter itself for Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Numbered terminals on starter itself for power connection with no power terminal boards – Sizes, 5, 6 and 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stationary master terminal boards (Top, bottom or rear of section)
For control – Sizes 1 thru 5 / For power – Sizes 1 thru 3 No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Unit terminal boards for feeder tap units and distribution panels No No No No No No No No No No
Starter-unit-mounted pilot devices internally wired to starter – Sizes 1 thru 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Terminal board points for remote devices (Excluding extra tie points) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Master terminal-board wiring connections No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Factory-wired interconnections between units in the same motor control center No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Type of Drawings Furnished

Outline and summary sheet (Schedule of units) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points (Terminal boards
not furnished on Type A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points and interconnections
to other units and/or to the first level of remote devices No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Schedule of wires to master terminal blocks No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Custom drawings as specified by user No No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
A computerized manufacturing process necessitates that the E9000 Line motor control center standard unit numbering system be followed to identify the section and location
of each unit. This is explained in detail in application data (Section J). It greatly simplifies wire tracing of interconnection wires, and is beneficial to the application of program-
mable control. The Outline and Summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross references the unit numbers and customer unit designations when specified.
A5
General
Codes and Standards Section Label

A
Motor control centers are manufactured to NEMA standard ICS 18-
2001 and are eligible to receive the Underwriters Laboratories listing
mark under standard UL 845. Vertical sections and units which have
been listed with UL will bear the UL/cUL listing mark (see right for
examples). Since vertical sections and units are listed independently,
it is possible to have combinations of listed and non-listed sections
and units within the same control center. Sections and units which
will be shipped with the UL listing mark are identified in the appro-
priate sections of this publication.
The National Electrical Code covers installation of electric conductors

and equipment for installations identified in the NEC Article 90. The
NEC is not intended as a design specification and acceptance of an
installed motor control center by a local code authority is dependent
on factors independent of the equipment as shipped from the factory.
In general, equipment which bears the UL listing mark can be
installed to meet the NEC. Where 100 percent UL listed equipment
is mandatory or there are other special code requirements refer to
the factory for verification.
The NEC defines several types of control circuits and the over-current
protection required for each type. The following paragraphs provide
a general reference to the NEC Article applicable for the more
UL #E33752, Vol. 1, Sec. 5.
common control circuits.
NEC Articles 430.72(a) and (b) cover motor control circuits tapped
from the load side of a motor branch-circuit short-circuit protective
device (unit disconnect). Control circuit conductors from such a
Unit Label
tapped control circuit shall be protected in accordance with NEC
Table 430.72(b), which lists the maximum fuse or circuit breaker
rating vs. conductor size.
Motor control circuits other than such tapped control circuits (common
control transformers or external power source) shall be protected
against overcurrent in accordance with Section 725.12 or 725.35, as
applicable, for the type power source and field wiring conductor sizes.
Where a motor control circuit transformer is provided, the trans-

former should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 430.72(c).
Transformers other than motor control circuit transformers should
be protected in accordance with NEC Article 450.3(b).
A6
General
Short Circuit Considerations trol center and sized per NEC A or 240 for horizontal bus
All ratings in this publication are RMS symmetrical amperes protection. Wherever located, it must have an interrupting A
rating equal to or greater than the available short-circuit
Short-Circuit Current Ratings current at the point of its connection to the system. If located
The NEMA Motor Control Center Standard ICS 18-2001 defines at the control center, this value would be the system available
the short-circuit rating of a motor control center as follows: short-circuit current, Is (Fig. 1).
“The motor control center short-circuit rating shall be the A motor control center should be protected for all types of
maximum available rms symmetrical current in amperes faults from low-level arcing ground faults to bolted three-
permissible at its line terminals. It shall be computed as the phase faults which can develop the full available short-circuit
sum of the short-circuit current contributions of the motors current. Line-to-line and line-to-ground arcing faults (often
connected to the motor control center and the maximum produced by contaminated atmospheres, foreign materials,
available current, including all other short-circuit current etc.) can be appreciably lower in magnitude than the available
contributions of the supply system at the point of connection short-circuit current and must be assumed not to be self-
to the motor control center.” extinguishing. Even low-level arching faults are capable of
releasing tremendous energy at the point of fault and can
Motor Control Center Bus
be highly destructive.
A SPECTRA (MOLDED CASE SWITCH) OR A NON-AUTOMATIC

INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE PROPERLY
COORDINATED WITH UP STREAM PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
For full protection against all levels of arcing faults on

Fig. 1 grounded systems, a ground-fault relay is recommended.
The ground-fault system is a protective means that responds
Figure 1 illustrates simply the basis of determining the avail- to phase-to-ground current, but is not affected by phase-to-
able short-circuit current. The individual short-circuit current phase current. It is used to protect motor control centers
ratings of the main bus extensions, combination-controller from extensive damage, which can be caused by phase-to-
units and feeder-tap units must equal or exceed available ground arcing faults.
short-circuit current.
Fuses are single-pole interrupters. An arcing fault may not
Is is the short-circuit current available from the system at the necessarily be cleared by a single-pole interruption, as the
point where the motor control center is connected. Im is the fault can be back-fed from the other energized phases. This
short-circuit current contribution of the motors connected to reduces the fault current, increasing the blowing time of the
the motor control center. If exact information is lacking, the energized fuses. Because of this delay, severe equipment
motor contribution can be estimated at four times (4X) the damage may occur. Single-phasing is eliminated with fast-
continuous-current rating of the main horizontal bus. Isc is acting three-pole fused interrupter switches which open
the available short-circuit current to be used as the basis for when a single fuse blows.
selection. Thus: Isc = Is + Im.
An electrically operated HPC switch with single-phase detector
High available short-circuit currents of modern distribution will meet the three-phase disconnection (single-phase
systems require special consideration so that equipment protection) recommendations for a main protective device.
may be operated within its rating. The cost and operational
acceptability of the following should be carefully considered: When switches without a three-phase trip are used, an ITI
1. Use load-center distribution systems with smaller trans- BGFL ground-fault protection scheme is particularly recom-
formers which limit the available short-circuit current. mended since damaging arcing faults almost always involve
2. Use a current-limiting busway, reactors or higher-impedance ground. It should operate the trip device on the closest
transformers to reduce the available short-circuit current. line-side three-phase disconnect.
3. Use current-limiting fuses, current-limiting breakers, or
breakers with limiters, in all combination starters and Main Horizontal Bus and Vertical Bus Extensions
feeders in the control centers. The standard bus short-circuit withstand rating is 65 kAIC
symmetrical amperes. Also available optionally is 100,000
Main Protective Devices rms symmetrical amperes. The bus rating must equal or
A motor control center requires adequate overcurrent and exceed the available short-circuit current. Refer to Structure
short-circuit protection. This is the function of the main pro- (Section B) for ratings.
tective device. It may be located in or remote from the con-
A7
General
Combination Motor Control Units Environmental Considerations

A The short-circuit rating of a combination controller is based
on tests with rated short-circuit current available at the line The standard E9000 motor control center is designed for
terminal of the control center and at rated voltage. operation in a clean, indoor environment having a 40°C
The short-circuit rating must equal or exceed the available maximum ambient temperature.
short-circuit current. Refer to Starters (Section D) for ratings.
The nominal minimum temperature for storage is -40°C and
Feeder Tap Units for operation, -20°C. Motor control center space heaters are
All feeder tap units must have a short-circuit rating which recommended whenever temperature conditions below 0°C
equals or exceeds the available short-circuit current. Refer will exist. Where extreme cold temperatures are to be encoun-
to Feeders (Section C) for ratings. tered for long periods of time. It is recommended that the
motor control center be installed in heated rooms or enclosures.
Fuse Classification For ambient temperatures above 40°C, special consideration

must be given to the need for ventilation, ambient-compen-
UL classifications are the most definitive method of determining sated breakers and overload relays, special wire insulation
fuse characteristics, and are used in this publication. Use UL and oversized control transformers. Ambient compensated
fuse “Class” when specifying type of fuse. overloads provide essentially constant trip setting as the
control ambient varies.
UL classifications used in motor control centers are:
A. Class R – current-limiting type fuses with reject mounting For indoor environments subject to falling liquids, NEMA 2
features. Class R fuses are sub-divided into Classes RK-1 and dripproof enclosures are recommended. If water spray and
RK-5, depending on maximum peak let-through currents. splashing are to be encountered, NEMA 2 construction should
RK fuses are rated 600 amperes maximum and 250 volts also be used. Space heaters may be desirable to prevent
or 600 volts. condensation on internal parts.
B. Class J-TD – are more current limiting than RKs and due to
their unique dimensions have an inherent rejection feature. For outdoor installations, NEMA 3R non-walk-in weatherproof
Ratings are 600 amperes maximum, 600 volts. (Time delay enclosures are required. Thermostatically controlled space
Class J-TD fuse may limit component damage under fault.) heaters and ambient-compensated breakers and overload
C. Class L – are current limiting and due to their unique relays should be considered for these applications. Provisions
mounting dimensions have an inherent rejection feature. for heating and cooling the entire outdoor enclosure are also
Ratings are 601 amperes minimum, 600 volts. available. Standard NEMA 3R construction is suitable for wind
velocities up to 75 mph. Beyond this, up to 130 mph, specially
Fuses marked with “Time-Delay,” “Dual-Element” or similar reinforced enclosures are available through SEPS. This special
designations are time-delay type fuses and will generally design is also necessary if the NEMA 3R enclosure has to with-
carry 500 percent rated amperes for 10 seconds, thus allowing stand seismic conditions, including seismic Zone 4 applications.
a smaller rated fuse to be used in most starter applications.
E9000 motor control center is available for earthquake conditions.
UL listed combination motor starter units used with Class H, It can satisfactorily withstand a force of 5 g’s, 1 to 100 Hz, input
K-1 or K-5 fuses are short-circuit rated 5kA for NEMA size 1, 2 at its floor sills simultaneously in all three orthogonal axes, and
and 3 starters, and 10kA for larger starters. Higher short-circuit is rated for UBC/C Seismic Zone 4 installation. It is IBC-2003 rated.
ratings require rejection type fuses. See Fuse Classifications
table below for short-circuit ratings. For dusty atmospheres, semi-dust-tight NEMA 1 gasketed or
NEMA 12 construction are recommended.
Fuses that are mechanically interchangeable may not be
electrically equivalent. Refer to the fuse manufacturer for The altitude limit for the standard electro-mechanical motor
interrupting rating and current-limiting characteristics. control center design is 6000 feet. Applications above this
should be referred to the Company for recommendations.
Fuse Classifications Some solid-state components are only rated to 3300 feet
UL Standard and may reduce the altitude limit of the motor control center.
Characteristic➀ Class J-TD Class R Class L
Ampere Range 0-600 0-600 601-6000
Voltage Ratings 600 250 600 Fungus-proofing of organic materials is inherent. Keeping equip-
600
Interrupting 200K 200K 200K ment dry and above the dew-point is the best way of avoiding
Rating RMS fungus-growth, and the use of space heaters is recommended
Symmetrical Amperes
Current-Limiting Yes Yes Yes
for this purpose. Heaters should be energized if the motor control
center is to be stored for any length of time. Where export crating
① Check fuse manufacturers for specific fuse characteristics is involved, terminals for connection of an external source of
space heater power can be provided on the outside of the crate.
A8
Structure
NEMA Enclosure Types E9000 Indoor Enclosure

Type 1 – General Purpose, Indoor GE motor control centers are made up of standardized vertical
Intended for use indoors, primarily to prevent accidental sections housing vertical and horizontal bus, wiring channels
contact of personnel with the enclosed equipment, in areas and compartmented control units. Sections may be bolted
where unusual service conditions do not exist. In addition, together to form a single panel assembly powered by line
they provide protection against falling dirt. connection at a single point. Normal shipping split is three B
sections maximum.
Type 1 – Gasketed – Semi Dust-tight, Indoor
Intended to cushion doors and mitigate vibration. Standard NEMA 1 or NEMA 1 (Gasketed) Enclosures
Standard finish is light-gray ANSI 61 over a phosphate rust
Type 2 – Drip-proof, Indoor inhibitor. All unpainted parts are zinc-chromate electroplated
Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment or galvanized. Enclosures are furnished with bolt-on rear
against falling noncorrosive liquids and falling dirt. These covers. Hinged rear doors are available as an option. Pan-type
enclosures have provision for drainage. Dripshields on top of doors utilize quarter-turn fasteners. Gasketed doors, cover
the motor control center and neoprene closed-cell gasketing plates, and operating handles are available as an option.
afford protection from falling and splashing liquids. They are Two heavy-duty 3" by 1 1/2", 12-gauge floor sills and 1/4"
not water-tight. structural lifting lugs are included. Open bottom is standard.
Type 3R – Rain-proof, Outdoor NEMA 2 Drip-proof Construction

Intended for use outdoors to protect the enclosed equipment Similar to NEMA 12 gasketed construction except with catch
against rain. They are not dust-proof, snow-proof nor sleet- pan-type dripshield on top and with open bottom. Dripshield
proof (ice-proof). extends four inches beyond front of motor control center.
Standard finish: light gray ANSI 61. Furnished with removable
Type 12 – Industrial Use – Dust-tight and Drip-tight, Indoor conduit cover plates unless otherwise specified.
Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment
against fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt, and light splashing, NEMA 12
seepage, dripping and external condensation of noncorrosive Similar to NEMA 1 gasketed construction except that bottom
liquids. plates are furnished and all removable plates are gasketed.
B1
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Front Elevation & Mounting Locations (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)
B2
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 13" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus
B3
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1200A Main Bus
B4
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1600A to 2500A Main Bus
Top Conduit Entry (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)
B5
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Bottom Conduit Entry 13" Deep Section
B6
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
B7
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Elevation and Mounting 30" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus
Top Conduit Entry 30" Deep Section
B8
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Details for Auto Transformer
B9
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Drip Pan — Nema II 13" Deep Section
Drip Pan — Nema II 20", 22", 30" Deep Sections
Drip Pan — Nema II 25" Deep Section Back-to-Back
B10
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Type C Master Terminal
Used for L and U Shaped Motor Control Center Arrangements
B11
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Incoming Line Terminations
B12
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
B13
Structure
Outdoor Enclosures • Three-point door latch

• 90° door with wind stop
• Reinforced roof
UL Listed Type 3R Non-Walk-In Enclosure (Standard)
• Crane lifting
The standard NEMA 3R enclosure consists of a specially
• 2° roof pitch
constructed MCC section with a mating framework which
• Shipped via flatbed truck
supports the roof and extended front. The basic design is
B similar to switchboard construction. The smaller footprint • 3" floor sills
will permit a broader usage than the optional NEMA 3R
construction. Meets Seismic Zone 4.
B14
Structure
Indoor Enclosures Extra Width Vertical Wireway

24" wide sections can be furnished with 8" wide vertical
Options
wireway and door.
Space Heaters
Space heaters are used to prevent moisture condensation on
the inside of the motor control center. One heater (62.5 watts
at 120 volts AC) is installed in the bottom of each vertical B
section. UL requires space heaters be controlled by a ther-
mostat. One thermostat can control up to 14 heaters and is
located in the top horizontal wireway.
A terminal board for connecting an external 120-volt power

source is standard. The terminal board is located in the top
horizontal wireway adjacent to the thermostat(s). This is
recommended since it permits the space heaters to be energized
even when the motor control center itself is deenergized. If
export crating is involved, the space heater circuit can be
wired to an external plug for energizing the heaters during
shipment and storage.
When specified, space heater power can be provided from Indoor enclosure, exploded view
within the motor control center. Include the required distribution
transformer with primary and secondary protection in the
motor control center. Motor Control Center Construction
Major Structural Components Side Sheets,
An enclosed foreign voltage disconnect switch is available L-H & R-H 0.075"
as an option. Vertical Bus Mounting Channels 0.090"
Case Sills, Front/Rear, Top/Bottom (13 Gauge)
Bottom Plates Top Horizontal Channel
Plates bolt on to the bottom of each motor control center
Lifting Channel (Top) 0.187"
section. They may be removed to facilitate installing conduit.
Channel Sills, Front/Rear 0.105" (12 Gauge)
Extended Height Pull Box (Top Hat) Enclosing Covers/Panels
A pull box can be mounted on top of a vertical section when Rear Covers, 13" & 30" Deep 0.075" (14 Gauge)
specified. The standard height is 12 inches; 6-, 18-, and 24" Rear Covers, 20" & 22" Deep 0.060" (16 Gauge)
heights are also available. Top, front, and end covers are Endplates 0.060" (16 Gauge)
removable for access. Top Conduit Covers 0.060"
Bottomplates 0.060"
Rodent Barriers Vertical Wiretrough Door 0.060"
Metal plates bolted to the bottom of each end section to close Other Steel
the opening between the front and rear floor sills. Not required Unit Barrier Shelves 0.063"
if the floor sills will be removed or imbedded in concrete. Unit Cover Doors 0.075"
Unit Saddles 0.090"
B15
Structure
Indoor Enclosures Center of Gravity
Y
Note that bolt down locations for sections with seismic bracing 20"
Z
change from center of structure (left to right), to four corners
with .635 clearance holes for 1/2" bolts.
X
B
Mounting Requirements for Seismic NEMA 3R with 91.5"
Optional Heavy Base
ARC ARC WELD ALL FOUR

WELD NEMA 3R CORNERS (3/16" BEAD)
END VIEW FRONT VIEW
DOWN
NEMA 3R
FRONT VIEW 6" CHANNEL
For a uniformly loaded 90" high x 20" deep lineup,
ANCHORED center of gravity is:
X = center of lineup
TION 10" MIN. Y = 46 1/2" above bottom of floor sill
WELD
Z = 8" in from front (front-mounted devices 20" deep)
MIN. 8" H BEAM
OR: 10" in from front (back-to-back construction)
40" OR LESS ANCHORED FRONT Z = 5" in from front (13" deep)
AND REAR
6" MIN. 10" MIN.
CEMENT PAD Z = 8 1/2" in from front (22" deep)
WELD WELD
Z = 11" in from front (25" NEMA 3R)
ARC WELD DOWN LENGTH OF NEMA 3R EVERY 40" OR LESS
Typical variations due to uneven loads:
FOR 130MPH WINDS AND 2.25G SHOCK (LENGTH & DEPTH PER OUTLINE)
X = ± 5"
Y = ± 1"
Note:
Seismic Zone 4 testing was performed using 1/2"-13 Grade 5 bolts, torqued to
Z = ± .5"
70 foot-pounds, located in each of the four corners in each section.
Estimated shipping weights per section

Sections Lbs Kg
90"H x 20"W Indoor Nema 1 & 12 600 272
90"H x 20"W Indoor Back-to-Back Nema 1 & 13 700 318
90"H x 20"W Outdoor Nema 3R 725 329
B16
Structure
Bus Selection Vertical Bus Extensions

Vertical bus is available in 30" wide enclosures maximum.
All continuous-current rating selections or recommendations The maximum vertical bus loading is calculated as follows:
are based on the motor control center being located in a 80 percent of the feeder trip or fuse clip rating, plus 100
maximum 40° C (104°F) ambient. Refer to General (Section A) percent of the starter full load amps, plus 25 percent of the
for other environmental considerations. largest motor full load amps. This total cannot exceed the
vertical bus rating. Tin plated copper vertical bus is standard, B
Main Horizontal Bus with silver plating as an option.
The size of motor control center main bus and cables feeding
the main bus is based on the current-carrying capacity Neutral Bus
required for motors plus other connected loads. Neutral lugs will be provided as applicable. Neutral bus is
normally sized at 50 percent of the main bus ampacity.
The capacity required for motors can be taken as 125 percent
of the full-load rating of the largest motor plus 100 percent Ground Bus
of the full-load rating of all other motors to be operated at the NEC requires a ground bus in multisection motor control
same time. Modified requirements resulting from duty-cycle centers. 300 ampere Cu ground bus will meet minimum size
or demand factor can be taken into account. requirements for main busses rated through 2000 amperes.
A clearance hole for 3/8" hardware is provided in each section.
The current-carrying capacity required for other connected The default for incoming ground termination is (3) #2-1/0 for
loads should be computed on the basis of 100 percent of 300A ground bus and (3) 1/0-500 kcmil for 600A ground bus.
the sum of individual loads except where a demand factor Ground bar comes with 6 predrilled holes for ground
can properly be applied to reduce this total. Consideration connectors.
should be given to future requirements.
Options
The following UL listed options are available:
• Shutter mechanism for vertical bus stab openings.
• Fully-insulated main horizontal bus.
• Silver plated horizontal and vertical bus.
• Silver plated ground bus.
Bus Systems/Selection
Short-Circuit Rating in RMS
Continuous CurrentÄ Material Symmetrical Amperes–(kA)
MCC Bus Rating Amperes Cu 65 100 UL Notes
600 X X X 1/4" x 2" Bus

800 X X X 3/8" x 2" Bus
Main Horizontal 1200 X X X 1/2" x 2" Bus
1600À X X X (2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
2000À X X X (2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
2500ÀÂ X X X (2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
Vertical 300Á X X X 3/8" x 3/4"

600/850Ã X X X 3/8" x 1 1/2"
300 X X
600 X X
Neutral 800 X X
1200 X X
1250 X X
300 X X 1/4" x 1"

Horizontal Ground
600 X X 1/4" X 2"
Vertical Grounds 150 X X 1/8" x 1"
All values shown based on 1200A/sq.in. density rating. Alternate density ratings are available; if required, consult factory.
À Requires a 22" deep section.

Á Will not except 600A stabs.
Â Provided with fans.
Ã 1200A horizontal or higher.
Ä Bus ratings based on UL Temperature Rise testing.
B17
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Mains Fused Switch Mains

Interrupting Rating
General RMS Amps Construction
Amperes (In thousands)À Space UL Notes
Main units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, Volts Stab- Bolt- Units Listed
either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Sizes by ampere 240 480 600 In In
Fusible Switches
rating, short-circuit rating, type construction and space units
200 100 100 100 X 2 X
Ã
required are given in the accompanying lists. 400 MCS 100 100 100 X 4 X
600 MCS 100 100 100 X 4 X Ã
Normally, thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fuses are High Pressure Contact Switch
necessary for main protection. The short-circuit interrupting 800 100 100 100 X 6 X Á
1200 100 100 100 X 6 X Á
rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a
Â
main unit for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds
1600
2500
100
100
100
100
100
100
X
X
6
6
X
X Â
C
the maximum available fault current.
À With Class J, R and L fuses.
Á Requires a 24" wide by 20” deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
For reverse-fed circuit breakers, refer to factory for details. Â Requires 30" wide by 30" deep section. Must be NEMA 1 Construction, 80% rated only.
Ã Class J fuse is 3X.
Refer to specific breaker publications for time-current char-

acteristics and programmable options for the various types
of circuit breakers. A list of these publications is given in
Application Data (Section J).
Service Entrance
UL listed main units containing only circuit breakers or fused
switches may be UL classified as suitable for service entrance.
If a single disconnect is furnished as a disconnect for all
load circuits the unit will be marked “Main”.
In order for the units to be classified as suitable for service

entrance, the incoming phase conductors must connect
directly to the disconnect device line terminals or to a UL
listed main line terminal assembly.
A grounding electrode conductor terminal connector sized in

accordance with the circuit ampacity is furnished in one
section. Three-phase, four-wire systems include a neutral
bonding jumper for grounding the neutral conductor during
installation. Ground fault protection is required for discon-
nects 1000A and above for solidly grounded wye services,
where phase-to-ground is more than 150 volts (NEC 230.95).
Main Metering/Lugs
Line side CTs can be provided in the main compartment for
use with a metering unit. This option in some cases will add
space.
If crimp type lugs are required, a bus assembly is fabricated

to provide a landing pad for these terminals. This extends
the space required for the main and must be factory
installed. Size will be the same as NEMA lug option.
C1
Mains
Circuit Breaker Mains – Standard Selection
CB IC (kA) Stab- Bolt- Space UL (X) Entry
Amperes Notes
Type 240V 480V 600V In In Units Listed Top/Bot
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
150 SEL/SEP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1 X T/B
250 SFL/SFP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 11⁄2 X T/B
600 SGL/SGP 65/100 65/100 65/65 X 2 X T/B
1200 SKL 65 65 42 X 3.5 X ÀÄ T/B
Power Break® Insulated-Case MicroVersaTrip
800 SSF/SHF 65 65 42 X 6 (24W) X Á T/B
Á
C 1200
1600
SSF/SHF
SSF/SHF
65
65/100
65
65/100
42
42/65
X
X
6 (24W)
6 (30W)
X
X Â
T/B
T/B
2000 SSF/SHF 65/100 65/100 42/65 X 6 (30W) X ÂÅ T/B
2500 SSF/SHF 65/100 65/100 42/65 X 6 (36W) X ÂÅ T/B
800 SSD 65 65 42 X 6 (30W) – ÅÆ³ T/B
1600 SSD 65 65 42 X 6 (30W) – ÂÅÆ³ T/B
2000 SSD 65 65 42 X 6 (30W) – ÂÅÆ³ T/B
Conventional, Thermal Magnetic
150 THED 30 25 18 X 11⁄2 X T/B
Limiter Assisted, Thermal Magnetic
100 THEDL – – 100 X 1 X T/B
À When a size 6 or 7 starter is in the motor control center lineup, use a 1200 ampere MicroVersaTrip circuit breaker as a main.
Á Requires special section 90" high, 24" wide, 20" deep
Â Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep.
Ã Requires full 20" depth of enclosure; rear is not available for back-to-back construction.
Ä Main breaker must be mounted at top of the section and requires full 20" depth of enclosure.
Å Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep. When section is on the left, allow for a 5" spacer to permit unit doors on the right to open.
Æ For UL or service entrance labels provide main breaker in switchboard construction.
³ Consult factory for availability.
Data subject to change without notice
Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment per NEC

Each main or feeder disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more
and installed on a solidly grounded wye electrical system of
more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts
phase-to-phase, shall be provided with ground-fault protection
of equipment.
Exception No 1: The above is not required if the disconnect
is for a continuous industrial process where a non-orderly
shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards.
Exception No 2: The above is not required for fire pumps.
Exception No 3: The above is not required if ground-fault
protection is provided ahead of the equipment.
Note: The above is paraphrased from NEC section 215.10, 215.95 and 240.13.
C2
Feeders
Feeder units consist of an externally operable circuit discon-
nect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Thermal
magnetic circuit breakers are required unless the feeder
supplies a critical circuit, such as a fire pump controller.
Select the fuse or circuit breaker trip rating based on the

feeder circuit continuous current rating in accordance with
the NEC. Feeder unit short-circuit interruption ratings must
equal or exceed the available short-circuit currents.
C
Fused Switch Feeders
Interrupting Rating
RMS Amps Construction
Amperes (In thousands)À Space UL Notes
Volts Stab- Bolt- Units Listed
240 480 600 In In À (X)
Fusible Switches
30 100 100 100 X 1 X
30/30 100 100 100 X 1 X Á
60 100 100 100 X 1 X
60/60 100 100 100 X 1 X Á
100 100 100 100 X 1.5 X
100/30 100 100 100 X 1.5 X
100/60 100 100 100 X 1.5 X
100/100 100 100 100 X 1.5 X
200 100 100 100 X 2 X
400 MCS 100 100 100 X 3 X
600 MCS 100 100 100 X 3 X
THPR High Pressure Contact Switch
800 100 100 100 X 6 X Â
1200 100 100 100 X 6 X Â
1600Ã 100 100 100 X 6 – Â
À Top/bottom entry.
Á Dual or twin feeder units.
Â Requires a 24" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
Ã Requires a 30" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
C3
Feeders
Circuit Breaker Feeders – Standard Selection
Amperes CB IC (kA) Stab- Bolt- Space UL (X) Notes Entry
Type 240V 480V 600V In In Units Listed Top/Bot
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
100 SEL/SEP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1/2 X T/B
100/100 SEL/SEP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1 X T/B
150 SEL/SEP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1/2 X T/B
150/150 SEL/SEP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1 1/2 X T/B
250 SFL/SFP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 1 X Á T/B
250/250 SFL/SFP 65/100 65/100 25/25 X 2 X Á T/B
C 600
1200
SGL/SGP
SKL
65/100
65
65/100
65
65/65
42
X
X
2
3.5
X
X ÂÃ
T/B
T
Conventional, Thermal Magnetic
100 THED 30 25 18 X 1/2 X À T/B
150 THED 30 25 18 X 1 X T/B
À When feeder unit accessories are required such as shunt trip, AUX switch, UV release, etc., unit height must be a minimum of 1 space.
Á 1X units are available with horizontal handle.
Â Requires full depth of enclosure; (20" deep minimum).
Ã Feeder units 1000A and over should have ground fault sensing on three-phase, four-wire systems where line to ground voltage is more than 150V.
Options for Mains and Feeders

Accessories for Spectra Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Breaker Type Bell Alarm Shunt TripÀ Aux. SwitchÁ Total # of Accessories
or Undervoltage Release
All Spectra Left Pole Left Pole Right Pole Aux. Switch & Bell Alarm Plus 1 other
Accessories for Power Break
Breaker Type Bell Alarm Auxiliary Shunt Undervoltage Blown Fuse Electrical Total No. of
Switch Switch Trip Release Trip Operator Accessories
SSF, SHF UL ULÂÃ UL UL UL UL AllÄ
À Shunt trip requires aux. switch (G&K) or bell alarm (E&F) for continuous operation.
Á Aux. switch available @ 240V max only.
Â 600V AC aux. switches are not UL Listed.
Ã Maximum number of SPDT aux. switch elements is 10 when shunt trip is used, 12 without shunt.
Ä UVR and blown fuse trip cannot be installed simultaneously.
C4
Options for Mains and Feeders Accessories for High Pressure Contact Switches
• Integral ground fault with three-phase sensor adjustable
Terminals for Field Wiring Mains and Feeders pick-up, adjustable time-delay, test function, mechanical
ground fault indicator.
Will Accept WireÁ
AWG/kcmilÀ
Terminal Size Material
• Integral ground fault with three-phase sensor and relay
Switches only (without test function, without indicator).
30A QMW 14-8 Cu-Al • Integrally mounted three-phase current sensor and 120
60A QMW 14-2 Cu volt AC electric trip only, for use with ITI BGFL relay and
12-2 Al monitor panel.
100A QMW 14-1/0 Cu
12-1/0 Al
• Blown fuse protection (480 volts max.)
200A QMW (1) 6-250 Cu-Al • 1,2,3 or 4 SPDT auxiliary switches rate 6 amperes, 240
400A MCS (Molded Case Switch) (1) 2-350Â Cu-Al volts AC. C
(1) 8-600 Cu-Al
600A MCS (Molded Case Switch) (1) 8-600 Cu-Al Key Interlocking
(1) 4-500Â Cu-Al
(2) 6-500 Cu-Al
Provisions for key interlocking can be provided on all circuit
HPC Switch breakers over 250A and fusible switches over 100A. The
800-1600A 300-750 Cu standard key lock is by Superior Lock Corporation. However,
300-800 Al coordination with Kirk key locking will be supplied if necessary.
Circuit Breakers The following information is required when lock coordination
SE150 15-150A 1 lug 12-3/0 Cu-Al
SF250 70-225A 1 lug 8-350 Cu-Al
is to be provided with other up-stream or down-stream
SG600 1 lug 6-600 Cu-Al devices remote from the motor control center:
125-600A 2 lugs 2/0-500 Cu-Al
PURCHASED BY ________________________________
SK1200 3 lugs (800A) 3/0-500 Cu-Al
300-1200A 3 lugs 300-750 Cu-Al ULTIMATE USER ________________________________
4 lugs 250-400 Cu-Al DESTINATION __________________________________
THED 15-30A 14-8 Cu-Al LOCK MANUFACTURER __________________________
THEDL (100A Max) 35-60A 13-3 Cu-Al LOCK NUMBER_________________________________
70-110A 6-2/0 Cu
PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER______________________
70-110A 4-2/0 Al
125-150A 2-3/0 Cu-Al Note: Minimum 24" high units are required for key interlocking. UL listed option.
Ground Lug 1/0-300 Cu-Al
À Conductor #1 and smaller may be noted 60/75°C. Conductors #0 and larger must Ground Fault Protection
be rated 75°C.
Á Conductor sizes based on 1/Ph unless otherwise indicated.
Two types of UL listed ground fault protection can be provided as
Â Feeders. an option with feeder and main circuit breakers. A shunt trip device
is required in the circuit breaker to trip the breaker if a ground fault
should occur. ITI BGFL ground break protective relaying is recommended
for main breaker application. Model #252 ground fault relaying is
Accessories for Fused Switches
Auxiliary Contacts recommended for most feeder applications. See Components
Switch Rating 1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 1 N0, 1 NC (Section H) for description of both ground fault relay types. A mini-
30 UL UL UL UL mum of 12" additional space height is required in addition to the
60 UL UL UL UL standard space height shown for each main feeder unit.
100 UL UL UL UL
200 UL UL UL UL A separate 120-volt source for the shunt trip circuit will decrease
400 UL UL UL UL
the additional space required.
600 UL UL UL UL
Note: Aux. contacts listed above are shown with fused switch in the open position. Refer to page J19 for application help.
C5
Incoming Line Terminations

The following cable terminal compartments are commonly
specified for use in motor control center construction where
the main AC power disconnect is located upstream of the
motor control center.
For other custom cable termination arrangements refer to

Company. The number of cables indicated must not be
exceeded to maintain the short-circuit rating.
C MLO Space in inches / Minimum Top Feed

Cables/lugÂ Cables/phase
Incoming Line Cable Vertical Space Available Cable Range Per
Width & Conduit Space
Assemblies NEMA BendingÆ
Top Bottom Depth (Fig.1)
18/66 - 2 2 #2-350 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
18/66 - 3 3 #6-300 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
600A Std. LugÃÄ - 24/54 2 2 #2-600 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
- 24/54 3 3 #2-500 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
- 30/48 1 2 #2-600 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
18/66 - 1 2 #2-350 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
600A NEMA LugÁ
- 30/48 1 2 #2-600 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
24/60 24/54 4 4 #2-500 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
800A/1200A
24/60 24/54 3 3 #2-600 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
GE Std. LugÀÃ
30/54 24/54 4 4 #2-600 kcmil 20"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
800A/1200A NEMA - 30/48Å 1 4 500-750kcmil 24"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
Lug 36/58 36/42 1 4 500-1000kcmil 24"x13" 5"x13.7" A-B
1600A NEMA Lug 72/0 72/0 1 8 500-1000kcmil 30"x30" 13"x17.7" A-C
2000A NEMA LugÁÃ 72/0 72/0 1 8 500-1000kcmil 30"x30" 13"x27.6" A-C
2500A NEMA LugÁÃ 72/0 72/0 1 10 500-1000kcmil 36"x30" 13"x27.6" A-C
À Space shown above is for 20" deep design 800A to 1200A MLO.
Á Burndy type YA crimp lugs is available as an option. Crimp Lugs require NEMA drilling and NEMA Lug spacing.
Â Mechanical compression Cu/Al Lugs furnished for 75°C cable.
Ã Cu/Al standard. Copper only lugs are available as an option. These may affect number of cables per lug.
Ä NEMA wire bending rules reduce cable size if entry is from the side.
Å 13" deep requires full section no vertical bus.
Æ Lug cable range may be larger than the NEMA bending allows above.
Fig. 1
A
B
Busway Entrances Spectra Series Busway

GE motor control centers include provisions for connecting Max. Busway Ampacity
Entry Pull Box Enclosure Size Cu Al
GE busways. Busways must be braced for maximum available
Std 1000A/IN2 Std 750A/IN2
short circuit current. Minimum enclosure sizes for busway Top 12" 30"W x 22"D 1600 1500 1350 1000
are shown in the adjacent table. Refer to the factory for Bottom – 30"W x 22"D 1600 1500 1350 1000
other type busway. Include busway requisition number Top 12" 30"W x 22"D 2000 2000 2000 2000
Bottom – 30"W x 22"D 2000 2000 2000 2000
when ordering Motor Control Center. Top 12" 36"W x 22"D 2500 2500 2500 2500
Bottom – 36"W x 22"D 2500 2500 2500 2500
Note: Bus bars must be phased front-to-rear in 24" width enclosure. Bottom entry
requires full section. For busway, refer to factory.
C6
Automatic Transfer Switches DS Disconnect Switch for source voltage to transfer

power panel, 600A to 1200A only
GE motor control centers may be furnished with GE Zenith DT Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to Source
transfer switches. The switch is mounted in a separate unit 1 on retransfer
and cable-connected to the motor control center bus. DW Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to Source
Manual control, pushbuttons, pilot lights and switches may 2 on retransfer
be door-or bracket-mounted within the unit. Up-stream E Engine Start Relay
overcurrent protection must be provided for each power EL/P Event Log of last 16 events
source. The unit can be UL listed if all components are listed K/P Frequency Indication on the controller
for use in motor control center equipments. LNP Center-off position LCD-Indicator
L1,2,3,4 LED lights, Source 1&2 position, Source 1&2 available
The following features apply to ZTSD open-type switches P1 Engine Start Timer (adj. To 6 sec.) C
which are UL listed through 480 volts and CSA listed through R50 In Phase monitor between Normal (Source 1) and
600VAC. For specific ratings and additional optional features Emergency (Source 2) to allow transfer
refer to GE Zenith. S13P Microprocessor activated commit/no commit on
transferring to Emergency (Source 2) (with
GE Zenith ZTSD Utility to Generator time delay MX 250 enable/disable settings)
Module Standard Features: T Retransfer to Normal (Source1) adjustable time delay
U Engine stop / cool down timer
6P Microprocessor activated test switch (momentary) V1 Voltage imbalance between phases (3 phase only)
A3 Aux Contact - closed in emergency (Source 2) W Adjustable time delay on transfer to Emergency
Additional available up to 10, must be specified (Source2)
A4 Aux Contact - closed in normal (Source 1) YEN Bypass transfer timers function (soft key switch in
Additional available up to 10, must be specified microprocessor )
CDT Exerciser no load timer
Withstand Current Ratings (WCR) for Automatic Transfer SwitchesÀ

Available RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 480 Volts AC
Minimum When Used with Class J or L When Used with Class RK-5 Fuses or
MCC Space UnitsÁ MCC Enclosure Switch Rating (Amps)Â Current-Limiting Fuses Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Widths (In Inches) WCR Max. Fuse Size (Amps) WCR Max. Breaker Size (Amps)
3 24 40 100,000 50 22,000 150
3 24 80 200,000 100 22,000 150
3 24 100 200,000 125 22,000 150
3 24 150 200,000 200 42,000 400
3 24 260 200,000 350 42,000 400
3 24 400 200,000 600 50,000 400
3 24 600 200,000 750 65,000 800
6 30 800 200,000 1200 65,000 1200
6 30 1000 200,000 1200 65,000 1200
6 30 1200 200,000 1200 65,000 1200
À 3-pole vs. 4-pole transfer switches: Typically, most MCCs do not have the neutral pulled, so a 3-pole switch will suffice. If the generator neutral is bonded to the frame
of the generator and pulled to the MCC to provide a single-phase connection, a 4-pole transfer switch is required to facilitate transferring the neutral from the Utility
to the Generator connection.
Á Does not include space for protection; switches must be mounted at bottom of section in order to install vertical bus above switch.
Â Larger sizes require special over-size enclosures. Refer to factory.
Transitions
Transitions for connecting control centers to General Electric
transformers, low-voltage switchgear or switchboards are
available and generally the same depth as the equipment to
which they are to be connected. Appropriate overcurrent
protection for the control center must be provided.
C7
Starters
General Basic combination motor starter units consist of:

1. Externally operable circuit disconnect.
Combination motor control starter units consist of an exter- 2. Magnetic starter with a thermal-magnetic, or electronic
nally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or overload relay.
circuit breaker, and a magnetic starter with an overload 3. External overload reset operator.
relay in the motor lines. 4. Tapped line voltage, 120-volt CPT control power or external
control power.
Unit NEMA sizes listed are based on continuous horsepower 5. Pull-apart control terminal boards through NEMA Size 5.
ratings. The maximum horsepower rating of each NEMA size 6. Pull-apart power terminal boards through NEMA Size 2
controller is reduced for long accelerating times and for jogging (when BT specified).
or plugging duty. Jogging duty is defined as 5 or more contac- 7. Extra CPT capacity for operating auxiliary relays and pilot
tor openings or closings per minute or over 10 in a 10-minute devices (when specified).
period. Plugging is rapidly stopping or reversing the motor 8. Plug-in construction through NEMA Size 5 (FVNR) starters.
by reversing the phase sequence of the power supplied to Bolt-in construction may require vertical bus modifications.
the motor. Refer to the factory anytime accelerating times
exceed 10 seconds or jogging or plugging duty is required. Specify basic starter units from the tables in this section.
Refer to the factory when `Design E’ motors are used, not to Starters are listed by starter function, line voltage, HP, NEMA D
be confused with EPAC motors. size, and combination short-circuit rating. Indicate type
control power desired. Include any options from “Optional
The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type Modifications,” noting additional space requirements for
disconnect furnished. Select a starter combination for which some options.
the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum
available fault current. Typical starter circuits are shown in (Section K). Starters can
also be used for lighting or resistive heat loads (Section J).
D1
Starters
Selection Tables Part Winding

Circuit UL
Circuit Breaker Type NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes
Size Hp (kA) Type Units (X)
1 10 25 TEC 2
208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters 2 20 25 TEC 2
3 40 25 TEC 4
FVNR 4 – – – –
5 – – – –
Circuit UL
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes 1 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 2
Size Hp (kA) Type Units (X) 2 20 65/100 SEL/SEP 2
1 7.5 25 TEC 1 X Á 3 40 65/100 SFL/SFP 4.5
2 10 25 TEC 1 X 4 75 100 SGL 5
3 25 25 TEC 1.5 X 5 – – – –
4 40 25 SFL 2 X
5 75 100 SGL 3 X
6 150 65 SKL 3.5 X
1 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 1 X Y-Delta
2 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 1 X Circuit UL
3 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 1.5 X NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes
4 40 65/100 SFL/SFP 2 X Size Hp (kA) Type Units (X)
D 5 75 100 SGL 3.0 X 2
3
20
40
25
25
TEC
TEC
4
4.5
6 150 65 SKL 4 X
4 60 100 TGL 5.5
5 – – – – Ã
2 20 65/100 SEL/SEP 4
FVR 3 40 65/100 SEL/SEP 5
4 60 100 TGL 5.5
Circuit UL 5 150 100 TGL 5.5 Ã
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes
6 300 100 TGL 5.5
1 7.5 25 TEC 2 X
2 10 25 TEC 2 X
3 25 25 TEC 1.5 X
2S1W, 2S2W
4 40 25 SFL 2 X
5 75 100 SGL 3 X Max. Hp Circuit UL Rev
6 150 65 SKL 3.5 – NEMA Constant Constant IC Breaker Space Listed Notes Space
1 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X Size Variable Torque HP (kA) Type Units (X) Units
2 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 1 7.5 5 25 TEC 1.5 X 2.5
3 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 3.5 X 2 10 7.5 25 TEC 2 X 3
4 40 65/100 SFL/SFP 4 X 3 25 20 25 TEC 4 X 4.5
5 75 100 SGL 5.5 X 4 40 30 25 SFL 4.5 X 7.5
6 150 65 SKL 8.5 – À 5 75 60 30 SGL 5 – Á 10
6 150 100 65 SGL/SKL 8.5 – À –
1 7.5 5 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 2.5
2 10 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 3
RVAT 3 25 20 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 X 4.5
4 40 30 65/100 SFL/SFP 4.5 X 5.5
Á
Circuit Space UnitsÂ UL
5 75 60 100 SGL 5.5 – 10
À
NEMA Max. IC Breaker 13" 20" Listed Notes
Size Hp (kA) Type Deep Deep (X) 6 150 100 65 SKL 8.5 – –
2 10 25 TEC 4 4 X
3 25 25 TEC 5 4 X
4 40 25 SFL 5 4 X
5 75 100 SGL – 5 X Á
6 150 65 SKL N/A 12 X À
2 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 4 X
3 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 5 4 X
4 40 65/100 SEL/SEP 5.5 4.5 X
5 75 100 SGL – 5 X Á
6 150 65 SKL N/A 12 X À
À Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W).
Á A 1/2X compact starter is available.
Â The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions
are critical, refer to Company. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical
height.
Ã Refer to factory.
D2
Starters

Circuit UL
1 10 25 TEC 2
3 50 25 TEC 4
FVNR 4 – – – –
5 – – – – Ã
Circuit UL 1 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 2
Ä
3 50 65/100 SEL/SEP 4.5
1 7.5 25 TEC 1 X
4 75 100 SGL 5
Ã
2 15 25 TEC 1 X
5 – – – –
3 30 25 TEC 1.5 X
4 50 25 TEC 2 X
5 100 100 SGL 3 X
6 200 65 SKL 5.5 X
Y-Delta
1 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 1 X
3 30 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X
4
5
50
100
65/100
100
SFL/SFP
SGL
2.5
3
X
X
2 25 25 TEC 4
À
D
À
3 50 25 TEC 4.5
À
6 200 65 SKL 6 X
4 75 100 SGL 5.5
5 – – – – Ã
2 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 4
3 50 65/100 SEL/SEP 5 À
FVR 4 75 100 SGL 5.5 À
Circuit UL 5 150 100 SGL 5.5 Ã
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes 6 350 100 SGL 5.5 Ã
1 7.5 25 TEC 2 X
2 15 25 TEC 2 X
3 30 25 TEC 3 X 2S1W, 2S2W
4 50 25 TEC 3 X
À
Max. Hp Circuit UL Rev
5 100 100 SGL 5.5 X
Á
NEMA Constant Constant IC Breaker Space Listed Notes Space
6 200 65 SKL 8.5 – Size Variable Torque HP (kA) Type Units (X) Units
1 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 1 7.5 5 25 TEC 2 X 2.5
2 15 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 2 15 10 25 TEC 2 X 3
3 30 65/100 SEL/SEP 3 X 3 30 25 25 TEC 4 X 4.5
4 50 65/100 SFL/SFP 3 X
À
4 50 40 25 SFL 4.5 X 5.5
5 100 100 SGL 5.5 X Á
Á
5 100 75 30 SGL 5.5 – 10
6 200 65 SKL 8.5 – 6 200 150 65 SKL 8.5 – Á –
1 7.5 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 2.5
2 15 20 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 3
3 30 40 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 X 4.5
RVAT 4 50 75 65/100 SFL/SFP 4.5 X 7.5
Circuit Space UnitsÂ UL 5 100 150 100 SGL 5.5 – Á 10
NEMA Max. IC Breaker 13" 20" Listed Notes 6 200 150 65 SKL 8.5 – Á –
Size Hp (kA) Type Deep Deep (X)
2 15 25 TEC 4 4 X
3 30 25 TEC 5 4 X
5 100 100 SGL N/A 5 X
6 200 65 SKL N/A 12 X Á
2 15 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 4 X
3 30 65/100 SEL/SEP 5 4 X
4 50 65/100 SFL/SFP 6 4.5 X
5 100 100 SGL N/A 5 X
6 200 65 SKL N/A 12 X Á
À Requires 24" wide section.

Á Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W).
height.
Ä A 1/2X compact starter is available.
D3
Starters

Circuit UL
1 15 25 TEC 2
3 75 25 TEC 4
FVNR 4 150 10 SGL 4.5
5 – – – – Ä
Circuit UL 1 15 65/100 SEL/SEP 2
Å
3 75 65/100 SEL/SEP 4.5
1 10 25 TEC 1 X
4 150 100 SGL 5
Ä
2 25 25 TEC 1 X
5 – – – –
3 50 25 TEC 1.5 X
4 100 25 SFL 2 X
5 200 100 SGL 3 X
6 400 65 SKL 5.5 X
Y-Delta, OT
1 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 1 X
3 50 65/100 SEL/SEP 1.5 X
D 4
5
100
200
65/100
100
SFL/SFP
SGL
2
3.0
X
X
2
3
40
75
25/65
25/65
TEC/SE
TEC/SGL
3
3.5 À
À
6 400 65 SKL 5.5 X
4 150 65 SGL 4.5
5 300 65 SGL 5
FVR
Circuit UL 2S1W, 2S2W
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes Max. Hp Circuit UL Rev
1 10 25 TEC 1.5 X
Size Variable Torque HP (kA) Type Units (X) Units
2 25 25 TEC 2 X
1 10 7.5 25 TEC 1.5 X 2.5
3 50 25 TEC 3 X
2 25 20 25 TEC 2 X 3
4 100 25 SFL 3 X
À
3 50 40 25 TEC 3.5 X 4.5
5 200 100 SGL 6 X
Á
4 100 75 25 SFL 4.5 X 5.5
ÀÁ
6 400 65 SKL 12 –
5 200 150 30 TJC 6 – 10
Á
1 10 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X
6 400 300 65 SKL 12 – –
2 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X
1 10 7.5 65/100 SEL/SEP 1.5 X 2.5
3 50 65/100 SEL/SEP 3 X
2 25 20 65/100 SEL/SEP 2 X 3
4 100 65/100 SFL/SFP 4 X
À
3 50 40 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 X 4.5
5 200 100 SGL 5.5 X
Á
4 100 75 65/100 SFL/SFP 4.5 X 7.5
ÀÁ
6 400 65 SKL 8.5 –
5 200 150 100 SGL 6 – 10
6 400 300 65 SKL 12 – Á –
RVAT
Circuit Space UnitsÂ UL
2 25 25 TEC 4 4 X
3 50 25 TEC 5 4 X
4 100 25 TEC 5 4 X
5 200 100 SGL – 5 X Â
6 400 65 SKL N/A 12 X Á
2 25 65/100 SEL/SEP 4 4 X
3 50 65/100 SEL/SEP 5 4 X
4 100 65/100 SEL/SEP 6 4.5 X
5 200 100 SGL N/A 5 X Â
6 400 65 SKL N/A 12 X Á

Á Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24” wide sections, 20” deep (2S1W not
available).
Â Size 5 RVAT cannot be mounted in 13Æ deep enclosure.
Ã The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions
height.
Ä Refer to factory.
Å A 1/2X compact starter is available.
D4
Starters

Circuit UL
Fused Switch Type NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes
1 15 25 SEL 2
575 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters 2 40 25 SEL 2
3 75 25 SEL 4.5
FVNR 4 150 10 SGL 5
5 – – – – Ã
Circuit UL 1 15 100 TECL 2
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes 2 40 100 TECL 2
3 75 100 TECL 4
1 10 25 SEL 1 X
4 150 42 SGL 5
Ã
2 25 25 SEL 1 X
5 – – – –
3 50 25 SEL 1.5 X
4 100 25 SFL 2 X
5 200 65 SGL 3 X
6 400 42 SKL 6 X À
Y-Delta, OT
1 10 100 TECL 1 X
2 25 100 TECL 1 X Circuit UL
3 50 100 TECL 1.5 X
4
5
100
200
42
65
SGL
SGL
2
3.5
X
X
2
3
40
75
25
25
SEL
SEL
3
3.5 À
D
À
6 400 42 SKL 6 X
4 100 25 SEL 4.5
4 150 100 SGL 5 À
5 – – – – Ã
2 40 100 TECL 3
FVR 3 75 100 TECL 3.5 À
Circuit UL 4 150 42 SGL 5 À
NEMA Max. IC Breaker Space Listed Notes 5 – – – – Ã
1 10 25 SEL 2 X
2 25 25 SEL 2 X
3 50 25 SEL 3 X 2S1W, 2S2W
4 100 25 SFL 3 X
À
Max. Hp Circuit UL Rev
5 200 65 SGL 5.5 X
Á
6 400 42 SKL 8.5 –
Size Variable Torque HP (kA) Type Units (X) Units
1 10 100 TECL 2 X
1 10 7.5 25 SEL 2 X 2.5
2 25 100 TECL 2 X
2 25 20 25 SEL 2 X 3
3 50 100 TECL 3 X
3 50 40 25 SEL 4 X 4.5
4 100 42 SGL 3 X
À
4 100 75 25 SFL 5 X 7.5
ÀÁ
5 200 100 SGL 5.5 X
À
5 200 150 22 SGL 5.5 – 10
Á
6 400 42 SKL 8.5 X
6 400 300 42 SKL 8.5 – –
1 10 7.5 100 TECL 2 X 2.5
2 25 20 100 TECL 2 X 3
3 50 40 100 TECL 3.5 X 4.5
RVAT 4 100 75 100 TECL 3.5 – 5.5
Circuit Space UnitsÂ UL 5 200 150 100 SGL 5.5 – ÀÁ 10
2 25 25 SEL 4 4 X
3 50 25 SEL 5 4 X
4 100 25 SFL 6 4.5 X
5 200 65 SGL 5 4.5 X
6 400 42 SKL N/A 12 X Á
2 25 100 TECL 4 4 X
3 50 100 TECL 5 4 X
4 100 100 TECL 5 4 –
5 200 100 SGL N/A 5 X
6 400 42 SKL N/A 11 X Á

Á Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 20 and 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W).
height.
D5
Starters

Class RK-1,
Fused Switch Type RK-5, J-TD UL
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor StartersÄÆ Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
1 7.5 100 30 30 2
2 15 100 100 60 2
FVNR 3 20 65 100 100 4 Ä
Class RK-1, 3 30 100 200 200 5
RK-5, J-TD UL 4 60 100 400 400 5.5
Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
1 7.5 100 30 30 1 X
2 10 100 60 60 1 X Y-Delta, OT
3 15 65 100 60 2 X Class RK-1,
3 25 65 100 100 2.5 X RK-5, J-TD UL
3 25 100 200 200 2.5 X NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
4 40 100 200 200 3.5 X Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
5 75 100 400 400 5 X 2 7.5 100 60 30 3 Á
6 150 – 600 600 – – 2 10 100 60 30 3
D 2
3
15
20
100
65
100
100
60
100
3
4 À
3 30 100 200 200 5 À
FVR 4 40 100 200 200 5 À
Class RK-1, 4 60 100 400 400 6 Ã
RK-5, J-TD UL
1 7.5 100 30 30 1.5 X 2S1W, 2S2W
2 10 100 60 60 2 X Class RK-1,
3 15 65 100 60 3 X Ä Max. Hp RK-5, J-TD UL
3 25 65 100 100 3.5 X Ä NEMA CT Constant IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
4 40 100 200 200 5 X Size VT HP (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
5 75 100 400 400 9.5 X ÂÅ 1 7.5 5 100 30 30 2 X
6 – – – – – – 2 – 7.5 100 60 30 2 X
2 10 – 100 60 60 2 X
3 15 15 65 100 60 3.5 X Ä
3 25 20 65 100 100 3.5 X Ä
RVAT 4 40 – 100 200 200 5.5 X
Class RK-1, Space 5 75 – 100 400 400 8.5 – Â
RK-5, J-TD Units UL 1 7.5 5 100 30 30 2 X
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip 13" 20" Listed Notes 2 – 7.5 100 60 30 2 X
2 10 – 100 60 60 2 X
Ä
Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Deep Deep (X)
3 15 15 65 100 60 3.5 X
Ä
2 10 100 60 60 4 4 X
3 15 65 100 60 5 4 X Ä 3 25 20 65 100 100 3.5 X
Ä 4 40 – 100 200 200 5.5 X
Â
3 25 65 100 100 5 4 X
5 75 – 100 400 400 8.5 –
Â
4 40 100 200 200 6 5 X
5 75 100 400 400 – 6 X Â 6 100 – – 600 600 8.5 –
6 – – – – – – –

Á Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
Â Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand
section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 31/2X used for disconnect.
Ã Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal
bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere
UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.
Ä Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.
Å Requires 12" bottom wireway cover to UL Label.
Æ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
D6
Starters

Class RK-1,
230 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor StartersÄÆ Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
1 7.5 100 30 30 2
2 15 100 60 60 2
FVNR 2 20 100 100 100 2
Class RK-1, 3 30 65 100 100 4 Å
RK-5, J-TD UL 4 60 100 400 400 5.5
1 7.5 100 30 30 1 X
2 15 100 60 60 1 X
Y-Delta, OT
3 30 65 100 100 2 X Å Class RK-1,
3 30 100 200 200 2.5 X RK-5, J-TD UL
5 100 100 400 400 5 X Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
6 200 100 600 600 5.5 – À 2 7.5 100 60 30 4
2 10 100 60 30 4
2
2
15
20
100
100
60
100
60
100
4
4
D
FVR 3 30 65 100 100 4.5 ÀÅ
Class RK-1, 4 60 100 400 400 6 Ã
RK-5, J-TD UL
1 7.5 100 30 30 1.5 X 2S1W, 2S2W
2 15 100 60 60 2 X
Å
Class RK-1,
3 30 65 100 100 3 X Max. Hp RK-5, J-TD UL
4 50 100 200 200 5 X
ÂÅ
NEMA CT Constant IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
5 100 100 400 400 8.5 X
Á
Size VT HP (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
6 200 100 600 600 8.5 – 1 7.5 5 100 30 30 2 X
2 – 7.5 100 60 30 2 X
2 15 10 100 60 60 2 X
3 30 25 65 100 100 4 X Å
RVAT 4 – 30 100 200 100 5.5 X
Class RK-1, Space 4 50 40 100 200 200 5.5 X
RK-5, J-TD Units UL 5 100 75 100 400 400 8.5 – Â
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip 13" 20" Listed Notes 1 7.5 5 100 30 30 2 X
Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Deep Deep (X) 2 – 7.5 100 60 30 2 X
2 15 100 60 60 4 4 X 2 15 10 100 60 60 2 X
3 30 65 100 100 5 4 X Å 3 30 25 65 100 100 4 X Å
4 50 100 200 200 6 5 X 4 – 30 100 200 100 5.5 X
5 100 100 400 400 – 6 X 4 50 40 100 200 200 5.5 X
6 200 100 600 600 N/A 12 X Á 5 100 75 100 400 400 8.5 – Â
6 200 150 100 600 600 8.5 – Á

Á Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep.
Â Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand
section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20” wide with top 31/2 X used for disconnect.
Ã Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24” wide section when main horizontal
bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30” wide section is required with 1200 ampere
Ä Use time-delay fuse, maximum rating same as switch amps.
Å Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.
D7
Starters

Class RK-1,
StartersÅÆ
460 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor 1 10 100 30 30 2
1 15 100 60 30 2
FVNR 2 25 100 60 60 2
2 30 100 100 60 2
Class RK-1,
3 60 100 200 200 5
RK-5, J-TD UL
4 150 100 400 200 5.5
1 10 100 30 30 1 X
2 15 100 60 30 1 X
Y-Delta, OT
2 25 100 60 60 1 X
3 30 65 100 60 2 X Class RK-1,
3 50 65 100 100 2.5 X RK-5, J-TD UL
5 125 100 400 200 5 X Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
5 200 100 400 400 5 X 2 10 100 60 30 3 Â
À
D 6
6
250
400
100
100
600
600
400
600
6
6
X
X À
2
2
15
25
100
100
60
60
30
60
3
3
2 30 100 100 60 3
3 50 65 100 100 4 À
3 60 100 200 200 5 À
FVR 4 100 100 200 200 6 À
4 125 100 400 200 6 Ä
Class RK-1,
RK-5, J-TD UL
2S1W
1 10 100 30 30 1.5 X
2 15 100 60 30 2 X Class RK-1,
2 25 100 60 60 2 X Max. Hp RK-5, J-TD UL
3 30 65 100 60 3 X NEMA CT Constant IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
3 50 65 100 100 3.5 X Size VT HP (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
4 100 100 200 200 5 X 1 10 7.5 100 30 30 2 X
5 125 100 400 200 8.5 X Ã 2 15 15 100 60 30 2 X
5 200 100 400 400 8.5 X Ã 2 25 20 100 60 60 2 X
6 250 100 600 400 8.5 – Á 3 30 30 65 100 60 4 X
3 50 40 65 100 100 4 X
4 100 75 100 200 200 5.5 X
5 125 100 100 400 200 8.5 – Ã
RVAT 5 200 150 100 400 400 8.5 – Ã
Class RK-1, Space 6 250 250 100 600 400 8.5 – Á
RK-5, J-TD Units UL 6 400 300 100 600 600 8.5 – Á
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip 13" 20" Listed Notes
2 15 100 60 30 4 4 X
2 25 100 60 60 4 4 X 2S2W
3 30 65 100 60 5 4 X
3 50 65 100 100 5 4 X Class RK-1,
4 100 100 200 200 6 5 X Max. Hp RK-5, J-TD UL
5 125 100 400 200 – 6 X NEMA CT Constant IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
5 200 100 400 400 – 6 X Size VT HP (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
6 250 100 600 400 N/A 12 X Á 1 10 7.5 100 30 30 2 X
6 400 100 600 600 N/A 12 X Á 2 15 15 100 60 30 2 X
2 25 20 100 60 60 2 X
3 30 30 65 100 60 4 X
3 50 40 65 100 100 4 X
4 100 75 100 200 200 5.5 X
Ã
5 125 100 100 400 200 8.5 –
Ã
Á Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with
5 200 150 100 400 400 8.5 –
6 250 250 100 600 400 8.5 – Á
12" bottom wireway cover. Á
Â Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
6 400 300 100 600 600 8.5 –
Ã Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand
section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.
Ä Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal
Å The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions
height.
D8
Starters

Class RK-1,
208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor StartersÄÆ Size
1
Hp
10
(kA)
100
Amps
30
Amps
30
Units
2
(X)
1 15 100 60 30 2
FVNR 2 25 100 60 60 2
Class RK-1, 3 50 100 200 100 5
RK-5, J-TD UL 3 75 100 200 200 5
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes 4 100 100 200 200 5
Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X) 4 150 100 400 400 6
1 10 100 30 30 1 X
2 25 100 60 60 1 X
3 40 100 100 60 2 X
3 50 100 100 100 2.5 X Y-Delta, OT
4 100 100 200 200 3.5 X Class RK-1,
5 200 100 400 400 5 X RK-5, J-TD UL
6 400 100 600 600 6 X NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
Â
2
2
10
15
100
100
60
60
30
30
3
3 D
FVR 2 20 100 60 60 3
Class RK-1, 2 25 100 60 60 3
RK-5, J-TD UL 3 50 100 200 100 4 À
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes 3 75 100 200 200 4 À
Size Hp (kA) Amps Amps Units (X) 4 100 100 200 200 6 À
1 10 100 30 30 1.5 X 4 150 100 400 400 6 Ä
2 25 100 60 60 2 X 5 – – – – – Æ
3 40 100 100 60 3 X
3 50 100 200 100 5 X
4 100 100 200 200 5 X
5 200 100 400 400 8.5 X Ã 2S1W, 2S2W
6 400 100 600 600 8.5 – Á Class RK-1,
Max. Hp RK-5, J-TD UL
NEMA CT Constant IC Switch Clip Space Listed Notes
Size VT HP (kA) Amps Amps Units (X)
RVAT 1 10 7.5 100 30 30 2 X
Class RK-1, Space 2 25 – 100 60 60 2 X
RK-5, J-TD Units UL 3 40 40 100 200 60 5.5 X
NEMA Max. IC Switch Clip 13" 20" Listed Notes 3 50 – 100 200 100 5.5 X
4 100 – 100 200 200 5.5 X
Ã
5 200 – 100 400 400 8.5 –
Á
2 25 100 60 60 4 4 X
3 40 100 200 60 6 5 X 6 400 – 100 600 600 8.5 –
3 50 100 200 100 6 5 X 1 10 7.5 100 30 30 2 X
4 100 100 200 200 6 5 X 2 25 – 100 60 60 2 X
5 200 100 400 400 – 6 X 3 40 40 100 200 60 5.5 X
6 400 100 600 600 N/A 12 X Á 3 50 – 100 200 100 5.5 X
4 100 – 100 200 200 5.5 X
5 200 – 100 400 400 8.5 – Ã
6 400 – 100 600 600 8.5 – Á

Á Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with
12" bottom wireway cover.
Â Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
Ã Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand
section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.
Ä Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal
Å The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions
height.
Æ Refer to factory.
³ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
D9
Starters
Starter Options
Additional UL Additional UL
Option Function Space Listed Option Function Space Listed
Required (X) Required (X)
Control Provides control power. – X Hand-Off-AutoÀ CR104P maintained type–use to – X
Transformer See “Control Transformer” for select auto or manual start with
details 2-wire control.
CPT Primary Class CC fuse wired in each un- – X Fast-Slow-Off-Auto CR104P maintained type–use – X
Fuses grounded transformer primary with 2-speed starters.
conductor. Fixed Control TB Stationary control terminal boards – X
CPT Secondary One midget fuse (typical Gould Ferraz – X in place of split type terminal
Fuse type TRM) wired in ungrounded boards.
Control Power Conductor Power TB Stationary motor lead terminal Yes X
Control Power One Class CC fuse wired in each boards Size 3 and 4
Fuse ungrounded control power con- Power TB Split Type terminal blocks on – X
ductor. Use when control power Nema Size 1 and 2
source is remote from unit. Control High density pull-apart TB will – X
Standard OL 1 NC contact (standard)– – X Disconnect provide foreign voltage isolation
Relay 1 NC and 1 NO (pilot duty) – X without disengaging the unit verti-
contact (Optional) cal bus stabs.
D Ambient Comp. OL Ultimate trip current remains Control Relay C2000 Type (standard) Rated Yes X
Electronic OL essentially unchanged over 600V, with 10A contacts. Relays
a range of OL ambient are available with normally open
temperatures. and normally closed non-con-
1 NC contact (standard) – X vertible contacts. Up to four
1 NC and 1 NO (pilot duty) – X additional contact blocks can be
contact (Optional) added to basic 4 pole relay. Size
Pilot Lights CR104P type. 1 and Size 2 FVNR starters re-
Full Voltage Red–ON FAST, FWD, UP – X quire an additional half-space unit
Amber–DOWN, REV, SLOW for three to four relays. Two relays
Green–STOPPED, READY can be added with no increase in
Transformer CR104P with 6V lamp – X space units.
(See full voltage lights for lens
colors) CR120B type (optional), rated Yes X
LEDÀ CR104P Type transformer type – X 600V, with 10A convertible
with 6V LED Lamp contacts. Three 4/8 pole relays
Push-to-test CR104P, Full-voltage trans- – X will mount in a half-space unit
former type, or LED (See full-volt- extension, plus nine additional
age lights for lens colors) terminal board points. Size 1
Push buttons CR104P momentary type-use – X and 2 FVNR starters require an
Start-StopÀ with FVNR starters with 3-wire additional half-space unit for
control. one to three relays. One relay
StopÀ CR104P momentary type-pro- – X can be added on other starters
vides stop function at MCC with with no increase in space unit.
3-wire control. Timing Relays C2000 (standard) .3 to 3 seconds Yes X
StopÀ CR104P maintained type–pro- – X Pneumatic or 10 to 180 seconds timing
vides stop function at MCC with range. 10A contacts. 4 INST and
2/3 wire control. Can be furnished 2 TD interlocks (NO and NC).
with mushroom head and provi- Timing Relays Time-delay on energization/de- X
sion for locking open. Electronic energization double pole, double
Fwd, Rev, StopÀ CR104P momentary type-use – X throw contacts rated 600V, 10A.
with FVR starters. Timing ranges 1-10 or 10-300
Fast, Slow, Stop CR104P momentary type-use – X seconds.
À Functions also available with LM10 PDU.

with 2-speed starters.
Selector Switches CR104P maintained type–use as – X
On-Off permissive start with 2 or 3 wire
control.
D10
Starters
Starter Options
Additional UL Additional UL
Option Function Space Listed Option Function Space Listed
Required (X) Required (X)
Motor Driven Used for long timing periods. 1/2X – Ammeter À AC panel-type, single current- À X
Specify timing range. transformer operated five-ampere
Accelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay for X movement. Scale selected based
Relay multi-speed motors to provide on 125% motor full-load amperes.
definite accelerating time for Elapsed Time Mounts on pushbutton bracket. Á X
each speed above first speed. MeterÀ Meter À Visible from front of MCC.
Time interval is adjustable .3 to Phase Loss/ CR324X Electronic overload mod- – X
30 seconds. Alternate Current Sensing ule senses running motor currents
Electronic Timer. Alternate ECM (no reversal).
Decelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay X Phase Loss/ APVR used primarily to sense – X
Relay allows time for motor to coast Unbalance phase loss, unbalance, or reversal,
stop before permitting restart or Voltage Sensing has time delay under-voltage.
coast to a lower speed on multi- Motor Winding The motor winding heater is 1/2X X
speed motors before initiating Heater designed for use with 3-phase ac
slow speed operation (2-speed motors to guard against damage
D
motors). Time interval is adjust- caused by condensation buildup
able .3 to 30 seconds. Alter- on motor windings which can
nate Electronic Timer. occur in high humidity environ-
Compelling On multi-speed starters, requires X ments during motor idle periods.
Relays the controller to progress in Refer to application data in Com-
sequence from low to high speed. ponents (Section H). (1X-size 5)
One relay is required for each Coil Suppressor, Surge suppressors reduce unde- Â X
speed over one. Requires same 120V sirable transients in control circuits
space as C-2000 timing relay. by absorbing voltage transients
Alternate Electronic Timer. generated by operating coils.
Latch CR120BL, 4 pole. Once relay X Over Size Unit Standard unit height may be 1/2X, X
Relay closes, mechanical latch holds increased 1⁄2 X or 1X 1X X
relay closed until electrically reset. Door Diagram Circuit diagram mounted on back – X
Requires same space as CR120B of unit door.
(4 pole) control relay. Wire markers Permanent wire number identifi- – X
Ambient Comp. Thermal trip is ambient – X cation on each control wire. Tube
CB’s compensated. type standard, heat shrink optional.
Fused Switch 2-10A auxiliary interlocks oper- – X Provision For PLC See Programmable Logic Control
Auxiliary Interlock ated by disconnect operator Max. (Section F).
(2NO, or 1NO and 1NC) Provision for See Programmable Logic Control
CB Options (Spectra only) SPDT auxiliary interlocks – X VersaMax (Section F).
Aux. Interlock mounted in CB. Refer to factory Provision for PFC Terminals located between con- X
if more than 2 required. Capacitor tactor and OL relay.
Bell Alarm Internal CB alarm switch. – X
Shunt Trip Electric remote trip. – X À Functions also available with LM10.
Key Interlock Added to disconnect operating – X Á Functions also available with LM10 display.
Above 250A handle to require a predetermined Â Standard with LM10.
system operating sequence.
Specify operating sequence.
Ground Fault À Zero sequence sensing Ground Yes X
Fault Relay for equipment pro-
tection for NEMA size 2-6 starters.
Current Transformer Donut type CT located in one Yes X
motor phase conductor for pur-
chasers use. (Also used for door
mounted Ammeter.)
Amp Integrated CT/Current transducer Yes X
Transducer with 4-20 MA output. (Requires
120V Power).
D11
Starters
Product Information each unit. Normally, one (Class CC) fuse in the ungrounded
conductor will provide the needed protection.
Undervoltage Protection
Standard starters drop out when line voltage drops below Where wiring external to the motor control center is indicated,
approximately 65 percent rated volts and can be reclosed No. 14 AWG copper will be assumed as the minimum conductor
when voltage returns to 85 percent rated volts. size unless otherwise specified.
Where momentary contact devices are used in standard Long Control Circuits
three-wire control circuits, the starter will not reclose on On exceedingly long control circuits two problems may
momentary loss of voltage until the START button is pushed, occur – (1) starter will not close due to line voltage drop and
thus inherently providing undervoltage protection. (2) starter may not open due to capacitive coupling. Table
below gives the one-way distances (in feet) from the starter
If a maintained contact device, such as a float switch, is to the pushbutton along the route of the control cable. This
used to start the motor, the starter will close automatically table is for 120 volt coils and allows for a maximum voltage
upon restoration of control voltage. In some cases, this may variation of 10 percent. The distances are given for #14 and
not be desirable for safety reasons, and a reset pushbutton #12 AWG control wire.
D and auxiliary relay should be specified to provide undervolt- NEMA Distance in Feet Distance in Feet
age protection. Size With #14 Wire with #12 Wire
1 1300 2070
2 460 730
Overload Relays 3 320 510
Standard relays are three-leg block bimetallic type with 4 250 395
1-6 À 5000 6000
adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of the heater rating. A
single calibration adjusts all three legs. A single reset button À Distance based on using an interposing relay, type C2000 [CR120B is 1600/2500 feet]
mounted on the starter door permits external reset.
Ambient-compensated relays are available for ambients
Separate Source Control Circuits
from –30°C to +80°C and have adjustment from 90 to 110
A separate control bus is available as an option. This bus
percent of normal rating. Improved protection is provided
can be fed from a separate external source, or from within
when the motor is in a relatively constant ambient but control
the motor control center by a separate distribution trans-
is subject to varying ambient. Relays are interchangeable
former or distribution panel.
with standard type.
A normally open auxiliary contact should be specified on
Optional Electronic Overload Relay
each unit disconnect to open the control bus circuit when
Both analog and digital relays are also available with or
the unit disconnect is opened. Unit control circuit fusing
without communications (see page H-11).
should also be added.
Control Circuit Protection
In lieu of the auxiliary disconnect contact, pull-apart terminal
Motor control circuits tapped from the load side of the starter
boards may be specified to provide control voltage isolation
unit disconnect, such as line-to-line control and line-to-neutral
for individual starters.
control are protected by listed, branch circuit rated fuses in
each ungrounded conductor. UL requires rejection type fuses
Pilot Devices
for equipment rated above 10kA short-circuit rating. 6 ampere,
Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc., are single-unit,
600 volt Class CC fuses are furnished as standard.
heavy-duty oil-tight type mounted on the starter unit door.
Motor control circuit transformers are protected with a fuse
Auxiliary Contact Ratings
in each ungrounded secondary conductor. Secondary fuses
are UL Recognized supplementary fuses size per Article 450 NEMA Size 1-6
of the NEC (20 amperes maximum). UL required primary Amperes
transformer protection in accordance with NEC Article AC Volts Continuous Make Break
430.72(c) and Article 450. ATM-R fuses are furnished in each 115 10 60 6.0
230 10 30 3.0
ungrounded primary conductor. 460 10 15 1.5
575 10 12 1.2
Motor control circuit power, other than power tapped from DC Volts
125 10 – 1.1
the load side of the starter unit disconnect, should be pro- 250 10 – 0.5
tected against overcurrent. The protective device may be
located at the source or by the optional fuse(s) located in
D12
Starters
Product Information Starter Size and

TypeÂ
CPT Std.
VA
CPT Max.UL
VAÄ Listed Notes
60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz (X)
Starter Auxiliary Contacts (Option) All Size 1 60 150 300 250 X Å
Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amperes, 600 volts are available, All Size 2 150 150 300 250 X
All Size 3 300 250 300 250 X
either normally open or closed (non-convertible). Quantities All Size 4 300 250 300 250 X
of contacts shown are maximum available and include All Size 5 and 6 100 100 300 250 X Ã
starter requirements for cross-electrical interlocking and

holding circuits. If more contacts are required than shown, a
Coil Characteristics
relay must be added.
Inrush Sealed
Total Control Contacts Available Size and Type Volt–Amp Volt–Amp
(includes contacts required in Size 1, FVNR, FVR 151* 23*
basic control circuit for seal-in, Size 2, FVNR, FVR 528 60
Starter Type
cross interlocking, etc.) Size 3, FVNR, FVR 1152 83
NEMA Size Starter Size 4, FVNR, FVR 1248 87
1 2 3 4 5 6 Size 5, FVNR 2580 191
Full-voltage, Nonreversing 5 6Á 6 6 6 6 Size 6, FVNR 3360 255
Full voltage, Reversing Size 2, 2S1W 576 75
Forward Contactor
Reverse Contactor
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Size 3, 2S1W
Size 4, 2S1W
1248
1336
87
95
D
Two-speed, One windingÀ Relay for RVAT
Low-speed Contactor 4 4 4 4 4 5 Size 3 and 4 55 9
High-speed Contactor 3 4 4 4 4 5 Relay for FVNR
Two-speed, Two winding Size 5 and 6 55 9
Low-speed Contactor 4 4 4 4 4 5
High-speed Contactor 4 4 4 4 4 5 * Compact starter inrush 88VA, sealed 9VA
Part Winding
Run Contactor 5 6 6 6 6 6
Autotransformer, Reduced-voltage
300 Line Standard Coil Data
Run Contactor – 6 6 6 6 6
Amps Amps % Volts Millisec
Size Coil 120V 480V VA Watts Vars PF P/U D/O P/U D/O
15 7
Inrush 1.26 .33 151 69.5 134 .46
1 85 63 to to
Control Terminals Holding .2 .55 24 6 23 .25
30 15
The table below lists the maximum number of high density Inrush 4.4 1.2 528 169 500 .32 20 7
control terminals available on standard heights units. See 2
Holding .5 .14 60 12.9 57.9 .26
85 68 to to
40 15
standard diagrams in Typical Circuits (Section K) for number 20 7
Inrush 9.6 2.6 1152 230 1129 .20
of control terminals required for standard starters. Note 3 85 65 to to
Holding .69 .18 83 18.4 81.5 .19
total number of control points are in addition to T1, T2 and 45 15
20 7
T3 power terminal points. 4
Inrush 10.4 2.8 1248 262 1220 .21
85 65 to to
Holding .73 .2 87 18.8 84.8 .22 45 15
Starter Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
Inrush 21.5 5.7 2580 464 2538 .18 30 15
Function CB/FS CB/FS CB/FS CB FS
5 85 65 to to
FVNR 18 18 18 18 48 Holding 1.6 .42 191 38.8 185 .25 50 25
FVR 30 42 48 48 48
Inrush 28.1 7.6 3360 608 3325 .18 30 15
2S1W 24 36 48 48 48
6 85 65 to to
2S2W 24 36 48 48 48 Holding 2.1 .58 255 44 246 .25 50 25
CB = Circuit Breaker; FS = Fused Switch.
Control Transformers
Power is tapped from the load side of the starter unit dis-
connect and the transformer provides 120 volt power. Two
600 volt primary fuses, plus one 250 volt secondary fuse in À For constant- or variable-torque motors.
Á Limit 4 with APVR relay.
the ungrounded conductor is standard. Â Refer to Company for part-winding and Y-delta starters.
Ã Starter coils operated at line voltage. Starters operated by control relay in 120 volt
Standard control power transformer ratings are adequate to control circuit. Class CC fuses are provided for starter coil circuit.
Ä Without increasing standard unit space requirements for size 1 to 4, over size CPT in
handle the starter-coil current and three pilot lights. If additional size 5 will add 6".
burdens are expected, larger transformers should be specified. Å 1/2X FVNR uses a 100VA CPT.
D13
Starters
Product Information Terminals for Field Wiring

Will Accept WireÀ
Description AWG/MCM Material
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Substitution Starter Load Terminals
Substituting a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in place of a Size 1 Starter 14-8 Cu
Mag-Break® circuit breaker may require increasing the circuit Size 2 Starter 14-4 Cu
Size 3 Starter 8-1/0 Cu
breaker trip rating to avoid tripping on starting. See Appendix Size 4 Starter 4-3/0 Cu
(Section J) for recommended thermal-magnetic circuit breaker Size 5 Starter (2) 2/0-400 Cu
trip ratings. Size 6 Contactor (2) 2/0-500 Cu-Al
Control Terminal Boards
NEMA Standard UL Hi Density Pull-Apart (2) 12 Max. Cu
Short-Circuit Rating
Size Circuit Substitute Listed Power Terminal Boards
Starter Breaker 230V 460V 575V (X) 50 AMP Size 1 & 2 Type C Wiring 14-6Á Cu
TEC THED 25 25 22 X
1,2,3 SELI SELT 100 100 25 X À Conductors #1 and smaller may be rated 60/75°C.
TECL TEDL 100 100 100 X Conductors #1/0 and larger must be rated 75°C.
TEC/SEL SFLT 65 65 25 X Conductors wired directly to OL device terminals must be rated 75°C Cu.
4 SFLI SFLT 100 100 25 X Á #6 only with ring terminal.
SFLI — 100 100 100 X
5 SGLI SGLT 100 100 65 X
D
D14
Miscellaneous Units
Operator and Metering Panels

Unit spaces can be used to provide metering and/or operator’s
panels in the motor control center itself. Arrangement and
dimensions will vary depending on the quantity and type of
the devices required. Normally, fuse blocks, terminal blocks,
current and potential transformers, etc., can be mounted on
a base within the unit space. Meters, pilot lights, pushbuttons,
switches, etc., can be mounted on the door. Suitable locations
and adequate space should be provided so that wiring is
simplified and there is no interference between door and base
mounted components. The following devices are often specified.
• Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights

• Ammeters, voltmeters and other instruments (panel or
switchboard type)
• Instrument and transfer switches
• Electronic power meter
• Control relays
• Timing relays (pneumatic, motor-operated or electronic)
These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components E

are UL listed for use in motor control centers.
Relay Panels
Relay panels can be furnished from 1 space unit to 6 space
units with full width doors. The amount of vertical space
required is generally determined by the number of terminal
board points required or relay type used; when in doubt
allow for a double vertical row of terminal boards.
These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components

are UL listed for use in motor control centers.
Single Vertical Row of T.B.s Double Vertical Row of T.B.s

Maximum No. of Horizontal Width for Maximum No. of Maximum No. of Horizontal Width for Maximum No of
Space Units T.B. Points Component Mounting Std. 4-Pole Relays T.B. Points Component Mounting Std. 4-Pole Relays
Section Width 20”W 20"W 20"W 20"W
1 12 11 1/2" 6 24 6" 3
1 1/2 24 11 1/2" 12 48 6" 6
2 30 11 1/2" 18 60 6" 9
2 1/2 42 11 1/2" 24 84 6" 12
3 48 11 1/2" 36 96 6" 18
3 1/2 60 11 1/2" 42 120 6" 21
4 72 11 1/2" 48 144 6" 24
4 1/2 78 11 1/2" 54 156 6" 27
5 90 11 1/2" 60 180 6" 30
5 1/2 96 11 1/2" 66 192 6" 33
6 108 11 1/2" 72 216 6" 36
T.B.s or relays for size estimating only.
Alternator Relay Panels

Consists of two motor alternator circuit using two control relays
and a latching relay. Requires minimum 1 space unit height.
E1
Miscellaneous Units
Mounting Plates
Blank plates for customer use for field mounting of PLC and
or relays. All plates come with mounting screws and door.
Full height dished plates come with top horizontal bus barrier.
Mounting Plate Mounting Plate
Min. Enclosure Dimensions (inches) Min. Enclosure Dimensions (inches)
Description Part Number Description Part Number
Depth (inches) Depth (inches)
Width Height Width Height
12 110C1040MDG1 12 110C1040MDG52
18 110C1040MDG2 18 110C1040MDG53
24 110C1040MDG3 24 110C1040MDG54
15 30 110C1040MDG4 30 110C1040MDG55
36 110C1040MDG5 36 110C1040MDG56
42 110C1040MDG6 24 42 110C1040MDG57
48 110C1040MDG7 48 110C1040MDG58
12 110C1040MDG8 54 110C1040MDG59
18 110C1040MDG9 60 110C1040MDG60
24 110C1040MDG10 Dished 66 110C1040MDG61
30 110C1040MDG11 Mounting 72 110C1040MDG62
Plate, 20
36 110C1040MDG12 No Bus, 13.5" 12 110C1040MDG63
20 42 110C1040MDG13 from door 18 110C1040MDG64
E 48 110C1040MDG14 24 110C1040MDG65
54 110C1040MDG15 30 110C1040MDG66
60 110C1040MDG16 36 110C1040MDG67
66 110C1040MDG17 30 42 110C1040MDG68
72 110C1040MDG18 48 110C1040MDG69
12 110C1040MDG19 54 110C1040MDG70
Over Vertical 18 110C1040MDG20 60 110C1040MDG71
Bus, 9.5" 13
From Door 24 110C1040MDG21 66 110C1040MDG72
30 110C1040MDG22 72 110C1040MDG73
36 110C1040MDG23 12 110C1040MDG74
24 42 110C1040MDG24 18 110C1040MDG75
48 110C1040MDG25 24 110C1040MDG76
54 110C1040MDG26 30 110C1040MDG77
60 110C1040MDG27 36 110C1040MDG78
66 110C1040MDG28 20 42 110C1040MDG79
72 110C1040MDG29 48 110C1040MDG80
12 110C1040MDG30 54 110C1040MDG81
18 110C1040MDG31 60 110C1040MDG82
24 110C1040MDG32 Dished 66 110C1040MDG83
Plate, 20
36 110C1040MDG34 No Bus, 15.5" 12 110C1040MDG85
30 42 110C1040MDG35 from door 18 110C1040MDG86
48 110C1040MDG36 24 110C1040MDG87
54 110C1040MDG37 30 110C1040MDG88
60 110C1040MDG38 36 110C1040MDG89
66 110C1040MDG39 24 42 110C1040MDG90
72 110C1040MDG40 48 110C1040MDG91
12 110C1040MDG41 54 110C1040MDG92
18 110C1040MDG42 60 110C1040MDG93
24 110C1040MDG43 66 110C1040MDG94
30 110C1040MDG44 72 110C1040MDG95
Dished
Mounting 36 110C1040MDG45
Plate, 20 20 42 110C1040MDG46
No Bus, 13.5” 48 110C1040MDG47
from door
54 110C1040MDG48
60 110C1040MDG49
66 110C1040MDG50
72 110C1040MDG51
E2
Miscellaneous Units
Mounting Plates
Mounting Plate Mounting Plate
Min. Enclosure Dimensions (inches) Min. Enclosure Dimensions (inches)
Description Part Number Description Part Number
Depth (inches) Depth (inches)
Width Height Width Height
12 110C1040MDG96 12 110C1040MDG184
18 110C1040MDG97 18 110C1040MDG185
24 110C1040MDG98 24 110C1040MDG186
30 110C1040MDG99 30 110C1040MDG187
Dished
Mounting 36 110C1040MDG100 36 110C1040MDG188
Plate, 20 30 42 110C1040MDG101 24 42 110C1040MDG189
No Bus, 15.5" 48 110C1040MDG102 48 110C1040MDG190
from door
54 110C1040MDG103 54 110C1040MDG191
60 110C1040MDG104 60 110C1040MDG192
66 110C1040MDG105 Dished 66 110C1040MDG193
Plate, 20
12 110C1040MDG107 No Bus, 18.5" 12 110C1040MDG195
18 110C1040MDG108 from door 18 110C1040MDG196
24 110C1040MDG109 24 110C1040MDG197
30 110C1040MDG110 30 110C1040MDG198
36 110C1040MDG111 36 110C1040MDG199
20 42 110C1040MDG112 30 42 110C1040MDG200
48 110C1040MDG113 48 110C1040MDG201 E
54 110C1040MDG114 54 110C1040MDG202
60 110C1040MDG115 60 110C1040MDG203
66 110C1040MDG116 66 110C1040MDG204
72 110C1040MDG117 72 110C1040MDG205
12 110C1040MDG118 12 110C1040MDG140
18 110C1040MDG119 18 110C1040MDG141
24 110C1040MDG120 24 110C1040MDG142
30 110C1040MDG121 30 110C1040MDG143
Dished
Plate, 20 24 42 110C1040MDG123 20 42 110C1040MDG145
No Bus, 17.5" 48 110C1040MDG124 48 110C1040MDG146
from door
54 110C1040MDG125 54 110C1040MDG147
60 110C1040MDG126 60 110C1040MDG148
66 110C1040MDG127 66 110C1040MDG149
72 110C1040MDG128 72 110C1040MDG150
12 110C1040MDG129 12 110C1040MDG151
18 110C1040MDG130 18 110C1040MDG152
24 110C1040MDG131 24 110C1040MDG153
30 110C1040MDG132 Dished 30 110C1040MDG154
Plate,
30 42 110C1040MDG134 22 24 42 110C1040MDG156
No Bus,
48 110C1040MDG135 21" 48 110C1040MDG157
54 110C1040MDG136 from door 54 110C1040MDG158
60 110C1040MDG137 60 110C1040MDG159
66 110C1040MDG138 66 110C1040MDG160
72 110C1040MDG139 72 110C1040MDG161
12 110C1040MDG173 12 110C1040MDG162
18 110C1040MDG174 18 110C1040MDG163
24 110C1040MDG175 24 110C1040MDG164
30 110C1040MDG176 30 110C1040MDG165
Dished
Plate, 20 20 42 110C1040MDG178 30 42 110C1040MDG167
No Bus, 18.5" 48 110C1040MDG179 48 110C1040MDG168
from door
54 110C1040MDG180 54 110C1040MDG169
60 110C1040MDG181 60 110C1040MDG170
66 110C1040MDG182 66 110C1040MDG171
72 110C1040MDG183 72 110C1040MDG172
E3
Miscellaneous Units
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards MCC Space Units

Space
Number Panel Main Bus Space UnitsÂ UnitsÂ UL
The following panelboards are available for mounting in of Circuits Rating (Amps) AL, AQ AE Listed
motor control centers. Type AL and AQ Panelboards with 12 100 2 2 X
main circuit breakers are normally provided. Type AE and AD 12 225 2 1/2 2 X
18 100 2 1/2 2 1/2 X
panels require a feeder unit for the main CB, which then 18 225 2 1/2 2 1/2 X
feeds the M.L.O. panel. 24 225 2 1/2 2 1/2 X
24 400 4 1/2 3 1/2 X
Interrupting 30 225 3 3 X
RatingÁ RMS
Branch 30 400 4 1/2 3 1/2 X
System
36 225 3 1/2 3 X
PolesÀ
Panel Voltage Ampere Symmetrical Amps
Type 36 400 5 4 X
Type (Maximum) Rating (in thousands)
THQL 1 15-70 10 42 225 3 1/2 3 1/2 X
THQL 2 15-100 10 42 400 5 4 X
120/240
A THHQL 1 15-70 22
Vac
Series THHQL 2 15-125 22
Type TXQL 1,2 15-30 65
AL THQL 2,3 15-100 10
AD
Number Panel Main Bus UL
Space UnitsÂ
240 Vac THHQL 2,3 15-100 22
THQL 3 15-30 65 of Circuits Rating (Amps) Listed
THQB-GF 1,2 15-30 10 (X) (X)
THQB 1 15-70 10 12 100 2 1/2
THQB 2 15-100 10 12 225 3
120/240 18 100 3
A THHQB-GF 1 15-30 22
Vac 18 225 3 1/2
Series THHQB 1 15-70 22
E Type THHQB 2 15-100 22 24
24
100
225
3
3 1/2
AQ TXQB 1,2 15-30 65
THQB 1,2 15-100 10 30 100 3 1/2
240 Vac THHQB 2,3 15-100 22 30 225 4
TXQB 3 15-30 65 36 100 4
A 120 Vac TEY 1 15-100 65 36 225 4 1/2
Series 240 Vac TEY 2,3 15-100 65 42 100 4
Type 277 Vac TEY 1 15-100 14 42 225 4 1/2
AE 480/277
TEY 2,3 15-100 14
4 Wire Vac Max.
TED 1 15-100 14
277 Vac TED4 1 15-50 14 The unit rating is the same as the lighting panel rating when:
A THED 1 15-30 65
Series TED4 2 15-100 14 A. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control
Type TED4,6 3 15-150 14 center unit but not connected to any power source within
AD 480 Vac THED4 2 15-100 25
3 Wire THED4 3 110-150 25
the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect
THED6 3 15-150 25 motor control center short-circuit rating. The lighting/
600 Vac
TED6 3 15-150 14 distribution panel must have a main breaker.
THED6 3 15-150 18
B. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control
À Two-pole THED breakers require a 3-pole space.
center unit and factory connected directly (with no inter-
Á Equipment rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker mediate transformer) to motor control center bus through
installed. a feeder. The panel series rating must equal or exceed
Â One space unit (X) equals 12" vertical height. M.L.O. panel does not include feeder
space requirements. (see pg. C4)
motor control center short-circuit rating.
Notes: C. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control
• Branch devices are plug-in for Type AL and bolt-on for AQ, AE and AD panelboards. center unit and factory connected to a transformer unit in
Maximum of 42 circuits per panel. the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect
• Ground fault CB not available in AL panels.
• Lighting panel main bus is rated 1000 amps per square inch, alternate 800 amps per motor control center short-circuit rating.
square inch is available.
• 65 kAIC rating for panels is obtained through series rating.
• For all panels fed from MCC bus, add feeder unit to feed panel.
E4
Miscellaneous Units
Distribution Transformers NEC Article 450-3 covers transformer protection, other than
General motor control circuit transformers or special applications.
The general requirements are:
Open, dry-type transformers with primary thermal-magnetic The degree of protection required depends on the specific
circuit breaker or fusible switch with NEMA Class R (dual application. Select a transformer protective device which
element) fuses are available in motor control center con- provides the required protection. Secondary protection in
struction. The accompanying tables give both single- and each ungrounded conductor can be provided if specified.
three-phase transformers normally mounted in motor control
centers for use in supplying separate-source control circuits,
panelboards and power external to the motor control center.
Space units shown include space necessary for the primary

disconnect. One space unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
If transformers with taps are required, refer to the factory.
Primary disconnects stab into the vertical bus. Transformer

secondary conductors are wired to a terminal board in the
unit. One leg of 120 volt secondaries, the center point of
120/240 volt secondaries, and the Y-point of 3-phase sec-
ondaries are grounded unless otherwise specified.
E
Primary Protection Only
Primary Current Primary Protection Rating
9 amps or more 125% or next higher standard rating per NEC Sect. 240-6
2 amps to 9 amps 167% maximum
Less than 2 amps 300% maximum
Primary and Secondary Protection

Secondary Current Primary Prot. Rating Secondary Protection Rating
9 amps or more 250% maximum 125% or next higher standard rating
Less than 9 amps 250% maximum 167% maximum
Three-Phase Transformers (Delta-Y, no TapsÅ)

Fused Switch-100kAIC Circuit Breaker
IC Rating (kA)
KVA Switch Size Fuse Amps Space Unit UL Listed Notes CB Trip Space Unit UL Listed Notes
Ã Ä
(X) 25 65 100 (X)
380-120/208 Volts, 50 Hertz
3 30 7 2.5 X QMW 2.5
9 30 17.5 3 X THED SEL TEDL 30 3 X
30 60 60 6 X ÀÁ THED SEL TEDL 70 4 X ÀÁ
45 200 90 6 X Â THED SEL SEP 150 4.5 X Â
480-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz
3 30 5.6 2.5 X QMW 2.5
9 30 15 3 X THED SEL TEDL 20 3 X
15 30 25 4 X THED SEL TEDL 30 3.5 X
30 60 45 4 X ÀÆ THED SEL TEDL 70 3.5 X ÀÆ
45 100 70 4 X Â THED SEL SEP 125 3.5 X ÀÆ
600-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz
3 30 4.5 2.5 X QMW 2.5
9 30 12 3 X – – TEDL 20 3.5 X
30 60 40 4 X ÀÆ – – TEDL 70 3.5 X ÀÆ
45 60 60 6 X ÀÆ – – TEDL 100 3.5 X ÀÆ
À Requires full depth of motor control center.
Á Requires 24" wide enclosure.
Â Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.
Ã Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)
Ä Sized for primary and secondary protection.
Å Add 6" for Taps.
Æ Requires 30" wide enclosure.
Notes:
• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.
• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.
E5
Miscellaneous Units
Distribution Transformers
Single-Phase Transformers
Fused Switch-100kAIC Circuit Breaker
IC Rating (kA)
kVA Switch Size Fuse Amps Space Unit UL Listed Notes CB Trip Space Unit UL Listed Notes
Ã (X) 25 65 100 Ä (X)
240-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50 30 3.2 1 X QMW 1
1 30 7 1 X QMW 1
3 30 15 1.5 X THED SEL THEDL 30 1.5 X
5 30 30 2 X THED SEL THEDL 40 2 X
10 60 60 2 X À THED SEL THEDL 70 2 X À
15 200 80 4 X ÀÅ THED SEL SEP 150 3.5 X ÀÅ
25 200 150 4 X ÀÅ THFK SEL SEP 225 3 X ÀÅ
37.5 200 200 6 X ÀÆ THFK SEL SEP 225 4 X ÀÆ
380-120/240 Volts, 50 Hertz
0.50 30 3.5 1 X QMW 1
1 30 4 1 X QMW 1
3 30 12 1.5 X THED SEL THEDL 15 1.5 X
15 60 50 3 X ÀÅ THED SEL THEDL 90 2.5 X ÀÅ
25 100 90 3 X Â THED SEL SEP 150 2.5 X Â
37.5 200 125 4 X ÅÆ THED SEL SEP 125 4 X ÅÆ
480-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50 30 2.8 1 X THED SEL THEDL 1
E 1
3
30
30
3.5
10
1
1.5
X
X
THED
THED
SEL
SEL
THEDL
THEDL 15
1
1.5 X
5 30 12 2 X THED SEL THEDL 20 2 X
15 60 40 3 X ÀÅ THED SEL THEDL 50 2.5 X ÀÅ
25 100 70 3 X Â THED SEL SEP 125 2.5 X Â
37.5 100 100 4 X ÅÆ THED SEL SEP 125 3.5 X ÅÆ
600-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50 30 2.5 1 X QMW 1
1 30 4 1 X QMW 1
3 30 8 1.5 X QMW 1.5
10 30 20 2 X À THEDL – THEDL 40 2 X À
15 60 35 3 X ÀÅ THEDL – THEDL 50 2.5 X ÀÅ
25 60 60 3 X Â THEDL – THEDL 100 2.5 X Â
37.5 100 80 4 X ÅÆ THEDL – THEDL 90 3.5 X ÅÆ
À Requires full depth of motor control center.

Á Requires 24" wide enclosure.
Â Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.
Ã Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)
Ä Sized for primary and secondary protection.
Å Add 6" for Taps.
Æ Requires 30" wide enclosure.
Notes:
• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.
• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.
E6
Miscellaneous Units
Power Factor Correction Capacitors Power factor correction capacitors should be switched by a
separate contactor (sketch d) under any of the following
conditions:
Description
Motors and other inductive loads require two kinds of electrical • High inertia load.
current: Current which performs the actual work and reactive • Open circuit transition reduced voltage starting.
current which produces the magnetic fields necessary for the • Wye-delta motor.
operation of inductive devices such as motors. Both types of • Reversing or frequently jogged motor.
currents produce system I2R losses. Capacitors installed near • Multispeed motor (2SIW, 2S2W, etc.).
inductive loads can be used to reduce the reactive currents
which flow through much of the system, thereby reducing Power factor correction capacitors should not be connected
I2R losses. to the load side of solid state starters and drives*. It should
be noted that two-speed motor starters require separate
Low-voltage capacitors are generally three-phase units, contactors to switch in capacitors after a time-delay in order
delta-connected, and are protected by current limiting to avoid possible motor damage while the capacitors dis-
fuses. The fuses disconnect the capacitor in the event of an charge. For the same reason, Wye-Delta starters have the
electrical short, providing service continuity for the system capacitors applied after the delta connection has been made.
and reducing the possibility of rupturing the capacitor case.
Disconnect
Capacitors Switched with the Motor means—
Capacitors used for power factor correction should be Short circuit
selected using the motor manufacturer’s application data. protective means—
E
Contactor—
When the capacitor is connected ahead of the overload
Overload relay—
relay (sketch a, c or d), the overload current elements should
be selected using the full-load motor current and service
factor values specified on the nameplate of the motor. When Motor—
the capacitor is connected on the load side of the overload Capacitor—
heaters (sketch b), lower rated heaters are required, since c d
a
the overload relay in this case will respond to the vector
sum of the motor and capacitor currents. Capacitors must
not exceed the maximum KVAR recommended by the motor
*Care should be taken when connecting power factor correction to the line side of
manufacturer for switching with the specific motor selected. power conversion equipment, such as drives, to avoid component damage.
E7
Miscellaneous Units
Power Factor Correction Capacitors Switching Capacitors Spearately

When a group of motors are so operated that some run
Selection of Power Factor Correction Capacitors while others are idle, a single capacitor bank (containing a
The following table is provided as a guide. Consult motor number of individual units) can be connected to the motor
manufacturer for actual capacitor KVAR values. control center bus to supply kilovars to the group. In these
instances, a separate switching device is needed for the
Typical Capacitor RatingsÀ capacitors. The interrupting rating of the switching device
HP Nameplate Full L Max
should be at least as great as the short-circuit current available.
Volts RPM KVAR Cable must be capable of at least 135 percent rated capacitor
3 230/460 1750 1.4 current. Switching device selections in the following tabula-
5 230/460 1740 1.9
7 230/460 1760 3.1
tion are based on the continuous current of the capacitors.
10 230/460 1750 3.6 • Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers ............................135%
15 230/460 1760 4.5
20 230/460 1750 5.1
• Fuses and Fusible Switches ..............................................165%
25 230/460 1760 7.2 • Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ..........................................150%
30 230/460 1760 9.1
40 230/460 1770 14.9
50 230/460 1765 19.1
60 230/460 1775 24.9 Recommended Switching Device
75 230/460 1775 27 Switch with Molded Case
100 230/460 1780 29.1 KVAR Class J Circuit Breaker
125 460 1780 32.3 (In Amperes) (In Amperes)
150 460 1785 38.7 240 Volts, 60 Hertz
200 460 1785 50.5
E 300 460 1785 77.2
2 1/2
5
10
20
15
20
7 1/2 30 30
À For use with 1800 rpm, 3-phase. 60Hz classification B motors 10 40 40
Type KE to raise full-load power factor to approximately 95 percent. 15 60 60
Á See J1 for full load amps. 20 80 80
27 1/2 125 100
30 125 110
37 1/2 175 150
MCC Space Maximum KVAR UL Listed 480 Volts, 60 Hertz
Units Required 240V 480V 600V (X) 5 10 15
1X 22 1/2 50 45 X 7 1/2 15 15
10 20 20
15 30 30
20 40 40
One space unit X equals 12 inches of vertical height. Space 25 50 50
27 1/2 60 50
required is for capacitor only. Add space for switching device 30 60 60
as needed. 37 1/2 80 70
For PFCC other than 240V or 480V, 60 Hz, refer to factory for sizing.
In front-mounted configurations utilizing the 20" deep enclo-
sure, capacitors may be mounted in the rear 10 inches of
space behind the vertical bus. Rear access to the motor
control center is required for servicing the capacitors.
Optional 240 and 480 volt blown fuse indicating lights are
available. Visible through unit door.
All capacitor units are Dry Type.
Bus connected power factor capacitors may be paralleled

to increase kvar ratings. Refer to factory.
E8
Programmable Logic Control PLC
General Series 90-70

The 90-70 system has the most capability in the Series 90
GE Fanuc Automation – Charlottesville, VA, has continually family and is used for system PLCs as well as process lineups
updated/improved its PLC products, which are mounted and of MCC’s. It has a wide range of input and output modules as
wired in the Motor Control Center. well as extensive communication capabilities. With the GE
Fanuc authorized third party VME modules, the Series 90-70
The Series Six PLC was the first in a succession of developments is exceptionally versatile (including imbedded PCs, hard drives,
that established GE Fanuc in the marketplace. The Series Six motion control, etc.). The 90-70 is positioned to eventually
was the first PLC to employ the family concept. Other industry supercede the Series Six Plus.
firsts include the Workmaster, the first IBM-based programmer;
the Series One, the first modular small PLC; Genius, the first Genius I/O System
distributed, intelligent I/O system; and the first embedded MAP A system of inherently distributed inputs and outputs, which
3.0 interface in a PLC. GE Fanuc’s newest line of PLCs family. consists of:
• Genius I/O Blocks (mounted at the point of control). Input
GE Fanuc was one of the first companies in the United States and outputs: AC, DC, isolated, analog, counter. Special Power
to attain ESO 9001 registration from UL, CSA and BSI. This Management Module
means that GE Fanuc has met the most comprehensive • Bus Controller (which serves as the interface between the
quality standard in the design, manufacturing and service of genius system and the Series Six or Series 90 PLC or other
its products. Many of the PLC packages have UL, CSA and industrial controllers)
FM recognition. • Hand Held Monitor (the portable diagnostic and configu-
ration tool) used for trouble-shooting, monitoring, scaling
Micro Series and configuring the I/O Blocks.
8 Input 6 Outputs • Genius Bus which provides communications between the
16 Input 12 Outputs bus controller, hand held monitor, and up to 30 I/O Blocks
85–265 VAC over a single shielded twisted wire pair.
• Genius Local Area Network can communicate between
computers, PLCs, and genius blocks up to 7500 ft. using a F
single twisted pair.
Genius I/O Blocks are mounted, wired, and configured by the

factory, and provide superior, built-in diagnostics which detect
open circuits, short circuits, overloads, and a variety of other
malfunctions which are beyond the power of conventional
PLCs to detect.
Series 90-30 VersaMax

A versatile unit, the 90-30 is a small PLC with extended The new VersaMax PLC combines all the advantages of the
capabilities. It is used for MCC lineup sequencing, similar to VersaMax I/O with a powerful CPU to provide a programmable
the Series One PLC. However, with the capability of 512 I/O controller that is easy to use, affordably priced and feature
points, analog I/O, coprocessor modules, and genius com- rich. With a modular and scalable architecture, the VersaMax
munication, it approaches the definition of a larger PLC. PLC is ideal for standalone or distributed control applications
• Inputs AC or DC (common), analog, high speed counter. up to 256 I/O. It can be networked as a slave to Profitbus-DP
• Outputs AC, DC, (Relay, Common, Isolated), analog display or you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy
(special module). The isolated AC outputs have third-party integration. The CPU features floating point math
been tested with Size 1-4 starters for MCC use. and easy configuration and programming.
• Special Motion control, high speed counter, third party
modules
Field Control
Modular design gives you more choices. Each field control
station consists of a bus interface unit or BIU, an optional field
control processor for local logic, up to four field terminal bases
and as many as eight field I/O modules. With field control, you
can design a system that meets the precise needs of your appli-
cation – and upgrade it easily as your application needs change.
F1
General Standard Input Circuit – 120/240 Volt Isolated AC Output

I/O Circuits Module (VersaMax IC200MDL331)
Terminals Field Wiring

Standard Input Circuit – 120 Volt AC Input Module
(VersaMax IC200MDL240) Rated Voltage 120/240 Vac
1 NC
H N Output Voltage Range 85 to 264 Vac
2 ~ Outputs per Module 8 (each output isolated)
Terminals Field Wiring 3 NC Isolation 1500 volts RMS between
4 A1 fieldside and logic side
A1 Rated Voltage 120 Volts AC NC
1 5 500 volts RMS between
A2 H ~ N
2 Indicators One Lcd per point 6 each output
A3 Inputs per Module 16 (1 group with a NC
3 7 Output Current (Max.) 2 amps per point,
A4 A2
4 single common) 8 5 amps per module
A5 Output Characteristics:
5 Isolation 1500 volts RMS between 9 NC
A6 10 H N Inrush Current 25 amps maximum
6 field side an logic side ~
7
A7 Current Draw 50 mA (typical) at rated 11 NC for one cycle
8
A8 voltage from backplane 12 A3 Min. Load Current 100 mA
9
B1 13 NC Output Voltage Drop 1.5 volts maximum
B2 14 H ~ N Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at
10 Input Characteristics:
B3
Max. On-state 70 volts to 132 volts 15 NC 120 Vac
11
B4 16 A4 6 mA maximum at
12 Min. Off-state 0 to 20 volts
B5
17 NC 240 Vac
13 Min. On-state 6 mA maximum
B6 18 H
~
N On response time 1 ms maximum
14 Max. Off-state 1.5 mA maximum
B7 NC
Off response time 9 ms maximum
15 On response time 1 cycle 19
B8 A5
(1/2 cycle)
16 Off response time 2 cycle 20
17 NC
18 NC
H N
19 ~
20 NC
I/O Configurations
Standard I/O for motor control center consists of grouped
input cards and isolated output cards (note that the isolated
outputs can control NEMA Size 1 to 6 starters).
F2
Selection Application Space only for field mounting of PLC is available. GE Industrial
Systems can also provide logic programming if it is clearly
MCC-PLC Selection and Application defined but it is recommended that a local Control Systems
EVOLUTION offers GE VersaMax I/O as a standard Distributed Integrator provide this service. A computer is needed to pro-
I/O. VersaMax will interface with most PLC's using an open gram most PLC's. GEIS can exercise (test) the starter coils
network. The standard package offers isolated triac outputs and its return wiring to the PLC if requested.
and grouped inputs, one input and one output per FVNR
starter. Distributed I/O contains the hard wiring within the Please contact your GE FANUC office or distributor for more
MCC shipping split and provides a network interface to where details and additional related PLC & OIT products.
the logic resides. This approach reduces field connections and
reduces start up time. If custom configurations are needed GEIS will mount and wire Major Brands of PLC's. The cus-
use the following guide lines. tomer can supply or we will source. Customers are responsi-
ble for Bill of Material of competitive brands.
Determining I/O (Input, Output)
The voltage and current level requirements of I/O are needed Predefined Distributed I/O using GE VersaMax
to properly select. Input power for remote I/O is also required. Package A for 1 to 8 FVNR Starters
A typical starter would be 120Vac Input, and 120Vac Output. Qty VersaMax Description
A combination of DC In and AC Out may also be required. 1 IC200MDL240 Input 120Vac, 16 pt
1 IC200MDL331 Output 120Vac, 8 pt Isolated
The recommended PLC Output for a GE starter coil is a two
3 IC200CHS002 I/O Carrier, Box style
amp isolated Triac. The data needed to determine I/O should 1 IC200GBI001 Network Interface, (NIU) Genius, Slave
be represented in the elementary or functionally described in 1 IC200PWR101 120/240Vc Power Supply
the specification. An example would be "a hard wired contact
shall be provided for Positive feed back" or " provide a 4 to Package B for 1 to 16 FVNR Starters
20Ma signal to the drive". Qty VersaMax Description
1 IC200MDL240 Input 120Vac, 16 pt
• Discrete Input example: Push Button, Selector Switch, Starter 2 IC200MDL331 Output 120Vac, 8 pt Isolated
Overload contact, Starter/Contactor Aux. Contact, Et.
• Discrete Output example: Coil on Starter/Contactor, Pilot
3
1
IC200CHS002
IC200GBI001
I/O Carrier, Box style
Network Interface, (NIU) Genius, Slave
F
1 IC200PWR101 120/240Vc Power Supply
Light, Alarm, and ET.
Note: Confirm output is sufficiently rated to handle inrush of coils. Package C for 4 Drives & 4 FVNR Starters
Qty VersaMax Description
• Analog Input example: Transducer or Drives Process signals, 1 IC200MDL240 Input 120Vac, 16 pt
4-20Ma. 0-10Vdc, 0-5Vdc, et. 1 IC200MDL331 Output 120Vac, 8 pt Isolated
4 IC200CHS002 I/O Carrier, Box style
• Analog Output example: Drives or other process controller. 1 IC200GBI001 Network Interface, (NIU) Genius, Slave
• Communication: Typically Field I/O has a predetermined 1 IC200PWR101 120/240Vc Power Supply
Protocol (communication Language) 1 IC200ALG230 Analog Input 12 Bit Current/Voltage, 4 Channels
4-20ma, 010 Vdc, -10Vdc to + 10 Vdc
Example: A GE Genius block I/O or Field Control I/O uses 1 IC200ALG320 Analog Output 12 Bit Current, 4 Channels
Genius communications VersaMax I/O has the option for 4-20ma
GENIUS, (ODVA) Device-Net or Profi-DP communication
protocol. Package D for 1 to 64 DeviceNet Nodes
Most PLC Central Processing Units have communication Qty VersaMax Description
ports. Communication Cards or Modules are also available. 1 IC200PWR101 120/240Vc Power Supply
1 IC200CPU001 12k Memory, Two Ports RS-232 & RS-485
1 IC200BEM103 DeviceNet Master
The PLC manufacturer can determine correct CPU (CENTRAL 1 IC200CHS006 Communication Carrier
PROCESSING UNIT) required. Functional specification should
determine if ladder only logic is required or if floating point
math is need or what kind of communication is needed if
any. The requirement for Analog inputs or outputs will add
the need for register memory to be considered. This kind of
data will determine the CPU required. The input for PLC's
Power Supply is also required.
F3
Distributed I/O
VersaMax – Universal I/O
Diagnostics Modular & Scalable LED Status Indicators

• Network Status • Each Network Interface Supports Up • Field Power
• Fault to 8 I/O Modules & 256 Points • Module OK
• Force • Point Status
Wide Range of Discrete I/O
F • Power
• 25 Modules Snap-Together Carriers
Easy to Use • 8, 16 & 32 Point Densities • No Cable Interconnects
• Set Bus Addresses with Rotary Switch – • Mixed Discrete I/O • DIN Rail Mounting
No Programming Required • High Speed Counter Inputs • Hot Insertion/ Removal of I/O
• Automatic Addressing of I/O
Analog I/O Options
Variety of Network Interfaces • 9 Modules
• DeviceNet™ • RTD and Thermocouple
• Profitbus–DP • 4 & 8 Channel Analog
• Genius® Bus • Mixed Analog I/O
F4
GE Fanuc Field Control

General
With Field Control, GE Fanuc engineers have refined proven
technology to create a truly modular system for decentralized
I/O and control. Each station of a Field Control network can act
as a stand-alone controller, allowing for physical separation
of logical control functions and faster processing times. As a
result, Field Control is an ideal complement for the Series 90
PLC and Genius I/O a single low-cost solution for a variety of
application needs.
A Local Solution to Field Logic

By providing simple logic solving at the local station, Field
Control produces sharp increases in a system's raw speed and
efficiency. Future versions of Field Control will accommodate
additional programming options to build on these advances.
Open Architecture Provides the Solution for Diverse
Initially, users will be able to program a Field Control station
Applications
using standard GE Fanuc Logicmaster™ programming soft-
GE Fanuc embraces open architecture for two reasons. It helps
ware used on Series 90-30 and Series 90-20 PLCs. In the
our customers make the most of their existing investment in
future, they will be able to choose a programming language
industrial automation. And it enables them to take advantage
of their choice.
of new products as they are developed.
With Field Control, GE Fanuc engineers have created a single
To address the diverse needs of all our customers, GE Fanuc
device that can accept field wiring and condition the signal
for input to or output from the control system. There is no
will be opening the field processor component to third-party F
partners to develop additional fieldbus interfaces. In addition,
need for accessory terminal blocks installed solely to connect
I/O protocol has been published, and we will be encouraging
field devices with I/O. Designed to be installed and wired like
the development of third-party I/Os and accessories.
a field terminal block, Field Control can reduce connections
by up to one-half.
Description
Bus Interface Genius BIU, 24 Vdc Power
The One Choice for Both Local Panel Control and Units: FIP BIU 24 Vdc Power
Decentralized I/O Field Terminal I/O Base, Barrier Style, accommodates 2 modules
Currently, control specifiers must purchase one I/O platform Bases: I/O Base, Box style, accommodates 2 modules
High Density Connector Base, accommodates 2
for local panels and a different platform for decentralized modules
I/O. Field Control is an open platform, equally at home in Aux. Terminal Block, Qty. 2 Barrier Style
both applications. Using the Genius bus and other available Aux. Terminal Block, Qty. 2 Box Style
21” I/O Base Expansion Cable (only 1 per person)
fieldbuses or communication options, Field Control provides Field Processors: Micro Field Processor
an extremely cost-effective, space-saving option in both Field I/O Modules: 24 Vdc Pos./Neg. Input 16 Pt. Grouped
local panels and decentralized panel applications. 12/24 Vdc 0.5A Pos. Output 16 Pt. Grouped
Analog Input Current 8 Pt. Grouped
Analog Output Current/Voltage 4 Pt. Grouped
48 Vdc Pos./Neg. Input 16 Pt. Grouped
120 Vac Input 16 Pt. Grouped
240 Vac Input 16 Pt. Grouped
120 Vac 2A Output 8 Pt. Grouped
12-120Vac Output 16 Pt. Grouped
Relay 2A 8 Pt. 6 Form A/2 Form C Isolated
125 Vdc Input 16 Pt. Grouped
Analog Input Current 16 Pt. Grouped
Analog Output Current 8 Pt. Grouped
Thermocouple 8 Pt. Isolated
RTD 4 Channel Isolated - 3 wire
F5
Genius I/O System The electronics assembly contains the power supply, com-
munications chip, microprocessor, smart switches and other
General electronic components required to perform Genius I/O functions.
The Genius I/O, a system of inherently distributed inputs and
outputs, is designed to interface to any number of industrial Each I/O Block is keyed to prevent the insertion of a non-
controllers, including GE Fanuc PLCs, and third party CPUs. It matching electronics assembly into a terminal assembly
can be used as the only I/O on a System or it can be mixed wired for a different power. Once inserted, the electronics
with the present rack-type I/O. Genius represents a com- assembly automatically reads the content of the EEPROM
plete rethinking of the role of I/O in industrial control. Genius and initializes itself to match the configuration originally
Blocks are UL, CSA, FM and CSA hazardous environment established for the I/O Block in that position. Table 1 lists the
approved. The Genius I/O system was made possible types of I/O Blocks currently available, as well as other basic
through two key General Electric technological innovations: system components.
Smart Switch: A device with the built-in current and voltage
sensors required for the extensive diagnostics available with Typical Genius I/O Unit
Genius I/O. The smart switch allows detection of faults not
only within the programmable controller I/O system, but
also faults in the coils and other actuator devices under the
control of the programmable controller, as well as the signal
path from pushbuttons and other input devices. No other
technology provides this level of fault detection.
Communications Controller: A token bus local area network
controller which allows Genius I/O devices to communicate
over a single-shielded twisted wire pair, rather than via bundles
of point-to-point wires required in conventional systems.
F Genius I/O System Architecture

A simplified block diagram of the Genius I/O System is shown
in Figure 2. The PLC, CPU and I/O rack shown are standard
Series 90-70 units. The Genius serial bus connects I/O Blocks
with a single shielded twisted pair up to 7500 feet from the
Bus Controller. Fig. 2. Genius I/O System Block Diagram
Genius I/O Block

A microprocessor-based, configurable, ruggedized solid-state
device to which field I/O devices are attached. Measuring
approximately 9" x 4" x 3", I/O Blocks can be mounted virtu-
ally anywhere, such as in a draw-out unit of a motor control
center or pushbutton station where it is common to have
one input and one output per motor circuit. No separate
rack or power supply is required. Field wiring is attached to
a terminal assembly which separates from the removable
electronics assembly. Thus, field wiring need not be disturbed
to service the electronics. Due to the microprocessor and
intelligent switching, inputs and outputs may be mixed arbitrari-
ly on blocks. There are no dip switches nor replaceable fuses.
An EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only

Memory) is located within the terminal assembly. The EEPROM
stores all user-selectable options and retains these selections
even during POWER OFF conditions. It can be read by the
electronics assembly at any time and altered by commands
from either the CPU or the Hand Held Monitor. The EEPROM
is the only electronic device in the terminal assembly and
has a long Mean-Time-Between-Failure (MTBF).
Fig. 3. Genius I/O Block Assembly
F6
Genius I/O System MCC Space Requirements

Allow 18" height for the first two blocks, plus 12 inches for
Table 1 – Genius I/O Components each additional set of two. This allows room for 120 volt
Block Working No. of power supply disconnect (or CPT). Maximum of 8 blocks per
Function Nominal Voltage Voltage Circuits section, without ventilation.
AC I/O 115 Vac, Grouped 93-132 Vac
combination 47-63 Hz 8 (1 x 8)
input and output 16 (1 x 16) Hand Held Monitor (HHM)
AC/DC I/O 115 Vac/125 Vdc 93-132 Vac 8 (4 x 2) A portable diagnostic and configuration tool used for
Isolated 47-63 Hz
combination 105-140 Vdc
addressing, trouble-shooting, monitoring, scaling and con-
input and output figuring the I/O Blocks. The HHM plugs directly into any
4 groups of 2 block or into the programmable controller, or it can be
DC I/O 24-48 Vdc Source 18-50 Vdc 16 (1 x 16)
combination
attached to any location on the twisted pair communica-
input and output tions link. It is supplied in a case suitable for you to attach to
DC I/O 24/48 Vdc Sink 18-50 Vdc 16 (1 x 16) your belt, or it can be panel mounted using the mounting
combination
input and output
bezel included with each HHM. It has an alphanumeric LCD
AC Analog Analog 115 Vdc 93-132 Vac 4 In/2 Out display (4 lines x 16 characters) with microprocessor-driven
Powered 47-63 Hz prompts available in English, German, French or Italian. A
DC Analog Analog 24/48 Vdc 18-50 Vdc 4 In/2 Out
Powered
key feature of the HHM is its ability to manually perform
Other Components functions and force discrete and analog I/O, whether or not
Hand Held Monitor 93-132 Vac there is a programmable controller connected to the sys-
47-63 Hz
or
tem. This greatly facilitates system check-out prior to full-
185-265 Vac scale operation.
47-63 Hz The HHM includes:
Bus Controller With Diagnostics
Bus Controller Without Diagnostics • An LCD display capable of displaying 16 characters per
Metering Power Trac 93-132 Vac 120V-PT line on four separate lines.
Block 105-140 Vdc 5A-CT
• Four display-labeled soft keys.
• A decimal keypad, including sign and decimal point keys.
F
• Four fixed-function keys.
Fig. 4. Hand Held Monitor
F7
Genius I/O System On the analog blocks, the Genius I/O can detect an input
open wire, mix high-level analog signals on one I/O Block
The Bus Controller serves as the interface between the (±10 volts dc, ±5 volts dc, 0-10 volts dc, 0-5 volts dc, 1-5
Genius I/O systems and the industrial controller. volts dc, or 4-20 mA), establish linear conversions from analog
values to engineering units, process high-level and low-level
Bus Controllers are available for Series 90-70, Series 90-30 alarms, and detect overrange and underrange analog signals.
(for communications), Series Six PLCs, personal computers, Analog blocks also allow you to establish different filter delays
DCSs, Industrial Robots, GE Drive Systems and others. on inputs: short filter delays (5-10 msec) for fast system
response in controlled low-noise environment or longer filter
Genius I/O Bus delays (20-1000 msec) to reject electrical noise in harsh
To connect Genius I/O elements together is a 150 kbit/sec environments. All of these faults are automatically reported
serial token passing bus communications link formed by to the HHM or CPU.
daisy-chain connection of twisted pair wire. It has high
noise immunity (1500 volt common mode) and its operation Table 2 – Genius I/O Diagnostic Features
Block Discrete Point
is not affected by any block attachment, removal or failure.
Input Output
Each data bit is triply encoded for data integrity; error Addition of Block Open Wire Failed Switch
detection is further improved via cyclical redundancy check Power LossÀ Load not present
Loss of Block Over Temp. Overload
(CRC). Bus errors are reported automatically.
(incl. Communications Short Circuit
Power, Memory Losses) Over Temp.
This link requires only one pair and can be Belden type 9302 Power LossÀ
Address Conflict Analog I/O
Open WireÁ
(or factory approved equivalent) up to 100 feet (30 meters)
Underrange
in total length, or must be Belden type 9182 or Alpha type Bus Error Underrange Overrange
9823 (or factory approved equivalent) up to 7500 feet (2258 Overrange
Bus Controller OK Hi Alarm
meters). Belden type 9182 or equivalent is used in motor
Low Alarm
control center equipment.
F À Isolated only.
Diagnostics Á 1-5 volt DC (4-20mA DC) range only.
The Genius I/O system provides advanced diagnostic capability.
Error detection for discrete and analog circuits is summarized
in Table 2. Such detection includes a variety of block failure
modes, bus failures and failures within the Bus Controller. Of
greater significance, however, is the diagnostic power for the
attached I/O devices. On discrete blocks, the system detects
open wires, short circuits, overloads, and a variety of other
malfunctions which are beyond the power of conventional
programmable controllers to detect. Many faults may be
detected before they cause a malfunction in equipment. The
Genius I/O can detect the integrity of a control circuit before
the circuit must actually be energized by periodic “pulse-
testing” under microprocessor control within a Genius I/O
Block. Over temperature sensors are also built into each circuit.
Genius LAN
DEC and MicroVAX are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.
F8
Connections Optional Inputs/Diagnostic

Additional INPUT connections can be made to monitor the specific
PLC Controlled Starters status of combination starters and feeders to provide further
A combination motor starter will require a minimum of one INPUT diagnostic information to the process operator and maintenance
and one OUTPUT per starter. As shown in Figure 5, the OUTPUT is personnel.
connected between the starter coil and the fused, ungrounded leg 1. The status of the overload relay can be monitored. An electrically-
of the control voltage source (terminals 3, 1). The INPUT connection isolated, normally-open auxiliary contact can be ordered with
is made between the starter “Seal contact” and the grounded leg the GE 300-Line overload relay and an additional PLC INPUT can
of the control voltage source (Terminals 2, X2). The INPUT monitors be wired in series with it.
the status of the seal circuit to independently verify that the starter 2. A PLC INPUT can be connected between terminals 1 and X2 to
has closed. monitor the availability of control power to the starter unit.
Starter Units with Separate-Source Control Voltage

INPUT and OUTPUT connections are shown below (see Figure 7) for
units arranged for separate-source control.
Input
A common (non-isolated) INPUT can be used if all X2 terminals are
wired together.
Output
As required by NEC Article 430-74, if a disconnect auxiliary contact
and/or control circuit fuse (FU) is included with each starter, then
the OUTPUT must be the isolated type. However, if the auxiliary
Fig. 5. Input and Output Connection contact and fuse are omitted, a common OUTPUT module can be
used. With common output modules, interposing relays are
required with NEMA Size 3 and 4 starters. Note: NEC article 430-74
When an H-O-A switch is used with PLC I/O, the configuration will can be met with GE’s standard split-type control terminal boards F
appear as shown in Figure 6. Note: as mentioned previously, the on all draw-out units, or with GE’s pull-apart terminal boards.
INPUT monitors the status of the starter’s seal circuit in the manual
mode as well as the PLC (automatic) mode.
Fig. 7. INPUT and OUTPUT Connections for Separate-Source Control
Isolated Versus Non-Isolated Outputs

Fig. 6. H-O-A Connection
Isolated Outputs
GE’s isolated OUTPUTS can be used for direct control of NEMA Size
Starter Units with Individual Control Transformers 1 through 4 combination starters without the use of an interposing
For starters having individual control power transformers all OUT-PUTs relay. The contactors of GE’s standard NEMA Size 5 and larger
must be isolated type. This requirement is necessary due to the starters are operated at line voltage with interposing relays operated
separate voltage sources provided by the individual control trans- from the secondary of the control transformer.
formers. INPUTs may be either isolated or non-isolated types. Where
non-isolated INPUTs are used all X2 terminals must be wired together. Non-Isolated Outputs
NEMA Size 1-2 starters may be operated directly from common PLC
Surge Suppressors OUTPUT cards. The continuous current rating of GE’s non-isolated
In cases where excessive noise is present on the control line or hard OUTPUT module requires an interposing relay for NEMA Size 3 and
interlocks which will operate often (in series with PLC OUTPUT), larger starters. Check the module ratings for inrush and continuous
surge suppressors are recommended. values.
F9
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Frequency AC Drives motor using dampers or valving to reduce its output. (The
General Application Notes amount of savings depends, of course, on the amount of
time the motor can be used at the reduced speed.) It will also
As a vehicle for controlling multiple motor functions, the lower demand charges due to reduced motor starting current.
Motor Control Center has become the logical place to mount
variable speed drives. However, the application of these
drives is not a simple selection process, and the following is
an explanation of some of the variables involved.
A drive must have ventilation. The basic power switching

components are transistors, which are mounted on finned
heat sinks. Although the drive may be operating at 95% or
greater efficiency, the 5% (±) normal heat loss cannot be
enclosed in the MCC without exceeding the safe operating
temperature (50°C). Standard mounting is ventilated (NEMA
1 or 1A only).
A drive is electronically controlled. The new generation of

PWM drives are all microprocessor based. Although well
shielded from stray noise, they require careful wire routing,
and in some cases shielded wire runs to avoid “nuisance”
problems. Control wires should be run separate from power
leads. If they must cross, try to keep them at right angles to
minimize the induced fields (noise).
A drive creates noise on the power system. Although we use

line reactors to minimize system disturbances, a drive will
create harmonics on the power/system (both at the motor
and at the transformer). If sensitive computer systems are to
be utilized, they should be isolated from the drive’s source,
or EMI/RFI filters added. Likewise, the harmonics created at
the motor may cause the motor to run hotter than expect-
G
ed. Standard motors should be derated 10% when used with
a drive. We recommend GE’s high efficiency Type KE motors Line Reactors
for drive applications as a minimum. See motor application The available power source connected to the Drive is not to
data, SH, page G3. exceed 500kVA. If the AC power source is greater than
500kVA and the Drives rating (HP) is less than 10% of the
A drive must have short circuit protection. Since a drive is power source's kVA; AC line reactors will have to be installed
subjected to higher available short circuit currents in an in L1, L2, and L3 power leads of the Drive. We provide 3% Line
MCC, (vs. a wall mounted unit) additional components such reactors as standard but they can be deleted as an option.
as current limiting fuses and reactors are utilized. See typical
one line sketch. Load Filters
IGBT drives create voltage spikes at the motor. Motor insulation
A drive can provide significant energy savings. When a fan or rating must be higher than these peaks. Motor should meet
pump is utilized on a system with variable flow rates, whether NEMA MGI part 31. If not, load filters may be required. Refer
to page G4.
measured in gallons per minute or cubic feet of cooling air
per minute, a variable speed drive is the most efficient means
of control. Since a variable torque load requires significantly
less energy when operated at lower speed, the energy savings
can be in the 25 to 50% range when compared to a full voltage
G1
Harmonic Filters GE GEMActive Dynamic Current Injection Filters for harmonic

GE offers two basic filter types in MCC construction: Matrix cancellation and power factor correction:
and Dynamic Current Injection. Consult factory for sizing. • Reduce harmonics for IEEE 519 (1992) standard compliance
• Decrease harmonic related overheating of cables,
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters provide broadband reduction of switchgear and transformers
harmonics. They not only offer better performance over • Reduce downtime caused by nuisance thermal tripping of
other broadband filtering and 12- and 18-pulse harmonic protective devices
reduction techniques, they also are suitable for a wider • Increase electrical network reliability and reduce operating
range of applications. Matrix Harmonic Filters can be costs
installed in either variable or constant torque drive applications • Compensate each phase independently
and can be applied on either diode or SCR rectifiers. For • Are UL approved
applications other than variable torque, contact the factory • Offer parallel connection for easy retrofit and installation
for filter selection. of multiple units for large networks
• Filter to the 50th harmonic
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters enable most AC drive systems to • Filter entire network or specific loads depending on instal-
comply with the voltage and current distortion limits outlined lation point
in IEEE 519. A complete harmonic analysis and product • Respond to load fluctuations in 40 microseconds with 8
selection tool is available at www.geelectrical.com. Select milliseconds for full response to step load changes
Products > Capacitors > Matrix Harmonic Filter > Energy • Feature IGBT based power electronic technology
Savings Calculator and Harmonic Estimator. • Come in 50, and 100A models for 208-480V, 50/60 Hz,
three phase networks that can be paralleled to match load
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters are multi-stage low pass filters requirements
specially configured to avoid the attraction of harmonics
from other sources on a shared power system. They will not GE GEMActive reduces problematic harmonic levels and pro-
cause power system resonance. However, the configuration vides instantaneous power factor correction. Cost savings
of the filter requires that only drives or equivalent loads be result from reduced downtime and maintenance. In addition,
loaded on the output. One filter can be used with multiple over-sizing of distribution equipment to provide for harmonics
drives, but if there is a drive bypass circuit, there must be and poor power factor can be avoided. GE GEMActive
one filter per drive and the filter and drive combination must dynamically corrects power quality by providing: Active
be bypassed. Harmonic Filtration, Resonance Prevention, Power Factor
Correction and Dynamic VAR Compensation
G
G2
Adjustable Speed Drives Select the proper motor using the data from motor application
brochures, identify the motor full load current and select the inverter
Motor Application Data
which meets or exceeds the motor full load current requirements.
Harmonic Derating
2. Motor Speed Range
AC motors have traditionally been applied as constant
Motor synchronous speed is determined by the following equation:
speed motors, so there is little published information on
Frequency
reduced speed efficiencies, especially when operated with a
Sync. Motor Speed = 120 X Applied
non-sinusoidal supply such as an inverter. The harmonics
Number of Motor Poles
present in the PWM inverter output increase motor losses
and thus motor heating. General Electric Energy Saver® Induction motors operate at a somewhat slower speed than
motors, designed for high efficiency and improved thermal synchronous speed due to slip, which is generally 2-3 percent of
characteristics, may be applied at nameplate rating for variable synchronous speed.
torque duty, such as centrifugal fans and pumps, for 4 and 6
pole ratings. Standard AC motors designed for 60 Hertz If the application requirements call for higher or lower speeds than can
operation should be derated 10% for variable torque duty. For be obtained by using standard motors following these application
constant torque applications, Energy Saver and standard design guidelines, gear increasers or reducers should be considered.
motors should be applied per Fig. 1. For other applications
refer to the Company. 3. Multi Motor Drives
Multiple motors can be driven simultaneously by one drive unit. In
order to select the proper inverter, total the individual motor full load
ENERGY $AVER TYPE KE
100
currents and multiply the sum by a factor of 1.1. Select the inverter
than can deliver the total current calculated. Each motor will require
STANDARD K individual overload relays, when switched independently RTF.
% TORQUE
4. Acceleration Time
Acceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls
for a faster acceleration than the drive system is capable of, the
0 100 150 unit may trip due to an overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual
% SPEED time to accelerate the driven load should be calculated using the
Fig. 1 following equation and the acceleration time setting should be
adjusted accordingly.
G
(Wk2 X ∆N)
TA =
308 (T X 1.2)
How to Select Drives Where:
1. Types of Load TA = Time to accelerate the driven load (in seconds).
In selecting inverters, load patterns of machines should be known ∆N = Change in speed (in RPM)
in advance. Generally, loads can be categorized into the three types WK2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor shaft.
shown below. Estimate or obtain the point marked 0 as indicated. Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.2)
This defines maximum torque and the maximum or minimum T = Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)
speed requirement of the driven equipment. Calculate the required
motor HP by substituting the maximum torque and rated motor When using a drive in a conventional constant speed machine
base speed in equation (1). application where a full voltage starter has been used, the acceler-
ation time should be set longer than the original machine. This is
VARIABLE CONSTANT CONSTANT because the maximum allowable current that the G11 drive can
TORQUE TORQUE HORSEPOWER
deliver is 150 percent of rated current, while full voltage starters
TORQUE 100%
TORQUE 100%
TORQUE 100%
deliver 600-800 percent. This means that the drive delivers a “soft
start” and thus reduces starting torque over that of a full voltage
starter, which naturally yields a longer acceleration time.
SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% 150%
MOTOR SPEED (MAX.)

(1)HP = TXN
5250
HP = Required HP
T = Torque in lb./ft. MOTOR SPEED
(ZERO) ACCELERATION TIME
N = Speed in RPM TIME
ADJUSTABLE
G3
Adjustable Speed Drives Application consideration for AF-650GP and AF-600FP drives:
How to Select Drives (cont.) Max. cable lengths between drive and motor without filters
Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V
5. Deceleration Time AF-650GP & AF 600FP 460V Input 49 ft. (15M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)
Deceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting AF-650GP & AF 600FP 230V Input 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)
calls for faster deceleration than the drive system is capable

of, the unit may trip due to an overvoltage or overcurrent
condition. Therefore, the actual time required to decelerate • PWM IGBT drives are not typically recommended with
the driven load should be calculated using the following 1000Vac insulation Motors.
equation and the deceleration time setting should be adjusted • Load filters are recommended from 984 ft. when motor
accordingly. insulation level is 1300V or above.
• Custom motors are available for applications not listed.
TD = (Wk X ∆N)
2
308 (T X .2) • Contact motor manufacturer or your GE Consumer &

Where: Industrial representative.
TD = Time to decelerate the driven load (in seconds).
∆N = Change in speed (in RPM)
Peak Voltage Insulation Rating (Horizontal, 60 Hz Only)
Wk2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor Shaft.
Frame ODP-KE TEFC-KE XSD-KS XSD-IEEE841-KS ASD-KAF
Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.2) 140 1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
T =Motor full load torque (lb./ft.) 180 1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
210 1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
If faster deceleration is required, refer to the Company. 280 1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
Cable & Motor Considerations for AF Drives 360 1300V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
A primary concern in recent years has been for wiring 440 1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
between adjustable speed drives and motors. This is because 500 1300V P-P 1300V P-P N/A 1600V P-P 1600V P-P
voltage spiking, seen at the motor terminals at the switching
ODP = Open-Dripproof, TEFC = Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled,
frequency can cause damage to the motor insulation. This XSD = Extra Saver Duty, ASD = Adjustable Speed Drive
spiking depends on several factors such as drive input voltage
level, drive output wave-form dv/dt, length of the cabling
from the drive to the motor and characteristics of the cabling Caution: If existing motors are used, condition of insulation
G used, etc. In addition, there are secondary effects related to must be checked and manufacturers insulation rating as
drive/motor wiring that impact performance such as parasitic well. Load filters may be required.
capacitance.
Drive input voltage, motor insulation and cable length are

beyond the scope of the drive design. The following
guidelines were compiled for your convenience.
System Filtering
The use of a properly sized filter can reduce the voltage peaks
and rise times seen at the motor. The filter must be properly
sized and located. If the filtering is done with reactors it must
be placed at the motor terminals. If the filtering is with LRC
(Inductance, Resistance and Capacitance) it must be placed
at the output terminals of the drive.
G4
Adjustable Speed Drives

AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Series
Adjustable Frequency Drive

The AF-600 FP is an AC packaged drive that provides the
functionality required for variable torque loads such as fans,
pumps and compressors. Forward/Reverse and Simple
commands from the local or remote keypad or from the
facility management system, along with pre-loaded motor
parameters and factory defaults, allow for quick and ready-
to-go installation. The E9000 offers expanded horsepower
ratings in 230Vac (1/4 to 50Hp), 460Vac (1/2 to 500Hp) and
575Vac (1-500Hp) for even greater range of application.
The AF-650 GP Adjustable Frequency Drive with flux vector

and dynamic torque-vector control using optimized control
of voltage and current vectors provides the enhanced AF-600 FP
performance that you are looking for in your application.
The AF-650 GP process control systems will make any task
simple and profitable. In addition, by adding an optional
(encoder) speed feedback device, this drive can be configured
to operate in a flux vector control mode. The AF-650 GP provides
flexibility across a wide range of constant torque applications.
The AF-600 FP and AF-650 GP series have an array of func-

tions that provides significant benefits. Standard features
include: auto-tuning without having to rotate the motor, built
in PID control, rotating motor pick up control (catch spinning
motor), Standard RS485 (Modbus RTU), Metasys or Apogee
FLN P1 Communications, automatic energy-saving operation
(which minimizes drive and motor loss at light load) and other
functions to combine performance and energy savings. The
G
new generation IGBT means reduced electrical noise and
less voltage spiking. On-line-tuning provides a continuous
check for variation of motor characteristics during running
of high-precision speed control. All drives conform with the
following safety standards: UL, cUL, CE and C-Tick. AF-650 GP
G5

Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP
Environmental Conditions
Enclosures IP20 Chassis, IP00 Chassis
Installation Location Do not install in locations where product could be exposed to dust, corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist,
vapor, water drops or direct sunlight. There must be no salt in the atmosphere. Condensation must not be
caused by sudden changes in temperature. For use ataltitudes of 3280 ft. (1000M) or less without derating.
Storage Temperature -25° to 65°C
Ambient Temperature -10° to +50°C (24 hour average max of 45°C)
Ambient Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration 1 g.
Cooling Method Fan Cooled all ratings. Fan Control Auto, 50% level, 75% level, 100% level adjustable
Standards / Approvals CE, UL, cUL, and C-Tick Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms symmetrical
amperes for 230V and 460V
Input Power Supply
Rated Input AC Voltage 200-240 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 380-500 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-600 Vac, 3-phase,
50-60Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-690 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V
Maximum Voltage Imbalance 3% of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor > 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor > 0.98
Switching On Input Power Supply Maximum twice/minute up to 10HP, Maximum once/minute above 10HP
Environment According to EN60664-1 Overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
DC Link Reactors Built-In DC Link Reactors on all ratings
RFI Filters Built-In RFI Filters to reduce noise generated by the drive. Meets industrial standards.
Output
Rated Output Voltage 0-100% of supply voltage
Output Frequency 0-1000 Hz; 0-800Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525/600/690 V above 50HP
Switching on output Unlimited
Accel/Decel Times 0.01-3600 seconds
Control Method Sinusoidal PWM Control (V/Hz, Avd. Vector Control, Sensorless Vector, and Flux Vector with motor feedback)
Control
Starting Torque 160% starting torque for 1 minute (constant torque), 110% starting torque for 1 minute (variable torque)
Carrier Frequency (Motor Noise Selectable - 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 kHz
Torque Boost AF650 GP-Selectable by up to 5 individual V/Hz settings in V/Hz Mode or by 0 - 300% setting of Torque Boost parameter
in Adv. Vector Mode. AF600 FP- 0 - 300% setting to compensate voltage in relation to the load at low speed.
G Acceleration / Deceleration Time 0.01-3600 seconds (4 acceleration and deceleration times are selectable via digital inputs. Acceleration and
deceleration patterns can be selected from linear or S-curve).
Data Protection Password Protection for Quick Menu or Main Menu, 0-9999.
Pattern Operation Settings via Built-In Logic Controller Sequencer
Jump Frequency Control 4 jump (or skip) frequencies via parameter set to avoid mechanical vibration
Slip Compensation Maintains motor at constant speed with load fluctuations
Torque Limit Control Output torque can be controlled within a range of 0.0 to 160% (0.1 and steps)
8 Preset Speeds 8 programmable preset speeds selectable by 3 digital inputs
Built-In Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1
Trim Reference Setting Available for speed reference offset via potentiometer, voltage input, or current input
DC Injection Braking Starting frequency: 0.0-1000 Hz, 0-800Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525-690 V above 50HP Braking time:
0.0-60.0 seconds Braking level: 0-100% of rated current
Jogging Operation Operation via On key or digital input (Fwd or Rev).
Auto-Restart After Power Failure Restarts the drive without stopping after instantaneous power failure
Energy Savings Controls output voltage to minimize motor loss during constant speed operation
Start Mode Function This functionality smoothly catches a spinning motor
Real Time Clock Built-In with programmable timed actions
Logic Controller (LC) Sequencer
Logic Controller Events Up to 37 types of Programmable Events
Comparators Array of 6 Comparators
Timers Array of 8 Timers, adjustable from 0.0 to 3600 sec
Logic Rules Array of 6 Boolean Logic Rules
Logic Controller States Array of 20 Logic Controller Action States
Process Controller (PID)
Process CL Feedback Select Up to 2 references. Selectable - No function, Motor Feedback, Separate Encoder, Encoder Option Module, or
Resolver Option Module
Process PID Control Normal or Inverse
Process PID Anti Windup Disabled or enabled
Process PID Start Speed 0.0-200 Hz
Process PID Proportional Gain 0.00-10.00
Process PID Integral Time 0.1 - 10000.0 ms
G6
Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP (continued)

Process PID Differential Time 0.0 - 10 s
Process PID Differential Gain 1.0-50.00
On Reference Bandwidth 0-200%
Operation
Operation Method Keypad operation: Hand, Off, Auto Digital Input: Programmable for Start/Stop, Forward/Reverse, Jog Timer
operation: Stop after predetermined time frame. USB Port for programming drive with optional PC Software
Frequency Reference Signal Left or Right Arrow buttons on keypad in Manual Mode Speed Potentiometer: 0 to +10 Vdc, 10 to 0 Vdc,
0- 10Vdc analog input 0/4-20ma analog input
References Up to 3 Input References can be selected from Analog Input #1 or #2, Frequency Input #1 or #2, Network, or
Potentiometer
Input Signals Signals 6 - Digital Inputs, 24 Vdc PNP or NPN, 1 - Safe Stop Digital Input suitable for category 3 installations to
meet EN-954-1, 2 - Pulse Inputs rated to 110kHz or 1 - Pulse Input and 1 - Encoder Input 24 Vdc rated to 4096
PPR 2 - Analog Inputs -10 to +10V scalable or 0/4 to 20 mA scalable. Ddigital Input Settings: No Operation, Reset
after drive trip or alarm, Drive at stop with no holding current, Quick Stop according to Quick Stop Decel Time 1,
Stop on input going low, Start, Maintained Start arfter signal applied for Minimum of 2ms, Reversing, Start Reverse,
Enable Start Forward only, Enable Start Reverse only, Jog, Multi-Step Frequency selection (1 to 8 Steps), Hold Drive
Frequency, Hold Reference, Speed Up; activated by Hold Drive Frequency, or Hold Reference, Slow Down; activated
by Hold Drive Frequency or Hold Reference, Drive Parameter Setup Select 1-4 Precise Start or Stop; Activated when
drive parameter, precise start or stop function is selected, Catch Up or Slow Down; Activated by signal to add to or
subtract from input reference to control speed,Pulse Input selectable from 100 - 110000Hz, Accel / Decel Time select.
Set Input to Accel / Decel Times 1 to 4, Digital Potentiometer Input Increase or Decrease, Mechanical Brake Feedback.
Output Signals 2 - Digital Outputs 24 Vdc (Digital Outputs are used in place of 2 of the Digital Inputs), 2 - Form C Relays rated to
2A at 240 Vac, 1 - Analog Output 0/4 to 20mA, Relay Output Settings : No Operation, Control Ready, Drive Ready,
Drive Ready in Remote, Standby No Drive Warnings, Drive Running, Drive Running No Drive Warnings, Drive
Running on Remote, Alarm, Alarm or Warning, At Torque Limit, Out of Current Range, Below Current, Above
Current, Out of Speed Range, Below Speed, Above Speed, Out of Feedback Range, Below Feedback, Above
Feedback, Thermal Overload Warning, Reverse, Bus OK, Torque Limit and Stopped, Brake and no Warning, Brake
Ready and No Faults, Brake Chopper Fault, External Interlock, Out of External Reference Range, Below External
Reference, Above External Reference, Fieldbus Controlling Drive, No Alarm, Running in Reverse, Local Mode Active,
Remote Mode Active, Start Command Active, Hand Mode Active, Auto Mode Active
Protective Functions Line Phase Loss, DC Overvoltage, DC Undervoltage, Drive Overload, Motor Overtemperature, Motor Thermistor
Overtemperature, Torque Limit, Overcurrent, Ground Fault, Short Circuit, Control Word Timeout, Brake Resistor
Short-Circuited, Brake Chopper Short-Circuited, Brake Check, DC Link Voltage High, DC Link Voltage Low, Internal
Fan Fault, External Fan Fault, Power Board Overtemperature, Missing U Phase, Missing V Phase, Missing W Phase,
Internal Fault, Control Voltage Fault, Auto Tune Check - Wrong Motor Parameters, Auto Tune Low Inom - Motor
current is too low, Current Limit, Mechanical Brake Low, Drive Initialized to Default Value, Keypad Error, No Motor,
Soft Charge Fault, Auto Tuning Fault, Serial Comms Bus Fault, Hardware Mismatch, Speed Limit.
G
Keypad
Keypad Features LCD Display with 6 Alpha-numeric lines. Multi-Language Support, Hot Pluggable, Remote Mount Option, and
CopyCat Feature, IP65 rating when remote mounted on enclosure, LED’s - Green - drive is on, Yellow - indicates
a warning, Red - indicates an alarm, Amber - Indicates active Menu keys and H-O-A keys
Keypad Keys Status - shows status of drive, Quick Menu - Enters Quick Start, Parameter Data Check or Trending Modes, Main
Menu - Used for programming all drive parameters, Alarm Log - Used to display Alarm list, Back - Reverts to
previous step or layer in parameter,structure, Cancel - Used to cancel last change or command, Info - Displays
information about a command arameter, or function in any display. Hand/Off/Auto - Used to control drive locally
or put drive in remote mode, Reset - Used to reset Warnings or Alarms.
Password 2 Level Password Protection
Alternate Motor Parameters Up to 4 Separate complete parameter set-ups are available
Graphical Trending Trend Speed, Power, Frequency or any value programmed in status display
RS485 Modbus RTU Serial
Communications
Physical Level EIA/RS485
Transmission Distance 1640 ft (500m)
Node Address 32
Transmission Speed 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,or 115200 (bits/s)
Transmission Mode Half Duplex
Transmission Protocol Modbus RTU
Character Code Binary
Character Length 8 Bits
Error Check CRC
Special AF650 FP Modes
Fire Override Mode Overrides drive’s protective features and keeps motor running
Pump Cascade Controller Distributes running hours evenly over up to 4 pumps.
Sleep Mode Drive detects low or no flow conditions and adjusts output
Dry Pump Detection Detects pump operation and can set off alarm, shuts off, or other programmed actions
Belt Monitoring Drive can detect relationship between current and speed to recognize a broken belt
G7
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Standard Options

Line Reactor 3% Reactor is standard with the drive
DC Link Reactors Standard with drive
Class AFII RFI Standard with drive
Speed Control The unit comes with a Keypad that can be used for Speed adjustmemt.
Outputs Relays Drive come standard with two relays form C rated to 2A at 240 VAC.
Outputs Analog Drive comes standard with 1 Analog output 0/4-20mA
Outputs Digital Drive comes standard with 2 Digital outputs at 24 VDC (Digital Outputs are used in place of the 2 Digital inputs.
Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Additional Options

Line Reactor 5% Reactor must be requested and priced
Speed control Door mounted potentiometer must be requested and priced.
Communication Module
Profibus Profibus DP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. Supports Profibus DP V1 communications
networks.
DeviceNet DeviceNet internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. ODVA certified device.
Ethernet IP Ethernet IP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP/FP. ODVA certified device. Features 2-Port built-in
switch. Also includes webserver and email notification. 1Requires I/O and network slots and cannot be used with
any other network or I/O modules
Modbus TCP Modbus TCP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. (Available 2009)
ProfiNet RT ProfiNet RT internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600 FP. (Available 2009)
LonWorks LonWorks internal mounted module for use on AF-600 FP drives only. Supports LonWorks building automation
communications networks
BacNet BacNet internal mounted module for use on AF-60 FP drives only. Supports BacNet MSTP building automation
communications networks.
Relay Output Relay Output internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP. Module adds (3) Form C relay
outputs to the drive. Relays are rated at 2A at 240V resistive load.
Analog I/O Analog I/O internal mounted module for us on the AF-600 FP drive only. Module Includes: 3 - Analog Inputs
0-10V, 0/4-20mA & 3 - Analog Outputs 0-10V, Battery Back-Up power for AF-600 FP’s internal Real Time Clock
24V DC External Supply 24V DC External Supply internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP & AF-600 FP drives. This module
accepts an external 24V DC supply which is used to keep the control board of the drive and other option
modules powered in the event of a Line side power outage. Can be used with Communications and I/O Modules.
General Purpose I/O General Purpose I/O internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP drives. Module includes:
G Encoder
3 - 24V Digital Inputs, 2 - PNP/NPN Digital Outputs, 2 - 0-10V Analog Inputs & 1 - 0/4-20mA Analog Output
Encoder internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP. Module supports all 5V incremental encoders.
Also supports Hyperface SinCos encoders.
Resolver Resolver internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. Module supports 4-8Vrms, 2.5kHz - 15kHz,
50mA resolvers. Resolution is 10bit at 4Vrms.
Safe PLC I/O Safe PLC I/O internal drive mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. This module provides a safety input
based on a single pole 24V DC input.
G8

AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Drives
L1 L2 L3
STAB CB
(3)
L3 (5) (6) K3
(2)
L2 (3) (4) K2
(1)
L1 (1) (2) K1
[E103A]
(A1) (B1) (C1)
REA
(A2) (B2) (C2)
R S T
AF6
(91) (92) (93)

(L1) (L2) (L3)
4-20mA [A IN]
RED C1 (54) LFTR
OR [COM A IN] (C1) (C2)
0-10VDC (55)
REMOTE (96) W T3
BLK 11 SHLD [A IN]
GND (53) AF-600FP / AF-650GP (B1) (B2)
[+10 V OUT] (97) V T2
(50)
MOTOR
(A1) (A2)
(98) U T1
(99)
(95) RELAY 2
GND (06) 71
(05) 72
RUN
(14) (13) [START] (04) 70
FWD (18)
[REVERSE]
CM (19) RELAY 1
(03)
[+24V OUT]
(12) (02)
[+24V OUT]
(13)
(01)
[COM D IN]
(20)
Analog (39)
[COAST/LOW] Output
(27) 4-20mA
(42)
G
[JOG]
(29)
(68)
[D IN] RS-485 (69)
(32) Interface
(61)
[D IN]
(33)
(82)
Brake
Resistor
(81)
K1 K2 K3
(1) (3) (1)
2FU INFU
(2) (4) (2)
H1 H2
(H1) (H2)
(2)
1FU (1) T
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
AF6 21
(FAULT) RUN 20
(01) (03) (A1) (A2) 18
14 S 14
JPR 3
6
5
3
1
5 X2
X2
TB
FAN1
(1) (2)
RUN R
(33) (34) (R1) (R2)
20
ETM
(E1) (E2)
RUN G
(21) (22) (S1) (S2)
21
Note: See Section K for more circuits.
G9

Drive Configuration in Motor Control Center Construction
Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Required for Disconnect
STAB (2)
MCC BUS
(1)
STANDARD VFD CB REACTOR VFD (3) * MOTOR
STAB (2)
MCC BUS
VFD WITH (1)

LINE ISOLATION CB REACTOR VFD (3)
* MOTOR
STAB (2) OL
MCC BUS
VFD WITH (1)

BYPASS FEATURE
CB REACTOR VFD (3)
* MOTOR
STAB (2) OL
MCC BUS
VFD WITH (1)

LINE ISOLATION CB REACTOR VFD (3)
* MOTOR
PLUS BYPASS FEATURE
(1) Drawout breaker through 600A

(2) J Fuse as an option
(3) DC link reactor (choke) included in drive
* Load Filter option
G10

Space Height & Assembly
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Space Height, 42 kAIC
Max HP GP/FP CT/VT @ Section 1 Section 2
Function Plug-In Disconnect
208V 230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V Width X Height Width X Height
X 5/5 5/5 3/3 5/5 SELI, SELT 15 2.5
X 5/7.5 10/10 SELI, SELT 15 3
X 10/15 10/15 15/15 20/25 SELI, SELT 15 4
25/40 25/40 40/60 60/60 SELI, SELT 24 4
/75 SELI, SELT 24 5.5
Basic , LR,
Bypass, & 40/ 40/ SELI, SELT 30 5.5
Isolation
50/60 50/60 SFLI, SFLT 30 5.5
75/ 75/ SELI, SELT 24 5.5 15 1.5
/75 100/125 SFLI, SFLT 24 5.5 15 1.5
100/125 150/200 SGLI. SGLT 30 5.5 24 1.5
200/250 300/ SGLI. SGLT 30 5.5 30 4.5
(1) Section 2 will always be on the left and bottom mounted. All Space height is based on all main bus sizes.
(2) When line reactors are not required consult factory for dimensions.
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs.
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 42KAIC@ 480V.

208V 230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V Width X Height (3) Width X Height (1)
X 3/3 3/3 3/3 5/5 SELI, SELT 15 2
X 10/10 SELI, SELT, TECL 15 2 G
X 10/15 10/15 15/15 20/25 SELI, SELT 15 3
X 20/25 SELI, SELT, TECL 15 3
X 15/20 15/20 30/30 40/50 SELI, SELT 15 4
X 40/50 SELI, SELT, TECL 15 4
25/40 25/40 40/60 60/75 SELI, SELT 24 4
Basic & LR 60/75 SELI, SELT, TECL 24 4
40/ 40/ 75/ SELI, SELT 24 4.5
/75 100/125 SFLI, SFLT 24 4.5
75/100 SELI, SELT, TECL 24 4.5
100/ 150/ SFLI, SFLT 30 5.5
200/250 300/350 SGLI, SGLT 30 5.5 20 3
350/350 500/500 SKLI, SKLT 30 6 24 6
500/500 SGLI, SGLT 30 6 24 3.5
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs.
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 65KAIC@ 480V

Minimum UL short-circuit rating 65KAIC @ 600V for all buckets rated 575/600 V.
G11

Space Height & Assembly
208V 230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V Width X Height (3) Width X Height (1)
X 5/5 5/5 3/3 5/5 SEPI, SEPT 15 2.5
X 5/7.5 10/10 SEPI, SEPT 15 3
X 15/20 15/20 30/30 40/50 SEPI, SEPT 15 4
Basic ,LR, 40/ 40/ SEPI, SEPT 30 5.5
Bypass
50/60 50/60 SFPI, SFPT 30 5.5
with
J-Fuse (2) 75/ 75/ SEPI, SEPT 24 5.5 15 1.5
100/125 SFPI, SFPT 24 5.5 15 1.5
100/125 150/200 SGPI, SGPT 36 4.5 15 3
200/250 300/350 SGPI, SGPT 36 5.5 30 4.5
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 100KAIC@ 480V
G12
Solid-State Starters
Overview of ASTAT®-CD Plus & ASTAT®-IBP Plus
Applications
There are numerous applications where soft starting and
limited current peaks are needed for the starting of squirrel
cage induction motors. Traditionally, reduced voltage starting
was accomplished using such electromechanical starters as
star delta starters, autotransformer starters, stator resistance
starters or by using part winding motors. These methods
would provide a two, three or four step torque change by
switching the motor voltage from reduced value to full voltage
(in steps) after a preset time interval.
ASTAT Plus Solid State Reduced-Voltage Starters (also known Advanced Features
as soft starters) use solid state devices to gradually increase ASTAT Plus incorporates many additional advanced
the voltage from an initial preset level (initial torque) to full features to insure suitability for most applications.
voltage over a selected time period. The same solid state Monitoring
devices may also be used to reduce the voltage for the • Motor Current
deceleration of the motor should this be required in the • Line Voltage➀
application. This starting and stopping method provides smooth, • Line Power Factor
stepless acceleration and deceleration of ac squirrel-cage • Elapsed Time
induction motors. The solid state control circuitry also offers • Fault History
many additional functions to be accomplished using the Protection
ASTAT Plus. • Password
• Lockout
• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage➀
• Undercurrent➀
• Overcurrent
• Long Start Time
• Stalled Rotor
G
Secondary Functions
• Secondary Ramp Up
• Secondary Ramp Down
• Tachometer Feedback
Versatile Use • Dual Motor Switch
ASTAT Plus Solid State Reduced-Voltage Starters offer customer-con- Advanced features on ASTAT-CD Plus only
figurable functions, including pedestal voltage, kick start (selectable), • Slow Speed (7% & 14%)
acceleration ramp, current limit, and soft stop (selectable). Typical • Reverse Slow Speed (20%)
applications include the following: • Retry
• DC Injection Braking
• Belted equipment
• Energy Saving
• Centrifugal fans
• Centrifuges The ASTAT-CD Plus also features two programmable inputs,
• Compressors three programmable (two programmable on IBP) output
• Conveyors relays and RS232 serial communications control through
• Crushers ASCII protocol for local PC control and monitoring of up to
• Extruders 32 different stations.
• Fans and blowers
• Mixers
• Packaging equipment
• Pumps
• Textile machinery ➀ Monitors L1
G13
Solid-State Starters High level of immunity

The control signals are optically isolated, and various levels
Features and Benefits
of protection have been set up in the circuits to immunize
the equipment against external disturbances and their
Increase in productivity and reliability with the use of
harmful effects.
static soft starters.
The ability to start and stop the motor without steps or
Easy to run and adjust
transitions lengthens the life of power-driven machines’
This unit can be used for a wide range of applications. A
mechanical parts, and it reduces stress on transmission
keypad and digital display make it easy to select a range of
belts and coupling parts. Consequently, maintenance time is
options that allow the equipment capabilities to be matched
reduced and machine/ facility lifespans are lengthened.
to application need.
Improvement in acceleration/deceleration characteristics
Easy maintenance due to full monitoring
By starting with the voltage ramp or, alternatively, by limiting
Advanced microprocessor technology allows starters to
current, the acceleration and deceleration ramp more closely
identify 21 (20 for IBP) different types of fault. The last four
fits the load characteristics. A kick start also may be selected
faults are retained in memory to facilitate troubleshooting
in instances of high static friction load.
and minimize downtime.
Protected motor
Pump control
The soft starter protects the motor from overloads and from
The ASTAT Plus includes a pump control function that is more
such incorrect operating conditions as loss of an input or
effective in fluid systems than standard soft starting and
output phase, blocked rotor, thyristor short circuit, etc.
stopping. The control reduces fluid surges and hammering
in a pipeline system. This method controls the motor speed
Digital technology
by monitoring the motor parameters voltage control in a
The control system is based on the use of a highly specialized
closed-loop system.
micro-controller that treats the signals digitally, thereby avoid-
ing deratings and adjustments common to analog circuits.
Advanced functions
This type of control insures excellent precision and speed of
The ASTAT-CD Plus includes advanced functions – e.g., linear
execution. The control board uses surface-mounted devices
acceleration ramp, programmable I/O, and connection to a
(SMD) to increase equipment reliability.
computer by serial communication (RS 232) – as standard
features.
G
G14
Solid-State Starters IEC Class 20

Types and Ratings
Thermal characteristics
ASTAT Plus allows motor protection according to IEC Class
10 or Class 20 and NEMA 10, 20 or 30, free selectable by
the ”O” parameter.
IEC Class 10
Multiples of Motor FLA Rating In
NEMA 20
NEMA 10

G
Thermal memory
If the control voltage is not removed, the unit has a cool
down characteristic, the time for cool down is 300 sec. after
the overload trip. If the control voltage is removed after
tripping, you must wait, at least, 2 minutes before the unit
can be restarted.
Operations per hour (CD Only)➀

NEMA 30 Using a cycle T, with starting time of t1, running time of
T-2t1 at rated current and OFF time of t1 sec. (minimum),
the ASTAT-CD Plus allows the following operations per hour.
Starting Operations / Hour. Operations / Hour

Current Starting time t1= 10sec. Starting time t1=20 sec.
2 lr 180 90
3 lr 160 60
4 lr 30 10
➀ IBP is preset at 5 starts per hour.
G15
General Specifications
Voltage Ratings 3ph AC Systems CD up to 500V, IBP up to 600V Up to 600V, +10%, -15% ASTAT- Plus series
Freq. Range 50/60 Hz Control range of 45-65 Hz
Control Control system Digital system with microcontroller
Specifications Starting ramp with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation
Initial voltage (pedestal) % 30 - 95 Un
Starting torque % 10 - 90 Mdirect start
Kick start % 95 Un (90% Mdirect start), adjustable 0 to 999 ms
Motor unit ratio (N) 0.4 to 1.2
Current limitation (starting) 1 to 4.5 (Ir/In) Max. 4.5 In (IBP) Max. 7.0 In (CD)
Bypass (IBP) Direct control of a bypass contactor
Acceleration ramp time s 1 to 45 on IBP 1 to 99 on CD (types: standard or linear ramp up)
Energy savings (CD) s Output voltage reduction according to power factor
Override (CD) Fixed output voltage permanently equal to supply voltage
Brake time by ramp s 1 to 120 (1 to 99 in secondary ramp) adjustable independently of starting ramp time
(types: standard, pump control or linear ramp down) IBP is limited to 1 to 60 sec. ramp
DC braking (CD) 0 to 99 s.; 0.5 to 2.5 In
Slow speed (CD) Direct torque: 7% or 14% of nominal speed; reverse torque: 20% of nominal speed
Retry (CD) 0 to 4 attemps, and 1 to 99 sec. retry time
Monitoring Motor current, line voltage, power, power factor and elapsed time
Running External control Start - Stop
Acceleration phase Adjustable time
Permanent phase Energy savings / Override choice
Stop phase Power cut-off / Ramp / DC braking (CD)/Pump control
Inputs / Outputs Inputs 4 digital optocoupled. Two fixed (Start , Stop) , and 2 programmable (I3, I4)
1 Analog 0-5VDC for Tachogenerator input feedback
Outputs 3 programmable relays, (1r, 2r, 3r) [2 programmable relays, (1r, 3r) for IBP]
1 Analog 0-10VDC output for current metering
Protections Current limit Adjustable from 1 to 4.5 (Ir/In) Max. 4.5 In (IBP) Max. 7.0 In (CD)
Overload IEC class 10 and 20 ; NEMA class 10,20 and 30 all selectable
Cool-down time after overload trip s 300 for reset (for IBP, see restart times)
Loss on input phase s Trip at 3
Thyristor short circuit ms Trip at 200
Heatsink overheating ms Trip at 200
Motor thermistor ms Trip at 200 if thermistor impedance > response value
Loss on output phase s Trip at 3
Stalled rotor ms Trip at 200
G Supply frequency error
Over-current
Hz If f < 45 or f > 65, will not start
100 to 150% In; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99 sec.
Undercurrent 0 to 99% In; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99 sec.
Over-voltage➀ 100 to 130% Un; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99 sec.
Under-voltage➀ 0 to 50% Un; trip time adjustable from 0 to 99 sec.
Error (CPU) ms 60
Memory 4 former errors
Long start time s 2 x ta (ta = acceleration ramp time)
Long slow speed time (CD) s 120
Environmental Temperature °C 0 to +55 (derate output current by 1.5% / °C above 40°C)
conditions Relative humidity % 95% without condensation
Maximum altitude m 3000 (derate output current by 1% / 100m above 1000m)
Mounting position Vertical
Protection Degree IP00, UL Open
Standards CE, cUL, UL CE Conforming IEC 947-4-2; UL, cUL conforming to UL508 (CE is not on IBP)
Conducted & Radiated emissions Conforming IEC 947 -4-2, Class A
Electrostatic discharges Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2, level 3
Radio-electric interference Conforming to IEC 1000-4-6, level 3 and to IEC 1000-4-3, level 3
Immunity to fast transients Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4, level 3
Immunity to surge voltage Conforming to IEC 1000-4-5, level 3
➀ Monitors L1
G16
I/O Wiring
ASTAT Plus’ terminal layout and wiring configuration is shown
in the diagram below.
L1 L2 L3
Control Voltage
110 / 120V AC Serial Comm. M1 Isolation (if supplied)
RS232C
Tx Rx Gr
TBA1 TBA2 M1
M2
12 11 14 23 24 33 34 TD RD SG
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 A2 B1 B2
M2
1r 2r 3r Bypass
Programmable Relay Outputs (if used)
Programmable Inputs
I3 I4
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
1 57 2 57 3 57 4 5 6 7 8 9
Start /Stop - +
(Permanent Command)
V M
G
+ -
3~
1 57 2 57
Motor Thermistor
Input
Tacho feedback
Analog Input
0-10V
Analog Output
Programmable
Inputs
Start Stop
(Command by push-buttons)
G17
Solid-State Starters Starting by current limitation

Operating Modes Override
l/ln
Starting and stopping 4
5a 8a
Initial ramp 1 5 main frequency cycles
Initial voltage (pedestal) 1a 30 to 95% Un (adjustable) 7
9
Kick start 2 95% Un. Enabled by parameter ”Pxxx” to ON 1 9
Acceleration ramp (tramp) 3 Voltage ramp up from1 to 99s (adjustable). t
Dual ramp possibility
Linear speed ramp by tacho feedback also possible
3a Fast increase of output voltage when motor
gets rated speed Energy Savings
Current limit 4 1 to 4.5 (Ir/In) Max. 4.5 In (IBP) Max. 7.0 In (CD) l/ln
4
Permanent state 5 Rated voltage (Override)
8a
5a Rated current
6 Energy savings. Enabled by ”Fxxx” to OFF 6
9
Stopping modes 7 Motor power cut-off. ”Sxxx” to OFF, ”Cxxx” to OFF 7 9
(All selectable) 8 Deceleration ramp 1 to 120s (1 to 60s IBP) (adjustable). t
Secondary ramp 1 to 99 s (1 to 60s IBP)
Ramp down modes available are:
- Soft Stop -Voltage ramp down-. Enabled by
”Sxxx” to ON Linear ramp with T.G. feedback
% of motor full load speed
- Pump control. Selectable by ”Sxxx” to ON 100
and ”Cxxx” to ON
- Linear ramp down (Tacho feedback needed)
1 1a
8a Evolution of current in deceleration ramp mode
9 DC brake (0 to 99s adjustable). Enabled
t
by ”Bxxx” to ON (CD)
Jog and linear ramp

Slow speed
Linear acceleration and 1 Ramp time adjustable (Selectable by
1a parameter ”Dxxx” to ON)
Basic diagram
deceleration ramp
Low slow (7%) and (CD) 2 Enabled by parameter ”Jxxx” to ON and 100
High slow (14%) speeds 3 ”jxxx” to LO or HI

G Reverse slow speed (20%) (CD) 3a Enabled by parameter ”Jxxx” to ON and
”rxxx” to ON 14
3
Slow speed (7% or 14%) 4 Enabled by parameter ”Jxxx” to ON 7

2
Acceleration ramp 5 Ramp time adjustable
t
Soft stop (deceleration ramp) 6 Ramp time adjustable 3a
20
Slow speed (7% or 14%) (CD) 7 Enabled by parameter ”Jxxx” to ON
DC Brake (CD) 8 Current and time adjustables, Enabled by
parameter Bxxx to ON, and bxx, Ixxx adjustments
Slow speed
Full diagram
Starting by voltage ramp
100
5
Override 6
U/Un
5 4 7
8
2 3A 8
3
3
7 t
9 9 TERMINALS
1A
1 t
CLOSED
4-57
OPEN
Energy Savings CLOSED

1-57
U/Un
OPEN
1
2 3A
3 6
3 CLOSED
8 2-57
7 9
1A OPEN
9
t t
1
G18
ASTAT-IBP Plus Lockout
The number of starts per hour that the ASTAT-IBP Plus can
initiate is limited and depends on the starting current and
the ramp time. It has a lockout feature that is designed to
protect the SCRs between starts. This parameter should be
set before operating the ASTAT-IBP Plus. The lockout setting
range is 0-45 minutes between starts. After starting a motor,
the ASTAT-IBP Plus goes into lockout mode for the period set
for the LKXX parameter. If a consecutive soft start is attempted
within the time set for the LKXX parameter, error code E027
will appear on the display. See the ASTAT-IBP Plus User Manual
for the appropriate value to program this parameter.
Note: If Soft Stop is enabled, the lockout times listed should be increased by 50%.
Note: If control power is lost, lockout time resets to two minutes.
30 sec. start 20 sec. start 10 sec. start 5 sec. start

Power Starting % LK time LK time LK time LK time
Unit Duty of Frame Starts per between Starts per between Starts per between Starts per between
Size Cycle Rating Amps hour starts, min. hour starts, min. hour starts, min. hour starts, min.
Std 300% 165 6 10 15 4 30 2 30 2
K Hvy 450% 248 1 45 8 8 20 3 30 2
Std 300% 204 1 45 8 5 20 3 30 2
L Hvy 450% 306 — — — — 8 7 12 5
Std 300% 240 1 45 8 7 20 3 30 2
Y Hvy 450% 360 1 — — — — — — —
Std 300% 315 6 10 12 5 28 3 30 2
M Hvy 450% 473 2 30 8 8 15 4 30 2
Std 300% 390 4 15 10 6 20 3 30 2
Z Hvy 450% 585 1 45 6 10 10 6 30 2
G
Std 300% 468 2 30 8 8 15 4 30 2
N Hvy 450% 702 — — 4 15 10 6 20 3
Std 300% 576 6 10 14 4 30 2 30 2
P Hvy 450% 864 2 30 4 15 10 6 20 3
Std 300% 744 4 15 9 6 24 3 30 2
Q Hvy 450% 1116 — — — — 6 10 12 5
Std 300% 906 2 30 4 15 10 6 25 3
R Hvy 450% 1359 — — — — — — 6 10
Std 300% 1083 1 45 3 20 6 7 12 5
S Max 1161 1 45 3 20 8 7 12 5
G19
Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with
Primary Disconnect
ASTAT-IBP Plus Integrated By-Pass Space Requirement
Starter Type Power Circuit Breaker Horsepower IC (kA)
and Feature Unit Size Frame 200V 230V 460V 575V @ 480V Section Width X-Height
S K SELT 15 20 40 50 42 20” 3
T L SELT 20 25 50➀ 60 42 20” 3
A Y SELT 25 25 60➀ 75 42 20” 3
B M SELT 30 30 75 75 65 20” 3
ASTAT-IBP Z SFLT 40 50 100 125 65 20” 4
N SGLT 50 60 125 150 65 20” 5
P SGLT 60 75 150 200 65 24” 5
Q SGLT 75 100 200➁ 300 65 24”+ 20” 4 + 2.5
R SGLT 100 100 250➂ 300 65 24”+ 20” 4 + 2.5
S SGLT 125 150 300➂ 350 65 24”+ 20” 4 + 2.5
S K SELT 15 20 40 50 100 20” 3.5
T L SELT 20 25 50➀ 60 100 20” 3.5
A Y SELT 25 25 60➀ 75 100 20” 3.5
ASTAT-IBP B M SELT 30 30 75 75 100 20” 3.5
with J Z SFLT 40 50 100 125 100 20” 4
Fuses N SGLT 50 60 125 150 100 20” 5
P SGLT 60 75 150 200 100 24” 5.5
Q SGLT 75 100 200➁ 300 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
R SGLT 100 100 250➂ 300 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
S SGLT 125 150 300➂ 350 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
S K SELT 15 20 40 50 100 20” 3.5
T L SELT 20 25 50➀ 60 100 20” 3.5
A
ASTAT-IBP B Y SELT 25 25 60➀ 75 100 20” 3.5
with M SELT 30 30 75 75 100 20” 3.5
Isolation Z SFLT 40 50 100 125 100 20” 4.5
&J N SGLT 50 60 125 150 100 20” 5
Fuse P SGLT 60 75 150 200 100 24” 5 + 2.5
Q SGLT 75 100 200➁ 300 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
R SGLT 100 100 250➂ 300 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
S SGLT 125 150 300➂ 350 100 24”+ 20” 5 + 2.5
G ➀ Use M power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.
➁ Use S power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.
➂ Standard Duty only
Standard Features Solid-State Starters in MCC’s Configuration in MCC
ASTAT-IBP
Fully Rated C-2000 Contactor
Integral Bypass
The ASTAT-IBP is supplied with a fully rated bypass contactor with Fuse BYP
across the entire product line. Refer to factory if NEMA ASTAT

contactors are required. CB M
IBP
Reduced Heat Dissipation ASTAT-IBP

The SCRs are used only during starting and stopping of the Integral Bypass
motor. After the motor ramps up, the bypass contactor is & Isolation
BYP
engaged, allowing the ASTAT-IBP to run cool, thus eliminating with Fuse ISO
ASTAT
the need for ventilation, large heat sinks, and fans, which are CB
IBP
M
required for conventional solid state starters.
G20
Reduced-Voltage, 300/450%
ASTAT SS Starters Standard Duty (300/450% selectable)
NEMA HP HP HP HP SSS Cat#

Function @ @ @ @ FLA Disconnect IC Section Section X-Height
Size➀
200/208 230/240 380/50HZ 460/480 @1.15 SF (kA)➁ 1 Width 2 Width
QC2GDP S
.1-3 .1-3 .1-7.5 .1-10 T
1 13.9 A A
B 25 20” 2X
5-7.5 5-7.5 10 QC2IDP
I
15 15-20 27.8 A SELT N
2
10 10-15 20-25 25 QC2KDP
15 20 30 30-40 54.8 A
3
20-25 25-30 40-50 50 QC2MDP 20” 2.5X
100
SSS 30 60 75 91.3 A
4
BASIC 40 40-50 75 100 QC2QDP SFLT 20” 4X
50-60 60-75 100-125 150 187.0 A 24” 5X
5
75 100 150 200 QC2SDP 30” 20” 3X 5.5X
SGT
100 125 200-250 300 321.7A 30” 20” 3X 5.5X
6 350 QC2TDP 30” 5.5X
125-150 150 300 65
400 413.0A 36” 20” 3X 5.5X
QC2UDP SKT
7 200 500 36” 20” 5.5X 5.5X
547.8A
QC2GDP S
.1-3 .1-3 .1-7.5 .1-10 T
1 13.9 A A
B 20” 2.5X
5-7.5 5-7.5 10 QC2IDP
I
15 15-20 27.8 A SELT N
2
10 10-15 20-25 25 QC2KDP 42
15 20 30 30-40 54.8 A
3 20” 3X
20-25 25-30 40-50 50 QC2MDP
SSS 30 60 75 91.3 A
4
With 40 40-50 75 100 QC2QDP 24” 5X
Isolation 50-60 60-75 100-125 150 187.0 A SFLT
5 30” 5X
75 100 150 200 QC2SDP
100 125 200-250 300 321.7A SGT 30” 20” 5X 3.5X
125-150 150 300 350 QC2TDP
6 200 400 413.0A 65
36” 20” 5X 3.5X
G
QC2UDP SKT
200-250➀ 250-300➀ 400-500➀ 500
547.8A
QC2GDP S
.1-3 .1-3 .1-7.5 .1-10 T
1 13.9 A A
B 20” 2.5X
5-7.5 5-7.5 10 QC2IDP
I
15 15-20 27.8 A SELT N
2
10 10-15 20-25 25 QC2KDP 42
15 20 30 30-40 54.8 A
3 20” 3.5X
20-25 25-30 40-50 50 QC2MDP
SSS 30 60 75 91.3 A
4
With 40 40-50 75 100 QC2QDP SFLT 24” 5X
By-Pass 50-60 60-75 100-125 150 187.0 A 30” 5X
5
Isolation 75 100 150 200 QC2SDP
SGT 30” 20” 5X 3.5X
100 125 200-250 300 321.7A
125-150 150 300 350 QC2TDP
6 200 400 413.0A 65
36” 20” 5X 3.5X
QC2UDP SKT
200-250➀ 250-300➀ 400-500➀ 500
547.8A
➀ Application rated C2000 contactors. NEMA size is used as a reference to horsepower only.
➁ 65/85KAIC rating is with fuses.
G21
Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with
Primary Disconnect
Options
1. Solid-State Starter with Isolation Contactor
2. Solid-State Starter with Bypass Contactor
3. Solid-State Starter, Isolation & Bypass
G22
Components
Mag-Break Motor Circuit ProtectorsÁ • Widest trip setting ranges in the industry-specifically
designed to meet control flexibility demands of modern
Mag-Break motor circuit protectors were specifically developed motor installations.
to provide accurate and fast clearing of low-level faults, the • Highly accurate calibration over the entire range of trip
type most prevalent in motor circuits. Because they are settings.
designed expressly for motor circuits in combination with • “Designed in” withstandability for use with slow trip overload
overload relays, they minimize damage to motors and relays – meets “6 times rated current for 30 seconds” criteria.
motor-control apparatus in addition to protecting motor • Mag-Break covers an area of motor circuit protection not
branch-circuit conductors. Continuous-current ratings and provided by any other class of device. In the range of 7-35X
adjustable instantaneous trip ranges have been designed to rated current, the region where most motor circuits failures
meet NEC code requirements concerning motor full-load begin. Mag-Break acts instantly to remove the fault from
and locked-rotor current. The instantaneous-trip point can the system. At 13X (the maximum setting allowed by the
be set low and precisely (just above motor inrush) assuring NEC) other devices take 50 to 400 times as long.À
fault protection and eliminating nuisance tripping.
Times Rated Current
To minimize circuit damage, select precise, optimum trip 1000
CLASS J FUSE
TYPICAL OVERLOAD
points. Each pole of the Mag-Break breaker contains a current HEATER CIRCUIT MAG BREAK-
OPENING 100 ADJUSTABLE
sensing element to trip the breaker instantaneously when ONE TIME FUSE
TRIP RANGE
the pre-selected current setting is exceeded. Mag-Break’s

10
unique magnetic system permits independent factory cali-
TIME IN SECONDS
bration of both HI and LO ends of the trip range. This feature HEATER BURNOUT
1 RANGE
provides field adjustability with superior accuracy and
repeatability at all Mag-Break trip scale positions. TECL CURRENT
.1
LIMITER
.02
.0167 1 CYCLE
.01
1X 7X 10X 13X 35X 70X 100X 200X
• Current Limiter (optional feature) – The Type TECL is a fusible

Mag-Break is field adjustable by means of simple screwdriver current-limiter attachment that bolts to the load end of the
adjustments on the front of each breaker. The field-adjustable Type Mag-Break motor circuit protector. The limiter provides
setting is continuous over the entire range from HI to LO and for up to 100,000 amperes IC at 600 volts AC and is coordi-
each breaker rating label contains a table converting setting nated with the TEC so that normal short circuits will be
position to amperes. An overcurrent on any pole will cause cleared in the usual fashion. Only the unusual circumstances
all three poles to trip simultaneously, thus preventing costly of a high fault will cause the limiter to function. Type TBC
single phasing problems. Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provide 100,000 amperes
IC on 225 ampere and larger frame sizes. Type TBC protectors
H
Features of Mag-Break motor circuit protectors include: are similar in size and operation to Tri-Break circuit breakers
• No costly equipment modifications are required. Mag-Break and employ current limiters integral to the frame as opposed
motor circuit protectors are mechanically interchangeable to an add-on limiter such as the Type TECL. TECL is used
in all respects with conventional circuit breakers of the for 600V applications.
same frame size.
• Conventional circuit breaker accessories such as under-
voltage release, shunt trip and auxiliary switches can be used.
• Mag-Breaks include the Verifier™-Twist-to-trip – permitting
the mechanical simulation of overcurrent tripping through
actuation of linkages and latch surfaces not operated by
the ON-OFF handle. Experience has shown that protective
devices in industrial applications better maintain their original
protective characteristics when regularly exercised.
¬ All data based on NEC requirements and manufacturer’s recommendation.

Á See Section J for application information.
H1
Components
Spectra RMS – 10 second acceleration phase – with current rapidly declining

to full load amperes as the motor nears rated speed.
Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors
Optimum instantaneous protection would have a two-tiered
tripping characteristic. A high value of current would be tolerated
for a few cycles, followed by a lower, sustained trip setting.
That is exactly what is found in the Mag-Break tripping

characteristic.
Interchangeable Rating Plug. Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor Use of this two-tiered time-current curve prevents nuisance
circuit protectors use the same snap-in rating plugs as fully tripping due to magnetizing inrush current, without compro-
configured (long-time trip function) Spectra RMS circuit mising superior short-circuit protection during motor accel-
breakers. Each rating plug defines the range of instantaneous- eration as indicated on page H3.
trip settings available to the circuit breaker through its trip
setting adjustment. The figure below illustrates the most popular application of
Mag-Break motor circuit protectors. This time-current curve
Trip Setting Adjustment. The solid-state instantaneous-trip circuit- shows a plot of motor current versus time (Curve C) for a three-
ry of the Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors has a phase squirrel cage induction motor. The shaded portion of the
single, multi-position adjustment at the front of each breaker. time-current curve (above Curve A) indicates a region of opera-
Changes in settings vary the instantaneous-trip and tracking tion that could produce permanent damage to either the motor,
short-time characteristics. The Mag-Break motor circuit protec- its feeder conductors, or both. The trip characteristics of the
tors differ from a fully configured circuit breaker by providing motor starter’s overload relay is shown as Curve B. The over-
only an instantaneous and tracking short-time trip function. load relay provides both long-term overload and stall protection.
However, the overload relay does not protect the system
Accessory Pockets. Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit from short circuits in either the motor or its feeder conductors.
protectors have the same accessory pockets and use the
same internal accessories as Spectra RMS circuit breakers. Curve C is a plot of motor current during a worst-case start
This important capability allows field modification of Mag- (e.g., low line voltage, highest anticipated required load
Break units with shunt trip, undervoltage release, bell alarm torque, etc.). Curve D is a plot of the Spectra RMS Mag-Break
or auxiliary switch accessories, in any combination, without motor circuit protector’s tripping characteristic.
affecting UL Listing status.
With the addition of the Mag-Break motor circuit protector,
Spectra RMS Rating Plugs the motor circuit now has protection against short circuits.
Use of the same UL Listed interchangeable rating plugs for Stall and long-term overload protection is provided, in this
both Mag-Break and fully configured Spectra RMS circuit example, by the motor starter’s overload relay.
breakers expands the flexibility of the entire Spectra RMS
H family of products. The advantages of interchangeable rating Motor Circuit Protection using Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors
plugs with Spectra RMS circuit breakers are inherent to 50 100
1000
1000 10000
Spectra RMS Mag-Break units, which permit wider ranges of

motor ratings to be protected by a given breaker frame size. 100
A
C
Time in Seconds
10
Spectra RMS Mag-Break Trip Unit Characteristics B
Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provide 1

positive, reliable, and cost-effective instantaneous, with D
short-time tracking, overcurrent protection to those circuits 0.1
where long-time overload protection is supplied by thermal D
0
or solid-state overload devices. 50 100 1000 10000
Current in Amperes
Motor Circuit Short-Circuit Protection Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector and Rating Plug
When a squirrel-cage induction motor is first energized, a high Current Ratings
value of magnetizing inrush current flows for the first few cycles, Circuit Breaker Maximum Available Rating Plugs,
Frame Frame Amperes Amperes
followed by a substantially reduced current flow while the motor 7 3&7
accelerates to its rated speed. Typically, the magnetizing inrush 30 15, 20, 25 & 30
SE-Frame 60 40, 50 & 60
current may be 10 times rated full-load current, for normal 100 70, 80, 90 & 100
efficiency motors and as high as 14 times rated full-load current 150 110, 125 & 150
SF-Frame 250 70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 & 250
for high-efficiency motors prior to the first five to eight cycles. 400 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350 & 400
SG-Frame 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 & 600
Magnetizing inrush current is followed by a “locked rotor” 800 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 & 800
current of 5 to 6 times rated full-load current during 0.1 to SK-Frame 1200 600, 700, 800, 1000 & 1200
H2
Components
Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Applications
Molded case switches are inherently horsepower-rated. By
Construction. The family traditions of ruggedness and virtue of the UL489 six-times rated-current overload test, they
dependability are continued in the Spectra RMS molded case can be used as motor circuit disconnects where overload and
switch line. These units provide a circuit disconnect function short-circuit protection are provided by other protective devices.
using the compactness of molded case circuit breaker con-
struction. The operating handle actuates all three poles of A common application of Spectra RMS molded case switches
the switch using the same common trip bar of Spectra RMS is illustrated below. The figure shows a system containing
circuit breakers and Mag-Break units. three branch circuits.
Termination Lugs. Snap-in termination lugs used with SE- and Branch circuit 1 uses a Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit
SF-Frame Spectra RMS circuit breakers are used interchangeably protector, in conjunction with the overload devices of the motor
in Spectra RMS molded case switches. SG- and SK-Frame starter, to protect the motor and the conductors of that branch
molded case switches use the same bolt-on termination lugs circuit. Branch circuits 2 and 3 use fully configured Spectra RMS
used with Spectra RMS circuit breakers. circuit breakers to provide instantaneous, short-time and long-
time protection for both branch-circuit conductors and loads.
External Accessories. The full range of external circuit breaker
accessories offered for use with Spectra RMS circuit breakers Spectra RMS molded case switches are excellent circuit
and Mag-Break motor circuit protectors, are available for disconnect devices for those applications where both the
molded case switches. In addition, plug-in bases, motor- advantages of molded case switch construction are desired,
operated mechanisms, mechanical interlocks, and the full and where the available short-circuit current is less than the
complement of external handle operators (STDA, TDR and TDM) switch withstand rating.
are available for use with Spectra RMS molded case switches.
All Spectra RMS molded case switches are UL Listed and
Fixed-Trip Setting. The Spectra RMS molded case switches tested per UL Standard 1087 for molded case switches. The
are equipped with a fixed Hi-set instantaneous trip setting short-circuit withstand ratings are based upon three cycle
whose values are shown in the table below. tests. Thus the UL Listed upstream overcurrent protective
devices (i.e., low-voltage circuit breaker equipped with
instantaneous-trip functions, insulated-case circuit breakers,
Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Fixed-Trip Setting molded case circuit breakers or fuses) can be used in con-
Molded Case Maximum Fixed-Trip Setting RMS Amperes junction with molded case switches.
Switch Frame Ampere Rating Nominal ±20%
100
SE-Frame 2100 Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Application
150
SF-Frame 250 2450
400 5600
SG-Frame
600 6000 Molded Case Circuit Breaker
800 12,750
SK-Frame
1200 12,600 Feeder
Molded Case Switch

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Bus
MagBreak
MCCB MCCB
Overload
Conductors
Conductors
Motor To To
load load
Ckt #2 Ckt #3
Ckt #1
Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Current Ratings

Molded Case Switch Frame Maximum Ampere Rating
SE-Frame 100 & 150
SF-Frame 250
SG-Frame 400 & 600
SK-Frame 800 & 1200
H3
Components
Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects

E9000 Switch (30-200 Amps)
The E9000 Switch is a premium heavy-duty disconnect
switch. It was developed to meet the most rigorous industrial
requirements. It meets or exceeds all industry standards for
withstandability and interrupting ratings, and it is UL listed
for use in Evolution MCC.
MCS 400 & 600 Amp

A growing number of industrial applications with high available
short-circuit current has made switch fuse coordination
increasingly important. In addition, there has been a growing
number of requirements for 400 amp and above applications,
including Ground Fault, Annunciation and Remote Tripping.
Evolution supports these requirements by incorporating
Spectra Molded Case Switches with separate fuse blocks for
all 400A and 600A applications. The same accessories used
in the Spectra Circuit Breaker can be used in the MCS. In
addition to ease of accessorizing, the MCS saves space.
Withstandability – Safety and reliability depend on the inter-

rupting capacity of both the switch and the switch-fuse
combination. While switch-fuse interrupting ability is limited
by the maximum current the fuse will interrupt, it is also
determined by the maximum let-through energy the switch
will withstand as the fuse clears a short circuit.
The switch must remain operable after the fuse has cleared.
Switch withstandability rating is determined by the maximum
energy the switch can withstand (and remain operable),
stated as ampere-squared seconds, l2t.
Interrupting Capacity – In addition, the switch may have to

interrupt a wide range of currents without assistance from
H the fuse, including normal switching-duty currents (up to full-
load rating), overload and motor “jogging” currents (up to 10
times motor full load) or intermediate fault currents (usually
arcing faults–from overload to near full-system available).
Previously, basic switch design criteria has been primarily

concerned with interrupting normal switching and motor
starting currents. New applications require a switch capable of
interrupting intermediate fault currents without assistance
from a fuse. For maximum protection, a switch should be
able to interrupt any current on which it can be closed and
reopened before the fuse blows. This is commonly called
“fuse racing.”
H4
Components
HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches and has field-adjustable ground-fault current and delay
time settings for maximum coordination and selectivity.
Construction Features Through 3000 amperes, switches with integral ground
GE Type HPC switches are UL Listed in accordance with fault are the same size as manual switches.
Standard 977, Fused Power Circuit Devices. The over-center • Electric Trip–For remote tripping or for use with Ground-
toggle mechanism provides stored energy, quick-make/quick- Break® components. All 800-2000 ampere electric trip
break operation. Multiple spring-loaded high-pressure current- switches are the same size as manual devices.
carrying contact arms and an arcing contact arm provide • Blown-Fuse Protector–Provides single-phase protection by
excellent current carrying capability without sacrificing high tripping switch when a fuse blows or when switch is closed
interrupting fault performance. These switches can interrupt, with a blown fuse or no fuse installed. Suitable for system
on a make and break basis, a minimum of 12 times their voltage of 208 to 480 volts AC. Mounted internally. Does not
nameplate rating without fuse assistance at 600 volts AC. provide protection of single-phasing of the power source.
Complete HPC switch and Class L fuse coordination is therefore • Auxiliary switch–Provides remote indication of main con-
achieved for all levels of fault current up to 200,000 RMS tact position.
amperes symmetrical at 600 volts AC maximum. Type HPC
switches used as service disconnects comply with the National
Electrical Code Article 230-98 and Article 230-95 for adequate
short-circuit current and ground-fault protection. HPC switches
with integral ground fault, when provided with 120 volts AC
external control power, permit compliance with NEC Article
230-95, which requires ground-fault protection system testing
when first installed.
• High Durability–Safety of Operation–High dielectric
strength, glass reinforced insulating case.
• High Interrupting capability–Arc chute of unique construction
suppresses arcs and cools gases rapidly, providing quick
arc interruption and extended switch life.
• High Transient Voltage withstandability– Interphase partitions HPC switch with integral ground fault Manual HPC switch
mesh with switch cover to completely isolate each pole.
• Extended switch life–Preloaded constant pressure pivot Switch elements are Type “AB,” single-pole, double-throw.
eliminates braid whip and fraying on high short-circuit Switch element ratings are 0.25 amperes at 250 volts DC;
currents and repeated operations. 0.5 amperes at 125 volts DC; 6.0 amperes at 240 volts AC.
• Positive “ON-OFF” indication–Green (OFF), Red (ON), eliminates
any question about the position of the switch contacts. Ground-fault pickup and Delay Time-current curves
• Easy operation–Quick Make–Extra-heavy-duty, low-torque
rotary-operated closing mechanism. L-handle 800-1600 H
amperes; T-handle 2000 amperes.
• Emergency open–Quick Break–Finger-tip “OFF” button
instantly opens the breaker contacts.
• Positive Door and switch interlocking–Separate fuse
access door is not required.
• Fuse mounting bolts with captive washers–For ease of
mounting fuses.
Product Forms
• Top feed–Line terminals at top of switch.
• Bottom Feed–Line terminals at bottom of switch; fuses are
de-energized when switch is in OFF position. Same size as
top feed.
Options Available
• Manual Operation–For manual, high-interrupting capacity
disconnects not requiring remote tripping and/or ground-
fault protection.
• Integral ground fault–Incorporates a solid-state, inverse-time
and fixed-time response. Ground-fault function is self-powered
H5
Components
Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit Options

• Adjustable Short-Time (S) pickup, 1.0-9.0C, and delay (3 bands)
Breakers with l2t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator
• Adjustable Ground Fault (G) pickup, 02.-0.6S, and delay (3
General Description
bands) with l2t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator.
The GE line of Power Break II insulated case circuit breakers
• Adjustable High range instantaneous (H) multiples of
offers the rugged, reliable type of system protection critical
short-time rating.
for heavy-duty applications. Power Break circuit breakers are
• Zone Selective Interlocking for ground fault (Z1) or ground
rated up to 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting
fault and short time (Z2).
capacity without fuses or current limiters. The Power Break
II design consists of two physical envelope sizes: 800, 1600,
2000, 2500; and 3000, 4000 Amp. frame sizes.
Power Break II is a versatile breaker, designed for a wide

variety of applications with features such as temperature
insensitive trip units, push-to-open and -close buttons, standard
padlocking provision, maximum three-cycle closing time, field
installable rating plugs to change ampere ratings, UL listing,
plug in field installable accessories, and easy-to-operate two
stage pumphandle, stored-energy operating mechanism
capable of change after close.
MicroVersaTrip Plus Trip Unit MicroVersaTrip PM Trip Unit

The enhanced MicroVersaTrip Plus trip units utilize a digital,
The MicroVersaTrip PM trip unit adds power management
LCD display with a five-button keypad to provide local set-up
system capability, including advanced metering, and protec-
and readout of trip settings. A built-in battery allows cold set-up
tive relays to the basic functions of the MicroVersaTrip Plus.
(no phase or control power required). A three-phase ammeter
MicroVersaTrip PM trip units communicate directly on the GE
and trip indicators are standard, as is a hinged plastic cover
Power Leader communications bus (commnet).
with provisions for sealing to allow tamper-resistant installation.
The trip unit digitally measures the current waveform in each
Options
phase to determine the true RMS value of the current, regard-
• Power Leader Communication System Link with user-selec-
less of the waveshape. MicroVersaTrip Plus trip units provide
table address assignment for Commnet communications.
accurate, predictable overload and short circuit protection
• Metering.
for distribution systems that include variable speed drives,
• 3-phase Voltmeter, _+1.5@ 1X, configurable for Wye and
rectifiers, induction heating, and other loads that cause high
Delta systems.
harmonic distortion as well as standard circuits. They provide
H maximum breaker-to-breaker selectivity and custom load
• Frequency Meter, +
• kW Meter, _+3.5%
_1 Hz.
protection. Short-time and ground fault functions include
• kVa Meter, _+3.5%
the flexibility of coordination with or without an l2t ramp and
• kWh Meter, _+3.5%
are also available with high range instantaneous.
• Protective Relaying—User selectable in any combination
from 1 to 5 relays
Standard
— Current Unbalance Relay
• 3-phase Ammeter with _+2% accuracy.
— Adjustable pickup, 10-50%
• Adjustable Long-Time (L) pickup, 0.5-1.0X, with four delay
— Adjustable delay, 1-15 seconds, OFF
bands.
— Undervoltage Relay
• Adjustable instantaneous (I) pickup, 1.5-10X without short
time, 15X with short time–thru 2500A and 13X for 2500A.
— Adjustable pickup, 1-15 seconds, OFF
• Local Overload, Short Circuit, and Short-Time Trip Indicators
— Overvoltage Relay
with overload pickup warning.
• Test set initiated trip indication.
— Adjustable pickup, 1-15 seconds, OFF
— Voltage Unbalance Relay
— Power Reversal Relay
— Adjustable pickup, .01-3.00 per unit
H6
Components
Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers and • Spectra RMS Mag-Break instantaneous-only motor circuit
protectors also use the same digital, solid state trip unit
THED/TEDL Circuit Breakers and rating plugs as the circuit breakers. The interchangeable
Features rating plug establishes the instantaneous pickup range
(with tracking short-time) but does not change the frame
Spectra RMS ampere rating.
SE150, SF250, SG600 and SK1200 circuit breaker frames • Spectra RMS molded case switches have a fixed, high-set
have a digital, solid state, RMS sensing trip system with field instantaneous trip (without tracking short-time function) and
installable, front-mounted rating plugs to establish or change have short circuit withstand ratings equal to their equiva-
the breaker ampere rating. Adjustable instantaneous with lent breaker frame size interrupting rating in most cases.
tracking short-time is standard on all frames including SE150. • RMS breakers are ambient insensitive. Trip times will not
vary over the range 10-50° breaker ambient.
MicroVersaTrip Plus Trip System • Spectra RMS breakers contain no parts that would support
SG600 and SK1200 are optionally available with the fungus growth and are, therefore, inherently fungusproof.
MicroVersaTrip Plus trip system which offers expanded
functionality in the same space-saving size of standard Other MCCB Features
Spectra RMS breakers. • Broad product line to meet virtually any application need.
• Reduced downtime. A tripped breaker is easily spotted and
Standard can be immediately reset after the fault has been corrected.
• 3-phase Ammeter with ±4% accuracy. • Eliminates single phasing. A common trip bar disconnects
• Adjustable Long Time (L) pickup, 0.5-1.0X, and delay all poles simultaneously on both overloads and short circuits.
(3-4 bands). • Offers application flexibility through the use of a wide variety
• Adjustable Instantaneous (l) pickup, 1.5-10X. of accessory devices and special attachments.
• Local Overload and Short Circuit Trip Indicators (T) with • Repetitive operation — no fuses to replace.
overload pickup warning. • Breakers can be repetitively tested. Fuses must be
• Interchangeable trip rating plugs with test set jack for destroyed to confirm calibration accuracy.
TVRMS test set.
• Digital LCD display with four-button keypad for function Reference – GET-7002 for further application information.
selection and set point adjustment and sealable, clear

Lexan® cover for tamper-resistant settings.
• True RMS sensing for accurate response to high harmonic THED/TEDL Circuit Breakers
content waveforms. Made similar to the Mag-Break TEC with TECL limiter, the THED
• EMI immunity per ANSI C37.90. with appropriate TEDL limiter provides a thermal magnetic
breaker, UL listed with 100 kAIC short circuit ratings through
Optional 600 Volts.
• Adjustable Short Time (S) pickup, 1.0-9.0C, and delay (4 bands)
with I2t ON/OFF selection. The add-on limiter coordinates with the THED’s thermal H
• Adjustable Ground fault (G) pickup, 0.2-1.0S, and delay (4 magnetic trip to allow normal tripping functions at standard
bands) with I2t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator. The 4 ratings with backup limiting at high short-circuit levels.
short time and ground fault delay bands provide broader
THED Trip TEDL
system selectivity. 15 TEDL36015
20 TEDL36020
A complete circuit breaker consists of a UL Listed circuit 30-60 TEDL36060
70-100 TEDL36100
breaker frame and a rating plug (UL Listed interchangeable
trip breaker unit). Terminal lugs for cable connection are
available if required.
• All frames use the same UL listed, field installable internal

accessories (auxiliary switch, shunt trip, undervoltage
release and bell alarm).
• All frame sizes have maximum UL listed interrupting ratings
of 200 kA @ 240 volts AC and 100 kA @ 480 volts AC with
600 volts AC ratings to 65 kA depending on frame size. UL
listed current limiting versions are provided through the
SG600 frame for the 65 kA @480 volts AC and the 100 kA @
480 volts AC models, with no increase in physical frame size.
H7
Components
Ground Break Systems

Model BGFL (Relay)
Trip Currents 5-60, 30-360, or 100-1200A
Description
These Class 1 Model BGFL ground fault relays and sensors
form a system for detecting a ground fault current on a
ground ac power system. When a ground fault exceeds a
pre-selected current level and time delay setting, the relay
initiates a trip signal for a shunt trip disconnect device to open
and clear the fault. This BGFL system provides protection for
electrical equipment, not for personnel.
Operating range: Trip currents of 5-60, 30-360,

or 100-1200A. Time delay from
0.10 to 1 second (adjustable).
Input power: 2 VA plus shunt coil require-
ments. Rated @ 120 Vac.
Input withstand: 200,000 Amperes RMS for 3
cycles, 50/60 Hz.
Nominal input voltage: 120 Volts ac, 125 Volts dc, 24
Volts dc, 48 Volts dc.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Ambient temperature range: -30°C to +60°C
Only for use with GFL sensors.
Approximate weight 1.5 lbs.
• Meets NEC service entrance equipment standards.

• Available in three basic styles: Standard, Form C or Zone
Interlocking for coordination of single or multiple ground
fault devices in system.
• Integral test panel with Push To Test and Shunt Trip
Bypass pushing for ease in proper operational testing of
the system, with or without tripping the protective device.
H • Power On LED indicator in cover.
• Positive visual trip indicator, manual reset.
• Infinitely adjustable Time Delay.
• Discrete current threshold adjustment.
• Panel or door mounting.
• Rear terminal kit and clear plastic cover standard with
door mounting.
• Electromechanical relay output, positive ON and OFF.
• Operates with molded case and power circuit breakers,
bolted pressure switches, fusible disconnect switches.
Contact Rating
Device Input Power Inrush Cont.
120 Volts ac 10A 3A
125 Volts dc 1A 1A
48 Volts dc 4A 4A
24 Volts dc 8A 8A
H8
Components
Ground Break Systems

Type GFM Ground Fault System
U.L. Listed File no. E110395

Self powered.
Temperature Range: -30°C. to +75°C.
Positive “ON” (Green) and “OFF” (Red) condition indication,
manual reset.
Instantaneous only (GFM-252)-standard
Time delay from instantaneous to 36 cycles (GFM-262).
Model GFM-252, 262
Trip currents from 3.8 to 18 amperes (size 1 to 3 starters) Contacts rated 10 Amps continuous, 23 Amps inrush, 120 Volts AC
5 to 18 amperes (size 4, 5, 6, 7 starters)
0.46"
1.17"
General 2.00" 0.50"
These Class 1 Model GFM Ground Fault protection systems .86"
3.30"
are designed to minimize damage or loss to equipment
caused by destructive arcing ground faults. This GFM system 1.15"
8
is designed for all polyphase applications and is ideally suited 2.50" 1.18" 3 10
for motor control, motor control centers, and high voltage
1 12
starters. Systems can be wye or delta, grounded or resistance
grounded. When the ground fault current exceeds a prese- 0.46" 2.25" 0.35"
lected condition (current only, or current and time settings) #6-32X.35LG.
TERMINAL SCREWS
the relay trips. The relay contacts can be connected in the
control circuit of a motor starter, to the shunt trip of a circuit
breaker or similar disconnecting or alarm devices. The system 3 8
has an inverse time characteristic to prevent nuisance trip- 1
10
ping. The relay tripping current value is field adjustable over To current Sensor X1 and X2 all contacts
shown with the relay in the tripped position 12
the trip current range of the sensor. The adjustable trip time
delay relay, when specified, is field settable up to 36 cycles.
Model TripÀ (4) 0.31X0.21 Typical Circuit

3.53"
Number Current OPEN SLOTS
2.75"
GFM 156 3.8 to 18 L1 L2 L3
STAB M OL
H
8CT.
1.77" 1.09" 2.15" (3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6) (H1)
L3 K3 K6 T3
CB (4)
(2) (3) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
3.00" L2
LSW
K2 K5 T2
0.44" (1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR
L1 K1 K4 (FX1) (FX2)T1
(1) (3) G2
2FU
GFR
3.65" (2) (4) G1
1.56" DIA (H1) (H2) (1) (3)
(2) 1FU(1) T
1.83 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
Gnd
GFR
1.77" (10) (9)
SW PB
Hand Auto M OL
(13) OFF (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
TripÀ
1A 3 48 49
Model
Number Current 4.6" R
(15) (16) (12)M(11) (1) (2)
2
GFM 3P208 5 to 20 x=Closed(MC) 5 PB
3.5"
LABEL GFX2 GFX1
2.0" 3.75"
H1
10.75"
¬ Trip current tolerance is ± 15 percent.
H9
Components
300-Line Motor Starters Staggered Saddle

Clamp Terminals
The 300-Line starter is a full-voltage, magnetic motor starter with Permanent
with encapsulated coil and three-leg block overload relay Terminal
Identification
with visual trip indicator, manual reset and manual weld
check. It incorporates all the features and benefits most Improved
asked for by users and has received standard specification Auxiliary
approval by many major manufacturers. In addition to the Contacts Quick
Rated for Contact
basic non-reversing form, the 300-Line is available in reversing,
Heavy Inspection
two-speed and combination forms in NEMA Sizes 00-5. and Coil
Pilot-Duty
Change
The 300-Line’s toolless contactor disassembly allows quick
access for inspection and maintenance. Simply release two Manual Weld
coil retainers and pull the spring clip from the “I” magnet to Check
gain access to the magnet, coil and contacts. No need to GE
remove any wiring. Exclusive
Overload Trip Dual
Adjustment Bimetal
±10% Overload
Protection
Visual Trip
Indication Optional N.O. Isolated
High Fidelity Contacts
Optional terminals can be provided to permit the easy

connection of power factor correction capacitors for energy
conservation.
H
The molded coil is impervious to moisture, dirt and oil. It is
highly resistant to mechanical damage and high-humidity
failure. Retaining clips engage detents encapsulated in the
coil to hold it securely in place.
H10
Components
300-Line Motor Starters
Overriding is eliminated because overload reset occurs only when

the reset arm is released on the standard manual-reset form.
(Cover removed)
Where it’s essential to monitor performance or diagnose faults, a A bright yellow visual trip indicator tells operators at a glance if the
300-Line starter may be ordered with an additional isolated, high- overload has tripped. An optional automatic-reset overload relay is
fidelity, normally-open contact on the overload relay. This contact available for special applications upon request.
may be used for direct input to a programmable controller or direct
interface with a computer.
Overload relay heaters are completely interchangeable with

All line and load terminals on NEMA Size 00, 0 and 1 starters have heaters for 200- and 100-Line starters, eliminating the need to
saddle clamps to accommodate all types of terminations– ring, stock different heaters.
spade and stripped-wire. Terminal numbering is permanently
stamped, and terminals are staggered to help prevent shorting. Relay trip points are factory calibrated at
NEMA Size 2, 3 and 4 starters are also available with provision for given currents for high accuracy. For added
ring terminations with staggered terminals. Size 5 starters are flexibility, the trip current of the relay is
available with provision for ring terminations. In-line terminals for adjustable _+10 percent to allow tuning the
spade and stripped-wire connections are standard. protection to any given motor and to
eliminate nuisance tripping. A single
calibration adjusts all three legs. The
overload relay is available in standard or
ambient-compensated forms.
Each auxiliary contact is rated 10 amperes

AC, continuous current (NEMA A600), and is
suitable for either right or left side mounting.
H
All necessary parts are supplied in the
modification kit for easy installation. An
On NEMA Size 1 starters and larger, contact tips are weld-resistant insulating shield is also provided for use
with cool operation and extended life. The contacts have a wedge- between each auxiliary contact unit and
shaped configuration for positive make with minimum bounce. They the starter.
can be easily changed from normally open to normally closed with-
out additional parts on Sizes 0 and 1. Auxiliary contact kits offered include one
with a basic contact block and one with an
Magnet provides long life and is specially treated to resist rust. adder block. The basic block is supplied with
either a single circuit (one normally open
contact or one normally closed contact) or
a double circuit (one normally open and one
normally closed contact). The adder block
must be used in conjunction with a basic
block. It may be ordered with either one
normally open or one normally closed contact.
The overload relay can be manually tripped deliberately as a con-

venient way to check against contact welding. Depressing the
manual weld check arm trips the relay. Then a welded contact can
be detected with a simple continuity check.
H11
Components
300-Line Motor Starters

CR324 Thermal CR324X Electronic LM10
Overload Relay Overload Relay Motor Protection Relay
Description Standard factory assembled 8000-Line The CR324C advanced electronic overload The compact design of the modular LM10 is
MCCs use GE NEMA 300-Line Starters, which relay replaces the traditional CR324 bimetal ideally suited for low voltage MCC. It comes
utilize CR324 Thermal bimetal overload overload relays in motor control centers. standard with the DeviceNet protocol that
relays and fused or circuit breaker protective The electronic overload relay eliminates the allows the user to control and monitor the
devices. Bimetal overload relays use inter- need for heater elements, providing a relay over a network, and an interface port
changeable match overload relays to motor broader amperage adjustment range. Other communicates to the optional programma-
amps. A ±10 trip adjustment dial is used to phase loss protection, selectable class range, ble display unit (PDU). This display unit allows
fine tune the motor overload relays. Overload and higher accuracy and repeatability. for local programming and monitoring.
relay features include trip test, manual Provisions for increased diagnostic capabilities Matched sets of three phase current
reset on upstroke, weld check visible trip permit automation control via auxiliary transformers (CT) and one ground CT are
indicator and an optional normally - open contacts and remote reset open collector. also available as part of the LM10 package.
signal contact. Mounting dimensions are identical to the
CR324 Thermal Overload Relays and permit
fast, simple upgrading in the field.
NEMA Size 1–6 1–6 1–6

Type Thermal bimetal Electronic Electronic
Protection Class 20 10, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable)
Ambient Compensation Optional Ambient insensitive Ambient insensitive
Phase loss protection No Standard (fixed) Selectable (On–Off)
Selectable (On–Off)
Phase unbalance No No
Adjustable 2-25%
Ground Fault No No Yes (5A, Zero sequence), w/GFCT
Self Powered Yes Yes No (120V source required)
Accuracy ±5% ±2% ±2%
Repeatability ±3% ±2% ±1%

Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes
FLA Adj. Range 1.25:1 2:1 1.2 – 3200A
Reset Mode Manual (auto optional) Manual Manual/Remote
Yes, with commnet
Trip Test Yes Yes
(digital self-diagnostics)
Yes (last 10
Trip Indication Yes Yes
fault diagnostics)
FVNR, FVR Yes Yes Yes
2 Speed, 1 & 2 Winding Yes Yes Yes
Operating Temp. Range 0° to 55°C –20° to 70°C 0° to 65°C
Communications No No Device Net
Addressable No No Yes
H Power Leader
No No No
Compatible
Heater Required Yes No No
PFC Terminals Yes (optional through Yes (optional through
No
NEMA Size 2) NEMA Size 2)
PLC Compatible Contacts No Yes Yes
Aux. Contacts NC (NO optional) NO, NC NA
Reference Publication — DEP-015 GEK106642
H12
Components
Industrial Relays Front-Mount Auxiliary Contact Blocks
C-2000™ Control Relays
1NO or 1NC
Front-mount auxiliary contact blocks clip
into front face of control relay.
The C-2000 Control Relay is a compact, industrial style relay Pneumatic Timers
designed for heavy-duty applications where reliability and
versatility are required.
Basic forms: 4 NO; 3NO-1NC; 2NO-2NC; 4 NC

Max front mounted aux. contacts: 4 (NO or NC)
Contact Rating: A600; P600
Aux. Contact Rating: A600; Q600; P300 Pneumatic timers are adjustable time-delayed auxiliary
Timer Contact Rating: A600; P600 contacts. They come equipped with two time-delayed con-
tacts: 1NO or 1 NC, electrically separated. Setting is scaled
over a 350° rotation by means of a knurled knob with timing
Coil Data guide marks. To mount a pneumatic timer, simply clip it on
AC DC front face of control relay.
Voltage Voltage
Burden Type Range Contacts
Inrush 45 VA 5.5 W Time .1-30 sec 1NO-1NC
Holding 6 VA 5.5 W Delay On 1-60 sec. 1NO-1NC
Pickup Voltage (% of Coil Volts) 85-110 80-110 Time .1-30 sec. 1NO-1NC
Drop-Out Voltage (% of Coil Volts) 40-55 20-40 Delay Off 1-60 sec 1NO-1NC
Switching Delay (ms)
Switching Delay on
Coil Voltage at +10% to -20% 6-25 35-65 Surge Suppressor
Coil Voltage at Rated Value 8-20 40-45
Switching Delay off
Coil Voltage at +10% to -20% 6-13 30-60
Coil Voltage at Rated Value 6-13 30-60
Maximum Operations per Hour
No Load 9000 3600
Rated load 1200 1200
Coil Rating
For suppression of disturbances on electronic circuits due to H
the coil transient voltage occurring on opening of the con-
AC Coil Rating DC Coil Rating
24V/60 Hz 24V/50 Hz 24VDC tactor. Limits high voltage transients that may be produced
48V/60 Hz 42V/50 Hz 48VDC when coil is de-energized. Mounts directly on top of the coil.
120V/60 Hz 110V/50 Hz 125VDC
208V/60 Hz 190V/50 Hz 250VDC
240V/60 Hz 220V/50 Hz
Control Relay - Front View AC Control Relay - Side View
240V/60 Hz 220V/50 Hz 1.77 5.55
141
277V/60 Hz 240V/50 Hz 45
4.49
– 380V/50 Hz 1114
3.35
– 415V/50 Hz
85
480V/60 Hz 440V/50 Hz
600V/60 Hz 550V/50 Hz E
Contact Ratings
3.19
A600 P600 Q600 P300 81 C B
Continuous Thermal Current 10A 5A 2.5A 5A

Max. VA/Amps Making 7200VA/60A 138VA 69VA 138VA
Max. VA/Amps Breaking 720VA/6A 138VA 69VA 138VA
.18
Max. Operating Voltage 600VAC 600VDC 600VDC 300VDC
4.5
.195 1.38
TYP.
5 35
H13
Components
CR120B Machine Tool and Industrial Relays

The CR120B and CR120BL, Series A, multi-circuit industrial
relays are designed to meet most panel application require-
ments. They are available as standard or latched relays.
All forms of the relay mount on the same base and in the
same small panel-mounting area. Relays may be arranged
in any configuration or modified on a panel without altering
the mounting area.
Features
CR120B standard AC relay
• Bifurcated contacts assure positive make–unique bifurcated
contacts assure positive make at all voltages and give
excellent fidelity even in harsh environments. Contact Ratings
• Transparent Lexan contact cartridges–allow inspection of Max.Con-
Max. AC Max. AC Max. DC Max. DC
contacts. Type Max. Voltampere Rating Rating Voltampere
tinuous
of AC Rating Amps Amps Rating
• Convertible contacts–allow conversion from normally open Rating
Contacts Voltage 300V
to normally closed, or vice versa. Just change the terminal Amps Make Break Make Break 125V 250V
or less
screws and invert the contact module. Inst.À 600 10 7200 720 60 6 1.1 0.55 138
• Quick-change coil–can be changed without removing any Delay 600 5 3600 360 30 3 0.5 – –
screws. ¬ Use for CR120B and CR122BT contact rating.
Latch Attachment
The latch attachment mounts on any standard CR120B Coil Data
60 Hz 24V 115V 120V 200V 208V 230V 460V 575V 600V
relay in the same manner as a deck adder.
50 Hz 24V 110V 220V 380V 440V 550V
DC 12V 24V 48V 54V 125V
Inrush VA Sealed VA Sealed Watts
AC Relay coil 120 15 7
AC Unlatch coil 31 15 9.2
DC Relay coil 235 2.8 2.8
H14
Components
CR104P Pilot Devices

Description
Newly-designed nameplates with chrome-plated octagonal
rings project an attractive, quality appearance. Positive feel
selector switches give a quality touch in all illuminated, solid
color, spring return, and maintained units.
Standard and illuminated push buttons and selector switches

are available. Both push button and selector switches are
available with key or for conventional operation. The CR104P
push-button line also includes press-to-test and standard
indicating lights, mushroom-head, joy stick, push-pull and
push-push operators.
Application Contact Ratings

Especially adapted to machine-tool service or any application AC Ratings, NEMA A600 Heavy Pilot Duty
where oil or coolant is present. The convenient one-hole Continuous AC Voltamperes
mounting makes this line suitable for general purpose use in Max. Ac Current @ 60/50 HzÁ
Amps Make Break
equipment of all kinds where panel mounting is possible. 600 10 7200 720
This line is ideal for applications where oil tightness, water-
tightness and long life are essential. DC Ratings, NEMA P600
Max. Make or Break Amps
All units are suitable for use in Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 12 and 13 125V 250V 600V
environments when mounted in enclosures rated for those 1.1 0.55 0.2
same applications.À
À CR104PTP units are suitable for Type 1,12, and 13 applications only.
Á Maximum make and break currents are 60 and 6 amperes respectively for voltages
Features of 120 and below.
• Ease of assembly–One screw contact block mounting.
Octagonal ring provides ease in front panel mounting and
enclosure applications.
C-2000 Pilot Device
• Greater torque–Due to the eight-sided ring design, greater
torque can be developed during assembly and installation
to provide oil tightness.
• Stocking inventories reduced–Forms may be furnished as
complete units or as components, allowing building block H
construction from a minimum of stock.
• Color Coded–Colored knobs and caps are available in kit
forms for easy field conversion.
CR104P pilot lights

Pilot lights match appearance of switches above. Standard
applications use full voltage or transformer type lights.
Optional nameplates match those used with switches, neon
lights are available (with limited lens colors).
Type STD Push-To-Test Bulb Color
Full Voltage Red
(120 VAC) X X #120PSB Green
Transformer Amber
(6 VAC X X #755 Blue
White Standard for 1/2X Starter. See GEP-1260, Section 7.
Secondary)
Clear
Red
Neon X N/A Neon White
Amber
Clear
Red
LED LED Green
(Transformer X X (6 Volt) Blue
Type only) Amber
H15
Components
Solid-State Motor Winding Heater Applications

50 Hertz Applications: The 230/460 volt device can be used
Description at 220/440 volts, 50 Hertz. The 575 volt device can be used
The motor winding heater is designed for use with 3-phase at 550 volts, 50 Hertz.
ac motors to guard against damage caused by condensation
build-up on motor windings, which can occur in high-humidity Typical Wiring Diagram
environments during motor idle periods. With the heater
connected as indicated in the connection diagram, and the
motor not running, an SCR controlled current flows in the
motor windings, producing enough heat to maintain the
temperature inside the motor above the ambient temperature.
The motor winding heater is automatically energized after
the starter contacts (M) open, and de-energized when the
starter contacts close. Fuses are included for SCR overcurrent
protection and protection for wiring.
If desired, a pilot light can be connected as shown (“Fuse

Condition Indicator”) to visually monitor the condition of the
fuses. With the starter contacts open, the light will be On if
current paths through FU1 and FU2 are complete. The pilot
light should have a line voltage rating.
Note: Since voltage is present at motor terminals at all times, cautionary information
Specifications sent with the device must be observed.
Output Voltage Regulation: Voltage applied to motor winding
will vary _+2% maximum for line voltage variations of +10%,
-15%.
Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to +50°C.
Fusing: FU1–Fast-acting semiconductor fuse for SCR over-

current protection. FU2–Class RK-5 rejection type fuse with
time delay for wiring protection.
Additional SCR Protection: Metal oxide varistor protects

against voltage surges. RC snubber circuit limits rate of
H change of circuit voltage.
Motor Voltage
+10%, –15% Motor Horsepower
3-Phase 60 Hz Range
230/460V 15-400 Hp
575V 25-400 Hp
Heater is UL Listed in MCC Construction
H16
Components
Power Leader EPM Inputs

General The PLEPM requires CT inputs with a 5A secondary current.
The Power Leader EPM is a microprocessor based device The meter can accept direct input voltages up to 600V and
that displays a full range of over 50 metered values with is self-powered from the voltage inputs. Three CTs are
revenue class accuracy of 0.5%. The PLEPM is available with required for four wire (Y) systems and two CTs are required
a communication option that is factory- or field-installable so ∆ ) system.
for three wire (∆
that all data can be transmitted to a remote host computer.
Features
The PLEPM comes in a panel mount version standard or an
optional S1 case. Metered values cover a full range of
parameters.
Revenue Class accuracy of 0.5%.
Optional communications provides connectivity to POWER

LEADER network (commnet) and Modbus RTU.
Pulse initiation option with programmable outputs.
(kwh, kvarh, kvah, kqh)

Amps 3 phase and neutral (0.25% accuracy)
Volts L-L & L-N (0.25% accuracy)
Watts (per phase, 3 phase total, peak watts, watt demand, &
watts at maximum KVA)
5.69"
Energy (kwh, kvah, kvarh lag and lead, and KQH)
Volt-Amps (per phase, 3 phase total, peak KVA, & KVA demand) .22" 2.84" 2.84"
KVARs (per phase, 3 phase total, peak KVAR, peak KVAR lead,
KVAR demand, KVAR demand lead) .25" DRILL
Power Factor (per phase, 3 phase total, average, power factor at (4) HOLES
previous interval, power factor at maximum KVA) 4.41"
Frequency (60 Hz only)
2.19"
8.81"
2.19"
4.41"
H
Panel drilling for Semi-Flush Mounting (front view)
H17
Components
Power Leader PQM

Description
The PQM is an ideal choice when continuous monitoring of a
three phase system is required. It provides metering for current,
voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, cost of power,
power factor and frequency. Programmable setpoints and 4
assignable output relays allow control functions to be added
for specific applications. This includes basic alarm on
GEPQMIIT20CA is standard.
over/under current or voltage, unbalance, demand based See GE Multilin Products Catalog and www.ge.com/edc/pmsys
load shedding and capacitor power factor correction control.
More complex control is possible using the 4 switch inputs
which also can be used for status such as breaker Applications
open/closed,flow information etc. • Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators,
capacitor banks and motors
The PQM may be used as a data gathering device for a plant • Medium and low voltage systems
automation system that integrates process, instrument and • Commercial, industrial, utility
electrical requirements. All monitored values are available • Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc.
via two digital RS485 communication ports running the • Power quality analysis
Modbus protocol. If analog values are required for direct
interface to a PLC, any of the monitored values can be output Metering/Control
to one of 4 isolated analog outputs. A process variable can • AVW var VA varh Wh PF Hz unbalance
be measured using an analog input. A front panel RS232 • AW can VA demand
communication port can be connected to a PC for simulta- • Load shedding
neous access of information by other plant personnel. • Power factor control
• Pulse input totalizing
The quality of the power system is important with increasing • Pulse output based on kWh, kvarh or kVah
use of electronic loads such as computers, ballasts or variable
frequency drives. With the PQM’s power analysis, any phase Monitoring
current or voltage can be displayed and the harmonic content • Harmonic analysis through 63rd with THD and TIF
calculated. By knowing the harmonic distribution, action • Event recorder
can be taken to prevent overheated transformers, motors, • Waveform capture
capacitors, neutral wires and nuisance breaker trips. • Data logger
Redistribution of system loading can also be determined. • Triggered trace memory
Waveform and chart recorder printouts available from the
H PQM assist in problem diagnosis. Communication
• Ports: RS232 front, dual RS485 rear
• Modbus RTU protocol
• Mini RTU: digital 4 in / 4 out
• Analog 1 in / 4 out
• Local/remote display of all values
H18
Components
Power Leader Modbus Concentrator

Product Overview
GE’s recent introduction of the POWER LEADER Modbus
Concentrator brings performance and compatibility to users
of GE’s Power Leader communication network (commnet)
family of power management devices. Used in conjunction
with GE's Power Management Control System (PMCS) software,
the Modbus Concentrator allows you to integrate your existing
base of commnet devices into the faster Modbus Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU) based PMCS network, improving overall Standard Features
system performance while retaining the full functionality of • One-piece steel case construction
each commnet device. – Simple installation (no cut-outs)
• Ease of operation
Modbus RTU is an industry-standard communications protocol – Four-character alphanumeric high-contrast LED display
that operates on an RS485 network. The Modbus RTU protocol – Simple four-button keypad
is widely supported for supervisory control and data acqui- – All setup done via faceplate keypad and display;
sition (SCADA) systems, building management systems (BMS) no confusing DIP switches
and distributed control systems, (DCS). Industry leaders such – Quick automatic setup capability
as Multilin, Power Measurements Limited and GE Fanuc – Remote setup capability allows automated configuration
produce Modbus RTU-compatible devices and programmable from host PC
logic controllers. • Communications
– Communicates on POWER LEADER commnet communi-
Modbus open architecture provides a high level of flexibility cations protocol
while reducing the risks associated with proprietary – Communicates on Modbus RTU communications protocol
communications protocols. Key benefits of the modbus RTU – Each Modbus Concentrator supports up to 32 commnet
protocol include: devices (maximum 215 Commnet devices per RS485
network possible with multiple Concentrators)
• Devices and systems can be upgraded easily.
• A wide range of compatible devices from a variety of
manufacturers is supported.
• Communications are extremely flexible, both upstream (to
DCS, SCADA and BMS systems) and downstream (to
meters and trip units).
H19
Components
Three-Phase Voltage Monitors

Model SPVRB
General
UL Listed file No. E103039
The model SPVRB Voltage Sensing Relay is designed to protect
against single phase, phase loss, phase unbalance, and phase
reversal in a power system. The output contacts change
their normal state only when a single phase, phase loss,
phase unbalance, or phase reversal occurs for longer than
the preset trip delay. A total power loss or de-energization of
the SPVRB relay will not change the output contacts position.
Recommended for manually reset switches and breaker
applications. The SPVRB is suitable for loss of phase with
motor loads.
À Bi-Colored LED Indicator
•Power system condition Normal (Green), Trip (Red)
Features
Á Electromechanical Diagnostic Indicator
• Phase unbalance: 8% • Pops out upon fault
• Adjustable Trip Delay: 1 to 10 seconds after failure occurs, Â Adjustable System Delay
• Phase loss
prevents nuisance operations
• Phase unbalance
• Output Relay: normally de-energized, form C contacts for • Single phase
easy circuit configuration • Phase reversal
• Electro-mechanical indicator: retains memory of fault until
manually reset
(2) 0.24 Dia. Holes
• Door or panel mounting Clearance holes for
• Status Indicator: bi-colored LED #12 screws
Green: Output relay de-energized (normal condition)
Red: Output relay energized (fault condition)
Dark: Output relay de-energized (input power off)
• Single Phase, Phase Reversal, Phase Unbalance and
Phase Loss Protection: operates the output relay after a
preselected time
• Automatic or Manual
Automatic Reset to Normal: Upon removal of fault conditions
Manual Reset: Operates from a remote or local pushbutton
H in cover
SPVRB — XXX Panel Mounting Layout
Input Voltage:
120/208/240/480 or Output Contact Ratings
575 Vac, (60 Hz)
Voltage Continuous Make Break
380 or 415 Vac, (50 Hz) 120 Vac 10 A 3160 VA 316 VA
240 Vac 10 A 4800 VA 480 VA
380 Vac 3A 4800 VA 480 VA
Available Models 600 Vac 3A 4800 VA 480 VA
Model No. Nominal Vac Vac Range Freq. 10 A, 28 Vdc/120 Vac/240 Vac, 80% pf
SPVRB–120 120 96–138 60 3 A, 480 Vac/600 Vac, 80% pf
SPVRB–240 240 192–276 60
SPVRB–480 480 384–552 60
SPVRB–575 575 460–661 60
SPVRB–380 380 304–437 50
SPVRB–415 415 332–477 50
H20
Components
Three-Phase Voltage Monitors • Transient protected to meet IEEE and IEC standards and
operate under tough conditions
Model LPVRB
• Will detect single phase condition regardless of
General regenerated voltages
The Model LPVRB is designed to protect 3-phase loads from
damaging power conditions. Its wide operating range com- Protects 3-Phase motors from: 1 2 3
bined with UL and CE compliance enables quick access to • Loss of any phase
domestic and global markets. • Low voltage 200
400
208
416
220
440
230
460
20
100
250
• High voltage 190

380
240
480
VOLTAGE ADJ. (VAC)
1 500
RESTART (SEC)
A unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase sensing • Voltage unbalance CLEARWATER, FL USA
MODEL LPVRB
circuit constantly monitors the three phase voltages to detect • Phase reversal ® PHASE VOLTAGE RELAY
www.instrumenttransformers.com
2 8 1 30
harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is • Rapid cycling 3

4 6
7
5 15
UNBALANCE TRIP (%) TRIP DELAY (SEC)
detected, the LPVRB’s output relay is deactivated after a LED STATUS
specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power

line conditions return to an acceptable level for a a specified
amount of time (Restart Delay) or after a manual reset. The trip 4 5 6
and restart delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly
fluctuating power line conditions.
Model APVR
The Model LPVRB automatically senses whether it is connected
to a 190 to 240V 60Hz system, a 440 to 480V 60Hz system, General
U®L 103039
or a 380 to 416V 50Hz system. An adjustment is provided to
set the nominal line voltage from 190-240 or 380-420Vac. The model APVR phase sensing relay performs the same
Other adjustments include a 1-30 second trip delay, a 1-500 functions as the model LPVR, except that the relay requires
second restart delay, and a 2-8% voltage unbalance trip no adjustments. It will fit in the push-button bracket, and
point adjustment. thus does not increase the required unit spacing.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the Model LPVRB; Run Light, Available with the following 3 Phase Voltages
Under Voltage, Over Voltage, Phasing/Fault Reverse Phase P/N Nominal Voltage Range Frequency
APVR 120 120 95-135 60Hz
and Manual Reset. APVR 240 240 190-270 60Hz
APVR 480 480 380-530 60Hz
The LPVRB ships with a jumper installed for automatic restart. A APVR 575 575 455-600 60Hz
APVR 380 380 300-425 50Hz
connector with two 12" wires is included for manual reset switch.
Features Specifications
• Compact design • Failsafe–will not operate if a fault is present.
• Manual or Automatic reset.
H
• UL and cUL listed
• CE compliant • Fixed undervoltage trip point: approx. 90% pickup, 80%
• Finger safe terminals dropout.
• 5 year warranty • Operates at 6% phase unbalance
• Made in USA • Operates with 6% phase voltage loss.
• Standard surface or DIN rail mount • 3 second drop-out delay to avoid nuisance tripping
• Standard 1-500 second variable restart delay • Operational green LED indicator.
• Standard 2-8% variable voltage unbalance • Isolated Form “C” output contacts.
• Standard 1-30 second variable trip delay • Output contact rating:
• One 10 amp general purpose form C relay 250Vac, 5 amps (general use)
• Optional manual reset 30Vdc, 5 amps (resistive)
• Four adjustment pots provide versatility for all kinds of
applications
• Universal range from 190-480Vac 50/60Hz provides
the versatility needed to handle global applications
• Diagnostic LEDs indicate trip status and provide simple
troubleshooting
• Microcontroller based circuitry provides better accuracy Illuminated
and higher reliability than analog designs green indicator
H21
Components
Three-Phase Voltage Monitors

Model LPVRB .650"
(1.65)
Specifications
3-Phase Line Voltage 190-480Vac 200
208
416
220
440
230
100
20 250
400 460
(475-600Vac optional) 190
380
240
480 1 500
(95 -120Vac optional) VOLTAGE ADJ. (VAC) RESTART (SEC)
Frequency 50* or 60Hz

CLEARWATER, FL USA
MODEL LPVRB
3.000" ® PHASE VOLTAGE RELAY
www.instrumenttransformers.com 3.500"
Low Voltage (% of set point) (8.89)
(7.62) 2
3
8
7
1 30
• Trip 90% ±1% 4

5
6
15
UNBALANCE TRIP (%) TRIP DELAY (SEC)
• Reset 93% ±1%
LED STATUS
High Voltage (% of set point)

• Trip 110% ±1%
• Reset 107% ±1%
Voltage Unbalance (NEMA)
• Trip 2-8% adjustable .650"
• Reset Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) (1.65)
Trip setting minus .5% (2-4%) 2.084"
(5.29)
Trip Delay Time
FRONT VIEW
• Low, High and Unbalanced Voltage 1-30 seconds adjustable
• Single Phasing Faults 1 second fixed
Restart Delay Time (when manual reset pins are shorted)
• After a Fault 1-500 seconds adjustable
• After a Complete Power Loss 1-500 seconds adjustable
Output Contact Rating
• 1-Form C 10A general purpose @ 240Vac
pilot duty 480VA @ 240Vac, B300
Power Consumption 6 watts (max)
Weight 14 oz.
BOTTOM VIEW
Enclosure Polycarbonate
Terminal Torque 6 in-lbs.
Wire Type Stranded or solid 12-20AWG,

one per terminal
2.350"
Safety Marks (5.97)
• UL UL508
• CE IEC 60947-6-2
Standards Passed
• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air SIDE VIEW
• Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m
• Fast Transient Burst IEC 1000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and
H controls
Surge
• IEC IEC 1000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level
4,
4kV line-to-ground MANUAL
RESET
PHASE
• ANSI/IEEE C62.41 surge and ring wave compliance to a
level of 6kV line-to line VOLTAGE
• Hi-potential Test Meets UL 508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 minute) RELAY
Environmental Model LPVRB
• Temperature Range Ambient operating: -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Ambient storage: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F)
• Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe)
• Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3
Special options
• Manual reset External momentary push button required
* 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
H22
Components
High-Resistance Ground Where to Use

The function of high-resistance grounding equipment is:
Equipment Overview 1. To provide a ground for neutral of an ungrounded three-
High Resistance Grounding Equipment coordinates the use phase power system, utilizing the high-resistance method.
of resistors and control devices, creating a high-resistance Using this equipment allows the system to operate basically
ground for a power system. The grounding equipment has the as an ungrounded system. The equipment is designed to
following features: eliminate the danger of high-transient overvoltages during
• Over-voltage Reduction: Reduces the transient over volt- certain types of ground faults.
ages that can occur during arcing faults.
Note: The use of high-resistance grounding on 600 volt maximum systems precludes
• Fault Detection: Gives immediate warning when the first line-to-neutral loading.
ground fault occurs.
• Fault Tracking: Helps locate the fault by producing a 2. To provide an immediate warning when the first ground
tracer signal of current pulses easily distinguishable from fault occurs through an alarm system.
background noise. 3. To provide a method for quickly locating and removing
• Operation Protection: Enables the system to continue the fault before another fault develops on another phase,
operation with a single line-to ground fault present. thereby preventing circuit outages due to double line-to-
ground faults. This is done by using the pulsing ground
Operational Description – Low-Voltage Systems (600v Max) current feature and portable detector.
Typical circuit used in low-voltage is shown on page L22.
When a ground fault occurs, the resistor acts to limit the Approximate Dimensions and Weights
ground current to a pre-determined low value. Taps are pro- Equipment WxDxH With Pulsor Without Pulsor
vided on the resistor to adjust the fault current. The voltage Enclosure (in inches) in Pounds in Pounds
appearing across the resistor or the amperage through the Type Wye Delta Wye Delta
NEMA 1 20 x 20 x 90 600 700 575 675
resistor is sensed by the PulserPlus Pro™ Controller. A variable
time delay is entered via the operator’s panel. When the
time delay expires, the red GROUND FAULT indicator light
will illuminate. Auxiliary contacts are provided in case a
600 Volt Maximum Wye System
remote indication of the fault is needed or desired. The red
PULSING CONTACTOR
light will stay illuminated until the ground fault is removed NGI SW1
and the system is reset. Optionally, the PulserPlus Pro can be NEUTRAL
set for auto-reset. In addition, an audible alarm will sound

VOLTAGE INPUT
CURRENT LOOP INPUT
when the ground fault occurs. This alarm can be silenced A#

CONTROL MODULE
from the operator’s panel. CPT LINE
B#
FUSES INTERLOCKING
H
DISCONNECT
Features
ALARM CONTACTS
• Undervoltage and undercurrent detection and alarm OPERATOR
INTERFACE
• Adjustable pulser from 10 to 50 per minute for custom
setup
• Adjustable trip delay to avoid nuisance downtime
• Alarm contacts for remote monitoring of ground fault, 600 Volt Maximum Delta System
high harmonics and loss of ground PULSING CONTACTOR
NGR
• High harmonic filtering and detection
• Third harmonics generator winding protection A# B# C#
VOLTAGE INPUT
CURRENT LOOP INPUT

• Remote operation and monitoring via RS232, Modbus or
Ethernet communication CONTROL MODULE
CPT LINE
FUSES
Line and Control Connections

The line connections are made to the main bus. The control ALARM CONTACTS
OPERATOR
power and auxiliary device connections are made to the INTERFACE
terminal blocks rated 30 amperes, 600 volts. Refer to the specific

diagrams furnished with the equipment for location detail.
Setup information is through the operator’s panel. PulserPlus Pro is a trademark of Post Glover.
H23
Components
Motor Protection Relay LM10 The PDU can display the following faults: Over current,
Adjustable ground fault, Jam, Stall, Current unbalance,
General Communication failure, Load loss, Power loss and User trip.
The General Electric LM10 Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is a The MS2000 Relay has inputs for two matched sets of three
modular device for Low & Medium Voltage Motor Control phase current transformers (CT) and one ground CT.
Centers designed to protect motors from various fault
conditions. The LM10 comes with DeviceNet™ protocol. The
relay’s 5-pin connector allows the user to control and monitor
the relay over the network. Additionally, the relay has an
interface port to communicate to the LM10 Programming &
Display Unit (PDU). The LM10 provides the flexibility to select the type and size
of starter in the field. No special overloads, just different CT’s.
Environmental Information
•0 to 60 degree C
•-30 to 80 degree C storage
•Run in 95% non-condensing humidity
Optional: Programmable Display Unit (PDU)

•NEMA 12
•Self powered form MPR
•RJ phone jack to MPR or PC
•Door mounted or hand held
•High impact screen
The PDU is a self-contained device consisting of a poly-
carbonate plastic housing, a membrane switch keypad, a Programmable Fault Outputs
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and control electronics for •Zero Sequence Ground Fault
communication with the Relay. •Load Loss
•Current Unbalance
The LM10 (PDU) is used to configure the relay. An optional
method of configuring the relay is a phone jack interface to Accuracy
a laptop PC. The LM10 is ideally suited for process markets •Power Factor + 5%
and shortened construction & manufacturing time tables. •Current + 3%
•Timers 5% + 1 second
In addition the Programmable Display Unit (PDU) can be
Error Messages
H used to check status, phase current, voltage and Power.
•Over Current LED & Network
•Time Delays •Current Unbalance LED & Network
•Auto Restart •Ground Fault LED & Network
•Two Speed & RV •Load loss
•Power - kW, PF •Command Trip
•MAC ID
•Start/Stop Test CT-Sensor Pack
•Fault Reset •NEMA size 1, 1/2 Amp to 27 FLA
•Phase current •NEMA size 2 & 3, 5 Amps to 90 FLA’s
•Voltage
•Current Unbalance CT’s with 5A secondary, matched for MPR
•ETM (Elapsed Time Meter) •30-540 FLA
The LM10 is compatible with most PLC’s and is SCADA and Voltage Rating
DCS adaptable. Control wire in buckets is #18 MTW. •Control power 100V to 135V, 60 Hz
•System set up range 200V to 7.2KV
The LM10 system can replace:
•PLC I/O •Power Meter Relay Outputs
•Load Sensing Relays •Ground Fault Relays •NEMA C150 rated
•Ammeter •Elapsed Time Meter •1/3HP @120V AC
•Timing Relays
H24
Components
Motor Protection Relay LM10 code and the Analog interface circuit to support various CTs
for the 3 phase measurements. NEMA Class 10, 15, 20 & 30
are rotary Switch selectable. Additional Jam and Stall pro-
tection can be programmed. Using a Ground CT provides
Zero-sequence ground fault protection as an option.
Voltage input from the Control Power Transformer (CPT) will be

conditioned and measured by the AD Converter to determine
Display supply voltage.
Liquid crystal display -5x8 font pixelized character type in a
16 character X 4 line format. English and Spanish messages Trip Time Curve
Class 10
Status
The Status sub-menu can display Current (FLA) Status, Run
1, Run 2, Faults, MAC ID, Baud rate & OL Class
Reset
The rely can be reset from the PDU, Push Button or the LAN.
Mounting flexibility
Relay can be attached to PDU with out hardware to facilitate
door mounting. Cold Start
0.45 FLA
0.63 FLA
0.77 FLA
0.89 FLA
1.00 FLA
LEDS
Green LED power indicator and a flashing Red LED fault indi-
Relay overload curves
cator, over/under current, current unbalance, ground fault,
under/over voltage, and trip command.
Features
The LM10 has DeviceNet communication utilizing a micro-style
Configuration
5-pin connector that allow the use of pre-built cables for
The parameters can be programmed
attachment to the unit. Baud Rate is Dip switch selectable.
by the Config. button. The Config sub-
menu is similar to Status but here the
The configuration port is standard RJ connector and provides
user may change parameters: Current,
interface to the PDU. Both communication and power will be
Voltage, Fault Settings & Time Delays.
provided to the PDU through this connection.
History
The 256 Bytes EE Prom memory stores the operating parameters
Display last 10 trip records. The conditions at the time of
for the device, the DeviceNet required unique serial number
that fault are displayed and can be scrolled through using
the Up/Down arrows. for the unit and also stores trip status for the last ten events. H
Inputs qty 6
Architecture
Two for Run 1 & 2, Stop, Trip, Operation Mode and Reset.
The LM10 uses a 6-channel simultaneous sample A/D converter
that takes a “snapshot” image of the three phases of current,
Relay Outputs
one phase of voltage, and ground. When the relay trips one
The Overload Relay contains 4 onboard NO relays with C150
or more of the onboard control relays, indicators will be illu-
pilot duty ratings that control the coils for the motor contactors
minated to show the status of the device. Additionally, the
and programmable fault outputs. There are two control
trip event will be stored in non-volatile memory. The relay
relays enabled from the control logic Ground Fault and a
also has an auxiliary communications port for connection to
programmable trip relay.
the PDU. This port not only allows the PDU to obtain and
display any of the real-world data that is contained in the
Terminals
relay it can also be used to configure the relay.
Clearly marked for inputs and outputs.
Analog Inputs
The LM10 Relay has inputs for two sets of three phase
Current Transformers (CT) and one ground CT. One set will
allow for 1.2A to 135A CTs to be connected; the other will
allow for 135A to 1000A CTs.
Additionally, provisions were made both in the CPU application PDU mounted in Evolution Series E9000 MCC
H25
Components
MS2000CNT Input-Output Module
General
A compact I/O module to access Input Data and Control
relays over a DeviceNet communications network.
•4 inputs/2 outputs
•Inputs rated 120V AC or 24V DC, Dip switch selectable
•Relay outputs rated NEMA C150, 1-NO
•30mm DIN Rail mounting
•DeviceNet communication (ODVA certified) Polling & COS
•Dip switch selectable communication failure state, On or Off
•Dip switch baud rate (default 125Kbaud)
•Dip switch selectable communication failure state, On or Off
•Change of state messaging
•Individual LED’s for I/O & communications
Application
Applications include monitoring status of:
•Switches
•Breakers
•Motor starters
•Contactors
Two relay outputs are suitable for On Off control of:

•Motor Starters
•Contactors
•Breaker trip
H •Motor Operated Breakers
The small footprint makes it ideally suited for Motor Control

Center buckets without a size penalty. 1.5"H X 4.8"W X 4.4"D
Catalog number: MS2000CNT MS200CNT
VFD MS200MPR
SSS
DeviceNet Wiring Example

Thick Mini Trunk with Thin Micro Drop Cables and Connectors
with Vertical Wire-way Barriers
H26
Components
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors Operating Frequency

•50/60 HZ
Integrated Tranquell™ HE & ME Connection
This TVSS model connects to the panelboard or switchboard bus •6 to 2/0 conductors, parallel connected
bars without adding width or depth to the panel enclosure, and only
Operating Temperature
occupying 7X of vertical bus space. These units have been tested
•-40 C to +65 C
to surge current ratings per NEMA LS-1, up to 200kA per mode,
including the fuses in the surge path. Standard features include a Operating Humidity
surge counter, audible alarm, indicating lights, dry contacts, and an •0% to 95% non-condensing
integral surge rated disconnect. Rating options range from 65kA Weight
per mode to 300kA per mode. •24 lbs.
2X Height 24" Plug-in
All mode protection is provided with surge components (MOVs)
connected on the phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to
ground paths as appropriate for the voltage configuration.
* PP suffix available for all kA ratings

Catalog # _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ * (integral to Spectra panel or switchboard)
SG suffix for all THE devices (100kA - 300kA) (integral to switchgear)
ME suffix available for all kA ratings (integral to MCC)
Nominal Suppressed Voltage Rating MCOV%

Voltage UL 1449 2nd Edition Max. Continuous
(Volts RMS) Configuration L-N / L-G / N-G Operating Voltage
THE 120S 120/240 1 Phase, 3 Wire + Ground 400 / 400 / 400 125%
TME 120Y 208Y/120 3 Phase, 4 Wire + Ground 400 / 400 / 400 125%
240D 240 Delta 3 Phase, 3 Wire + Ground - / 800 / - 115%
240H 120/240 Delta HL 3 Phase, 4 Wire + Ground 400/700 / 400 / 400/700 115%
240Y 415Y/240 3 Phase, 4 Wire + Ground 800 / 800 / 800 130%
065 65kA per mode (TME) H

080 80kA per mode (TME)
100 100kA per mode (THE)
Note: For TVSS field installation kit,
add the prefix "A" and replace
"PP" suffix with "K" suffix.
Example: THE277Y150PP
Factory Installed
ATHE277Y150K
Field Installation
H27
Application Data
Approximate Motor Full-Load

Current Ratings
Full-Load Current for EPAC Compliant Motors
Average Expected Values

For three-phase, 60 Hertz, GE Type KE (NEMA Design B) drip-
proof, normal starting torque, continuous 40°C ambient (1.15
service factor) horizontal induction motors.
Average Expected Values Average Expected Values

Motor Synchronous of Full-load Currents Motor Synchronous of Full-load Currents
HP Speed, RPM 200V 230V 460V 575V HP Speed, RPM 200V 230V 460V 575V
1800 1.6 1.4 0.70 0.56 3600 72.0 56.0 28.0 25.0
1/4À
1200 1.7 1.5 0.75 0.60 1800 71.3 60.0 30.0 24.8
25
3600 2.0 1.7 0.85 0.68 1200 73.8 63.2 31.6 25.7
1/2À 1800 1.7 1.5 0.75 0.60 900 82.6 71.8 35.9 28.7
1200 2.0 1.7 0.85 0.68 3600 85.6 67.8 33.9 29.8
3600 2.0 1.8 0.88 0.70 1800 81.7 71.2 35.6 29.9
30
1800 2.3 2.0 1.0 0.80 1200 88.6 73.8 36.9 30.8
1/2
1200 2.3 2.0 1.0 0.80 900 92.2 80.2 40.1 32.1
900 3.2 2.8 1.4 1.4 3600 101 89.0 44.6 39.2
3600 2.8 2.4 1.2 0.96 1800 112 97.8 48.9 40.3
40
1800 3.2 2.8 1.4 1.1 1200 114 99.6 48.5 39.8
3/4
1200 3.7 3.2 1.6 1.3 900 122 105.8 52.9 42.3
900 4.4 3.8 1.9 1.5 3600 140 129 64.5 48.9
3600 3.7 3.2 1.6 1.3 1800 142 122 61.1 49.4
50
1800 4.1 2.2 1.6 1.4 1200 144 125.2 61.0 50.1
1
1200 4.4 4.6 2.3 1.5 900 159 138.2 69.1 55.3
900 5.5 4.8 2.4 1.9 3600 163 145.6 72.8 56.6
3600 5.3 4.8 2.4 1.8 1800 172 147.4 73.7 59.9
60
1800 6.0 4.4 2.2 2.1 1200 172 149.2 69.8 59.7
1 1/2
1200 6.0 4.6 2.3 2.1 900 176 153.4 76.7 61.4
900 7.1 6.2 3.1 2.5 3600 206 181 90.5 71.5
3600 6.9 6.0 3.0 2.4 1800 207 180.0 91.6 72.0
75
1800 7.1 5.8 2.9 2.5 1200 206 179.2 86.7 71.7
2
1200 7.6 6.2 3.1 2.6 900 221 191.8 95.9 76.7
900 10.6 9.2 4.6 3.7 3600 262 238 119 91.2
3600 9.4 8.0 4.0 3.3 1800 281 232 116 97.7
100
1800 9.9 7.9 3.9 3.4 1200 283 246 118 98.4
3
1200 12.0 8.6 4.3 4.2 900 296 258 129 103
900 15.4 13.4 6.7 5.4 3600 338 290 139 116
3600 15.4 12.2 6.1 5.4 1800 340 296 143 118
125
1800 14.4 12.6 6.3 5.7 1200 352 306 149 122
5
1200 19.3 14.0 7.0 6.7 900 370 322 161 129
900 19.8 17.2 8.6 6.9 3600 398 346 164 138
3600 21.4 18.0 9.0 7.5 1800 412 348 169 143
150
1800 23.7 18.0 9.3 8.2 1200 419 364 177 146
7 1/2
1200 26.0 19.8 9.9 9.0 900 435 378 189 151
900 28.5 24.0 12.4 9.9 3600 – 446 217 178
3600 27.4 24.0 12.0 9.5 200 1800 – 468 226 187
1800 27.0 23.8 11.9 10.9 1200 – 482 239 193
10
1200
900
32.7
33.1
25.8
28.8
12.9
14.4
11.4
11.5 250
3600
1800
–
–
574
590
287
295
230
236
J
3600 42.6 36.0 18.0 14.8 1200 – 594 297 238
1800 40.3 35.0 17.6 16.2 3600 – 676 338 270
15 300
1200 45.1 33.0 19.1 15.7 1800 – 686 340 274
900 47.6 41.4 20.7 16.6 3600 – 774 387 310
350
3600 62.3 45.4 22.7 21.7 1800 – 792 396 317
1800 53.2 46.2 23.1 20.6 400 3600 – 890 445 356
20
1200 56.6 50.0 25.0 19.7 À Open, Type K, general purpose, NEMA SF, solid base, rolled-steel-shell, GE induction motors.
900 63.9 55.6 27.8 22.2
Note: The listed data is based on approximate full-load current ratings of standard,
open, 1.15 service factor, continuous rated General Electric motors. Full-load current
ratings of similar motors of other manufacturers may vary considerably. Therefore,
whenever possible use actual full-load current rating given on motor nameplate.
Contact motor manufacturer for full-load currents of single-phase and DC motors.
J1
Application Data
Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Spectra RMS Circuit Breaker Current Ratings
Max. Rating Instantaneous Trip Setting, Nominal RMS Sym. Amperes
Set Positions Frame Frame Plug Trip Setting Adjustment Position
Amps Amps Min. 2 3 4 5 6 Max.
3 11 13 16 19 24 31 39
The greatest degree of protection is provided when the 7
7 22 27 35 43 56 71 90
magnetic trip setting is just above the motor starting inrush 15 43 55 69 86 111 143 182
current. It is therefore recommended that the magnetic trip 30
20 58 74 93 116 151 196 254
25 73 93 117 147 193 253 332
position be adjusted to a setting one position higher than
30 87 112 142 179 237 314 415
the setting that carries the motor starting current. For rec- 40 118 150 188 237 308 394 501
ommended continuous-current ratings, see overload heater SE 60 50 148 187 236 296 386 498 637
60 178 224 284 355 464 604 777
tables on pages J-5 through J-12.
70 206 261 329 411 534 684 863
80 236 299 377 472 614 787 999
100
Cat No. Continuous Trip Setting Positions 90 267 338 426 532 694 892 1,138
3 Pole Amperes Lo 2 4 6 8 10 Hi 100 297 376 475 593 775 998 1,280
TEC36003 3 8 13 18 23 28 33 38 110 328 415 524 654 857 1,105 1,426
TEC36007 7 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 150 125 374 474 598 745 979 1,265 1,640
TEC36015 15 42 68 94 120 146 172 198 150 450 570 720 897 1,181 1,528 1,991
TEC36030 30 90 140 190 240 290 340 390 Min. 2 3 4 5 Max.
TEC36050 50 180 260 340 420 500 580 660 70 205 260 330 410 535 700
TEC36100 100 300 468 636 804 972 1140 1300 90 265 335 425 530 690 900
TEC36150 150 600 950 1300 1650 2000 2350 2700 100 295 375 470 590 765 1,000
TFC36225 225 600 780 1020 1200 1400 110 325 410 520 650 845 1,100
TFC36225A 225 1000 1200 1630 1920 2250 SF 250 125 370 465 570 740 960 1,250
TJC36400B 400 1200 1400 1850 3250 4000 150 440 560 705 885 1,150 1,500
TJC36400E 400 330 435 600 860 1100 175 515 655 825 1,035 1,345 1,750
TJC36400F 400 550 720 945 1280 1670 200 590 750 940 1,180 1,535 2,000
TJC36400G 400 1000 1280 1780 2360 3300 225 665 840 1,050 1,330 1,730 2,250
TJC36600G 600 1000 1280 1780 2360 3300 250 740 935 1,180 1,480 1,920 2,500
TJC36600H 600 1800 2100 2600 3600 6000 125 380 480 620 765 990 1,275
150 455 575 740 920 1,185 1,530
175 530 670 865 1,070 1,385 1,785
200 605 765 990 1,225 1,580 2,040
400 225 680 860 1,115 1,375 1,780 2,295
250 755 955 1,235 1,530 1,975 2,550
300 905 1,145 1,480 1,835 2,370 3,060
350 1,060 1,340 1,730 2,140 2,765 3,570
SG 400 1,210 1,530 1,980 2,445 3,160 4,080
250 765 965 1,215 1,500 1,960 2,530
300 915 1,155 1,455 1,800 2,355 3,035
350 1,070 1,350 1,700 2,100 2,745 3,545
600 400 1,200 1,540 1,940 2,400 3,135 4,050
450 1,375 1,735 2,185 2,695 3,530 4,555
500 1,525 1,925 2,425 2,995 3,920 5,060
600 1,830 2,310 2,910 3,595 4,705 6,075
300 940 1,150 1,445 1,795 2,375 3,015
400 1,255 1,535 1,930 2,395 3,165 4,015
500 1,570 1,915 2,410 2,990 3,955 5,020
800
600 1,875 2,290 2,895 3,610 4,740 6,195
700 2,155 2,665 3,375 4,240 5,525 7,420
SK 800 2,440 3,035 3,860 4,875 6,305 8,705
600 1,825 2,310 2,905 3,685 4,730 6,110
700 2,125 2,695 3,390 4,300 5,515 7,125
1,200 800 2,430 3,080 3,870 4,910 6,305 8,145
1,000 3,040 3,850 4,840 6,140 8,880 10,180
1,200 3,650 4,620 5,805 7,370 9,455 12,215
J2
Application Data
Thermal Magnetic Trip Ratings for

Motor Circuits
These selections are based on 2005 National Electric Code
requirements for squirrel-cage motors without code letters or
with code letter through G. Lower trip ratings may be required
for motor with code letter A and higher trips for motors with
code letters H to V. Local code or specific application require-
ments may necessitate special selection. Thermal-magnetic
circuit breaker combination motor control units are not recom-
mended for motors with full-load currents of 3.8 amperes or less.
NEMA Motor CB 200/208V 230V 380V 460V 575V NEMA Motor CB 200/208V 230V 380V 460V 575V
Size HP Type Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Size HP Type Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip
2 15 15 15 15 15 50 200/250
3 20 15 15 15 15 60 300 225/250
1 5 SE 30 30 20 15 15 75 350 300/350
7.5 50 30 30 20 20 5 100 SGL 400 225/250
10 30 20 20 125 300 225/250 225/250
10 50 50 150 300/350 300 250
15 SE 70 50 40 30 200 350/400 300
2 20 70 50 40 100 500
25 70 60 50 125 800 800
15 70 150 800 800
SGL/SKL
20 100 100 6 200 1000 500
3 25 SE 100 100 250 800 500 400
30 125 100 70 50 300 800 600 500
40 100 100 70 350 800 800
SKL
50 125 125 100 400 1000 800
30 125
40 200 150
50 SF 200
4 60 SGL 150 150 100
75 200 200 125
100 225 150
Motor Selection Table for Spectra Motor Circuit Protectors

Max HP per System Voltage Starter Rating Plug CB CB
208V 230V 380V 460V 575V Size Amps CAT# Sensor Frame
0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 3 SRPE7A3
7
1.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 7 SRPE7A7
2.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 7.5 15 SRPE30A15
1
3.0 5.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 20 SRPE30A20
30
5.0 25 SRPE30A25
– 7.5 30 SRPE30A30
7.5 40 SRPE60A40 60
15 25 SRPE30A25 SE
30
15 20 30 SRPE30A30 150
15 25 2 40 SRPE60A40
10 10 25 25 50 SRPE60A50 60
15 60 SRPE60A60
25 30 50 SRPE60A50
30 30 40 70 SRPE100A70 100
3-4
25 25
30
50 60 60 100
150
SRPE100A100
SRPE150A150 150 J
4RVATÀ
60 100 SRPE150A100
150
40 50 75 100 100 150 SRPE150A150
60 60 75 150 SRPF250A150 SF
4STD 200
40 50 75 100 100 200 SRPF250A200 250
50 50 100 125 150 250 SRPG400A250
60 60 125 150 300 SRPG400A300 SG
5 400
75 75 150 200 350 SRPG400A350 600
100 200 400 SRPG400A400
250 400 SRPG800A400 SG
600
100 200 250 300 500 SRPG800A500 600
6
150 150 300 350 400 800 SRPK1200A800 SK
1200
200 400 1000 SRPK1200A1000 1200
À Size 4 RVAT with SF CB requires an additional 6" height extension.
J3
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater Motor Full- Heater
Load Amps Number Load Amps Number
Heaters for Ther-Mag Controllers
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to 19.0-19.3 F233B 17.8-18.4 F233B
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous 19.4-22.1 F243B 18.5-21.1 F243B
22.2-23.4 F270B 21.2-22.1 F270B
rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor
23.5-27.0 F300B 22.2-26.1 F300B
full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. 27.1-29.1 F327B 26.2-28.0 F327B
29.2-31.8 F357B 28.1-31.3 F357B
31.9-33.9 F395B 31.4-33.3 F395B
Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum
34.0-37.6 F430B 33.4-34.3 F430B
value of full load current multiplied by 1.25. 37.7-41.9 F487B 34.4-40.9 F487B
42.0-47.7 F567B 41.0-44.7 F567B
47.8-52.1 F614B 44.8-51.0 F614B
Provide short circuit protection in accordance with the
52.2-55.8 F658B 51.1-52.0 F658B
National Electrical Code. 55.9-59.7 F719B 52.1-55.4 F719B
59.8-68.1 F772B 55.5-63.3 F772B
WARNING: Opening of the circuit breaker may be an indication that 68.2-71.5 F848B 63.4-66.1 F848B
71.6-78.2 F914B 66.2-73.5 F914B
a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection 78.3-87.5 F104C 73.6-82.2 F104C
against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other 87.6-90.0 F114C 82.3-90.0 F114C
components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced
if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay
Size 4 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
must be replaced.
Load Amps Number Load Amps Number
Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123
Motor Full- Heater Motor Full- Heater 27.1-32.2 F357B 28.8-32.0 F357B
Load Amps Number Load Amps Number 32.3-34.0 F395B 32.1-34.2 F395B
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 34.1-36.8 F430B 34.3-36.7 F430B
.41-.45 C054A 4.96-549 C592A 36.9-44.6 F487B 36.8-43.9 F487B
.46-.49 C060A 5.50-5.91 C630A 44.7-48.4 F567B 44.0-46.6 F567B
.50-.53 C066A 5.92-6.47 C695A 48.5-53.9 F614B 46.7-52.6 F614B
.54-.59 C071A 6.48-7.20 C778A 54.0-57.4 F658B 52.7-55.6 F658B
.60-.65 C078A 7.21-8.22 C867A 57.5-60.0 F719B 55.7-58.7 F719B
.66-.76 C087A 8.23-8.72 C955A 60.1-69.5 F772B 58.8-67.1 F772B
.77-.84 C097A 8.73-9.67 C104B 69.6-71.7 F848B 67.2-70.6 F848B
.85-.93 C109A 9.68-10.4 C113B 71.8-79.9 F914B 70.7-76.3 F914B
.94-1.04 C118A 10.5-11.0 C125B 80.0-92.3 F104C 76.4-88.7 F104C
1.05-1.15 C131A 11.1-12.4 C137B 92.4-97.0 F114C 88.8-93.4 F114C
1.16-1.27 C148A 12.5-13.2 C151B 97.1-108 F118C 93.5-105 F118C
1.28-1.39 C163A 13.3-15.4 C163B 109-118 F133C 106-114 F133C
1.40-1.55 C184A 15.5-17.1 C180B 119-131 F149C 115-128 F149C
1.56-1.73 C196A 17.2-18.0 C198B 132-135 F161C 129-131 F161C
1.74-1.89 C220A 132-135 F174C
1.90-2.05 C239A
Size 1
2.06-2.28 C268A 17.2-18.1 C198B
2.29-2.47 C301A 18.2-20.0 C214B Size 5 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
2.48-2.79 C326A 20.1-21.5 C228B Motor Full- Heater Motor Full- Heater
2.80-3.31 C356A 21.6-22.5 C250B Load Amps Number Load Amps Number
3.32-3.70 C379A 22.6-23.9 C273B 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123
3.71-4.06 C419A 24.0-26.3 C303B 109-118 C592A 185-200 C104B
4.07-4.47 C466A 26.4-27.0 C330B 119-128 C630A 201-221 C113B
4.48-4.95 C526A 129-138 C695A 222-237 C125B
139-155 C778A 238-262 C137B
156-168 C867A 263-270 C151B
Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) 169-184 C955A
J Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
Number
CR 123
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
Number
CR 123
5.48-5.85 C630A 16.8-17.9 C180B
5.85-6.47 C695A 18.0-18.7 C198B
6.48-7.35 C778A 18.8-20.4 C214B
7.36-8.06 C867A 20.5-22.7 C228B
8.07-9.03 C955A 22.8-24.7 C250B
9.04-9.61 C104B 24.8-26.3 C273B
9.62-10.5 C113B 26.4-29.5 C303B
10.6-11.6 C125B 29.6-32.5 C330B
11.7-12.5 C137B 32.6-36.7 C366B
12.6-13.6 C151B 36.8-41.9 C400B
13.7-16.7 C163B 42.0-43.2 C440B
43.3-45.0 C460B
J4
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables If the Mag-Break trips when starting the motor, increase trip
setting one step at a time until the motor can be consistently
Heaters for Mag Controllers started.
The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum
trip setting. Do not exceed the maximum trip setting shown in the
heater table.
WARNING: To maintain overload, short circuit, and ground fault pro-
tection, use the following instructions to select heaters and to adjust Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum
the Mag-Break trip setting. value of heater full-load current multiplied by 1.25.
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to WARNING: Overload relays with automatic reset may automatically
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous start a motor connected to a 2-wire control circuit. When automatic
rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply motor full- restarting is not desired, use a 3-wire control circuit.
load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.
WARNING: Tripping of the Mag-Break may be an indication that a fault
current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against
Use the heater table to verify that the Mag-Break and current fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components
limiter rating is correct for the motor full-load current. Then of the motor controller should be examined and be replaced if damaged.
set the Mag-Break trip setting to the recommended value. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.
Size 0 and 1 (Standard ) Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break
Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max. 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
.65-.74 C087A 3 LO LO .66-.76 C087A 3 LO LO
.75-.84 C097A 3 LO LO .77-.84 C097A 3 LO LO
.85-.92 C109A 3 LO 1 .85-.93 C109A 3 LO 1
.93-1.02 C118A 3 LO 1 .94-1.04 C118A 3 LO 1
1.03-1.10 C131A 3 LO 2 1.05-1.15 C131A 3 LO 2
1.11-1.23 C148A 3 LO 2 1.16-1.27 C148A 3 LO 2
1.24-1.38 C163A 3 LO 3 1.28-1.39 C163A 3 LO 3
1.39-1.49 C184A 3 LO 4 1.40-1.55 C184A 3 LO 4
1.50-1.67 C196A 3 1 4 1.56-1.73 C196A 3 1 4
1.68-1.79 C220A 3 1 5 1.74-1.89 C220A 3 1 5
1.80-1.98 C239A 3 1 6 1.90-2.05 C239A 3 2 6
1.99-2.24 C268A 3 2 7 2.06-2.28 C268A 3 2 7
2.25-2.43 C301A 3 3 8 2.29-2.47 C301A 3 3 8
2.25-2.43 C301A 7 LO 1 2.29-2.47 C301A 7 LO 1
2.44-2.75 C326A 7 LO 2 2.48-2.79 C326A 7 LO 2
2.76-3.25 C356A 7 LO 3 2.80-3.31 C356A 7 LO 3
3.26-3.43 C379A 7 LO 4 3.32-3.70 C379A 7 LO 4
3.44-4.03 C419A 7 1 4 3.71-4.06 C419A 7 1 5
4.04-4.43 C466A 7 1 5 4.07-4.47 C466A 7 1 5
4.44-4.94 C526A 7 2 6 4.48-4.95 C526A 7 2 6
4.95-5.36 C592A 7 2 7 4.96-5.49 C592A 7 2 7
5.37-5.77 C630A 7 3 6 4.96-5.49 C592A 15 LO 1
5.37-5.77 C630A 15 LO 2 5.50-5.91 C630A 7 3 8
5.78-6.35 C695A 15 LO 2 5.50-5.91 C630A 15 LO 2
6.36-6.92 C778A 15 LO 3 5.92-6.47 C695A 15 LO 2
6.93-7.99 C867A 15 LO 3 6.48-7.20 C778A 15 LO 3
8.00-8.47 C955A 15 1 4 7.21-8.22 C867A 15 LO 3
8.48-9.19 C104B 15 1 5 8.23-8.72 C955A 15 1 4
9.20-10.0 C113B 15 1 6 8.73-9.67 C104B 15 1 5
10.1-10.7 C125B 15 2 6 9.68-10.4 C113B 15 1 6
10.5-11.0 C125B 15 2 7
J
10.8-12.0 C137B 15 2 7
10.8-12.0 C137B 30 LO 2 11.1-12.4 C137B 15 2 7
12.1-12.9 C151B 15 3 8 11.1-12.4 C137B 30 LO 2
12.1-12.9 C151B 30 LO 2 12.5-13.2 C151B 30 LO 2
13.0-15.1 C163B 30 LO 3 13.3-15.4 C163B 30 LO 3
15.2-16.3 C180B 30 LO 4 15.5-17.1 C180B 30 LO 4
16.4-17.9 C198B 30 1 4 Size 1
Size 1 17.2-18.1 C198B 30 1 5
18.0-19.7 C214B 30 1 5 18.2-20.0 C214B 30 1 5
19.8-21.2 C228B 30 1 6 20.1-21.5 C228B 30 2 6
21.3-22.3 C250B 30 2 7 21.6-22.5 C250B 30 2 7
22.4-23.5 C273B 30 2 8 22.6-23.9 C273B 30 2 8
23.6-25.5 C303B 30 3 8 22.6-23.9 C273B 50 LO 2
23.6-25.5 C303B 50 LO 3 24.0-26.0 C303B 30 3 8
25.6-27.0 C330B 50 LO 3 24.0-26.0 C303B 50 LO 3
26.1-27.0 C330B 50 LO 4
J5
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) cont.

Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break
Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
55.5-63.3 F772B 100 1 5
63.4-66.1 F848B 100 2 6
Size 2 (Standard) 66.2-73.5 F914B 100 2 6
Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break 73.6-82.2 F104C 100 2 7
Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting 82.3-86.9 F114C 100 3 9
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
8.81-9.27 C104B 15 2 5 Size 4 (Standard)
9.28-9.99 C113B 15 2 6
10.0-11.1 C125B 15 3 6 Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break
11.2-12.1 C137B 15 3 7 Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
11.2-12.1 C137B 30 LO 2 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
12.2-13.0 C151B 15 4 8 28.8-32.0 F357B 50 1 4
12.2-13.0 C151B 30 LO 2 32.1-34.2 F395B 50 2 5
13.1-15.5 C163B 30 1 3 34.3-36.7 F430B 50 2 6
15.6-16.8 C180B 30 1 4 36.8-43.4 F487B 50 3 7
16.9-18.0 C198B 30 2 5 43.5-43.9 F487B 100 1 3
18.1-19.7 C214B 30 2 5 44.0-46.6 F567B 100 1 3
19.8-21.6 C228B 30 2 6 46.7-52.6 F614B 100 1 3
21.7-23.9 C250B 30 3 7 52.7-55.6 F658B 100 1 4
21.7-23.9 C250B 50 LO 2 55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5
24.0-25.5 C273B 30 3 8 58.8-67.1 F772B 100 2 5
24.0-25.5 C273B 50 LO 3 67.2-70.6 F848B 100 3 6
25.6-26.0 C303B 30 3 9 70.7-76.3 F914B 100 3 7
25.6-28.2 C303B 50 LO 3 70.7-76.3 F914B 150 LO 1
28.3-31.6 C330B 50 1 4 76.4-86.9 F104C 100 4 8
31.7-34.7 C366B 50 2 5 76.4-88.7 F104C 150 LO 2
34.8-37.8 C400B 50 2 6 88.8-93.4 F114C 150 1 3
37.9-40.6 C440B 50 3 7 93.5-102 F118C 150 1 3
40.7-43.4 C460B 50 3 8 103-110 F133C 150 1 4
111-122 F149C 150 1 4
123-131 F161C 150 2 5
Size 2 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max. Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break
9.04-9.61 C104B 15 2 5 Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
9.62-10.5 C113B 15 2 6 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
10.6-11.6 C125B 15 3 7 28.8-32.0 F357B 50 2 4
11.7-12.5 C137B 15 3 8 32.1-34.2 F395B 50 2 5
11.7-12.5 C137B 30 LO 2 34.3-36.7 F430B 50 2 6
12.6-13.0 C151B 15 4 9 36.8-43.4 F487B 50 3 7
12.6-13.6 C151B 30 LO 3 36.8-43.8 F487B 100 LO 2
13.7-16.7 C163B 30 1 3 43.9-46.6 F567B 100 2 3
16.8-17.9 C180B 30 1 5 46.7-52.6 F614B 100 1 3
18.0-18.7 C198B 30 2 5 52.7-55.6 F658B 100 1 4
18.8-20.4 C214B 30 2 6 55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5
20.5-22.7 C228B 30 2 7 58.8-67.1 F772B 100 2 5
22.8-24.7 C250B 30 3 8 67.2-70.6 F848B 100 3 6
22.8-24.7 C250B 50 LO 2 70.7-76.3 F914B 100 3 7
24.8-26.0 C273B 30 4 9 76.4-86.9 F104C 100 4 8
24.8-26.3 C273B 50 LO 4 76.4-88.7 F104C 150 LO 2
26.4-29.5 C303B 50 LO 4 88.8-93.4 F114C 150 1 3
29.6-32.5 C330B 50 1 4 93.5-105 F118C 150 1 3
32.6-36.7 C366B 50 2 6 106-114 F133C 150 1 4
36.8-41.9 C400B 50 2 7 115-128 F149C 150 2 5
42.0-43.2 C440B 50 3 9 129-130 F161C 150 2 6
43.3-43.4 C460B 50 3 9
Size 5 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break
Motor Full- Heater TEC & Mag-Break Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting
Load Amps Number TECL Trip Setting 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR 123 Rating Rec. Max.
J 3-Ph, 3 Heater
17.8-18.4
CR 123
F233B
Rating
30
Rec.
1
Max.
5
106-115
116-125
C592A
C630A
550-1670
550-1670
2
3
6
7
18.5-21.1 F243B 30 1 6 126-135 C695A 550-1670 3 7
21.2-22.1 F270B 30 2 7 126-135 C695A 1000-3300 LO 3
22.2-26.0 F300B 30 3 7 136-151 C778A 1000-3300 LO 3
26.1-28.0 F327B 50 LO 4 152-164 C867A 1000-3300 LO 4
28.1-31.3 F357B 50 LO 4 165-179 C955A 1000-3300 1 5
31.4-33.3 F395B 50 1 5 180-195 C104B 1000-3300 2 5
33.4-34.3 F430B 50 1 6 196-215 C113B 1000-3300 2 6
34.4-40.9 F487B 50 1 6 216-231 C125B 1000-3300 3 6
41.0-43.4 F567B 50 2 8 232-255 C137B 1000-3300 4 7
43.5-44.7 F567B 100 LO 3 256-270 C151B 1000-3300 4 HI
44.8-51.0 F614B 100 LO 3
51.1-52.0 F658B 100 1 4
52.1-55.4 F719B 100 1 4
J6
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater SE Mag-Break
Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
.66-.76 C087A 3 LO LO
Size 0 and 1 (Standard) .77-.84 C097A 3 LO LO
.85-.93 C109A 3 LO LO
Motor Full- Heater SE Mag-Break .94-1.04 C118A 3 LO 2
Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting 1.05-1.15 C131A 3 LO 2
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max. 1.16-1.27 C148A 3 LO 3
.65-.74 C087A 3 LO LO 1.28-1.39 C163A 3 LO 3
.75-.84 C097A 3 LO LO 1.40-1.55 C184A 3 LO 4
.85-.92 C109A 3 LO LO 1.56-1.73 C196A 3 2 4
.93-1.02 C118A 3 LO 2 1.74-1.89 C220A 3 2 5
1.03-1.10 C131A 3 LO 2 1.90-2.05 C239A 3 2 5
1.11-1.23 C148A 3 LO 2 2.06-2.28 C268A 3 3 5
1.24-1.38 C163A 3 LO 3 2.29-2.47 C301A 3 3 6
1.39-1.49 C184A 3 LO 4 2.48-2.79 C326A 7 LO 3
1.50-1.67 C196A 3 LO 4 2.80-3.31 C356A 7 LO 4
1.68-1.79 C220A 3 LO 5 3.32-3.70 C379A 7 2 4
1.80-1.98 C239A 3 2 5 3.71-4.06 C419A 7 2 4
1.99-2.24 C268A 3 3 5 4.07-4.47 C466A 7 2 5
2.25-2.43 C301A 3 3 6 4.48-4.95 C526A 7 3 5
2.44-2.75 C326A 7 LO 3 4.96-5.49 C592A 7 3 6
2.76-3.25 C356A 7 LO 4 5.50-5.91 C630A 7 4 6
3.26-3.43 C379A 7 LO 4 5.50-5.91 C630A 15 LO 3
3.44-4.03 C419A 7 2 4 5.92-6.47 C695A 15 LO 3
4.04-4.43 C466A 7 2 5 6.48-7.20 C778A 15 2 4
4.44-4.94 C526A 7 3 5 7.21-8.22 C867A 15 2 4
4.95-5.36 C592A 7 3 6 8.23-8.72 C955A 15 2 5
5.37-5.77 C630A 7 4 6 8.73-9.67 C104B 15 3 5
5.37-5.77 C630A 15 LO 3 9.68-10.4 C113B 20 2 4
5.78-6.35 C695A 15 LO 3 10.5-11.0 C125B 20 2 4
6.36-6.92 C778A 15 LO 4 11.1-12.4 C137B 20 2 5
6.93-7.99 C867A 15 2 4 12.5-13.2 C151B 20 3 5
8.00-8.47 C955A 15 2 5 13.3-15.4 C163B 20 4 6
8.48-9.19 C104B 15 3 5 15.5-17.1 C180B 25 3 5
9.20-10.0 C113B 20 2 4
10.1-10.7 C125B 20 2 5
10.8-12.0 C137B 20 2 5 Size 1 (Ambient Comp.)
12.1-12.9 C151B 20 3 5
13.0-15.1 C163B 20 4 6 Motor Full- Heater SE Mag-Break
15.2-16.3 C180B 25 3 5 Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting
16.4-17.9 C198B 25 3 6 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
17.2-18.1 C198B 25 3 6
18.2-20.0 C214B 30 3 5
Size 1 (Standard) 20.1-21.5 C228B 30 3 5
21.6-22.5 C250B 30 3 6
22.6-23.9 C273B 40 2 5
24.0-26.0 C303B 40 3 5
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
26.1-27.0 C330B 40 3 5
18.0-19.7 C214B 30 3 5
19.8-21.2 C228B 30 3 5
21.3-22.3 C250B 30 3 6
22.4-23.5 C273B 40 2 5
23.6-25.5 C303B 40 3 5
25.6-27.0 C330B 40 3 5
J7
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting
17.8-18.4 F233B 30 2 5
Size 2 (Standard) 18.5-21.1 F243B 30 3 5
21.2-22.1 F207B 30 3 5
22.2-26.0 F300B 40 3 5
26.1-28.0 F327B 40 3 5
28.1-31.3 F357B 50 3 5
8.81-9.27 C104B 15 3 5
31.4-33.3 F395B 50 3 5
9.28-9.99 C113B 20 2 4
33.4-34.3 F430B 50 3 5
10.0-11.1 C125B 20 2 5
34.4-40.9 F487B 70 2 5
11.2-12.1 C137B 20 3 5
41.0-44.7 F567B 70 3 5
12.2-13.0 C151B 20 3 5
44.8-51.0 F614B 100 LO 4
13.1-15.5 C163B 20 4 6
51.1-52.0 F658B 100 LO 4
15.6-16.8 C180B 25 3 5
52.1-55.4 F719B 100 2 5
16.9-18.0 C198B 25 3 6
55.5-63.3 F772B 100 3 5
18.1-19.7 C214B 30 3 5
63.4-66.1 F848B 100 3 5
19.8-21.6 C228B 30 3 5
66.2-73.5 F914B 100 3 6
21.7-23.9 C250B 40 2 5
73.6-82.2 F104C 150 2 4
24.0-25.5 C273B 40 2 5
82.3-86.9 F114C 150 2 5
25.6-28.2 C303B 50 2 5
28.3-31.6 C330B 50 3 5
31.7-34.7 C366B 50 3 6 Size 4 (Standard)
34.8-37.8 C400B 50 3 6
37.9-40.6 C440B 60 3 5
40.7-43.4 C460B 60 3 6
28.8-32.0 F357B 50 3 5
Size 2 (Ambient Comp.) 32.1-34.2 F395B 50 3 5
34.3-36.7 F430B 70 2 5
Motor Full- Heater SE Mag-Break 36.8-43.9 F487B 70 3 5
Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting 44.0-46.6 F567B 70 3 5
3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max. 46.7-52.6 F614B 100 2 4
9.04-9.61 C104B 15 3 5 52.7-55.6 F658B 100 2 5
9.62-10.5 C113B 20 3 4 55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5
10.6-11.6 C125B 20 2 5 58.8-67.1 F772B 100 3 5
11.7-12.5 C137B 20 3 5 67.2-70.6 F848B 100 3 6
12.6-13.6 C151B 20 3 5 70.7-76.3 F914B 150 2 4
13.7-16.7 C163B 20 4 6 76.4-88.7 F104C 150 2 5
16.8-17.9 C180B 25 3 5 88.8-93.4 F114C 150 3 5
18.0-18.7 C198B 25 3 6 93.5-102.0 F118C 150 3 5
18.8-20.4 C214B 30 3 5 103.0-110.0 F133C 150 3 5
20.5-22.7 C228B 30 3 6 111.0-122.0 F149C 150 4 6
22.8-24.7 C250B 40 2 5 123.0-131.0 F161C 150 4 6
24.8-26.3 C273B 40 2 5
26.4-29.5 C303B 50 2 5
29.6-32.5 C330B 50 3 5 Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
32.6-36.7 C366B 50 3 6 Motor Full- Heater SE Mag-Break
36.8-41.9 C400B 50 3 6 Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting
42.0-43.2 C440B 60 3 5 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
43.3-43.4 C460B 60 3 6 28.8-32.0 F357B 50 3 5
32.1-34.2 F395B 50 3 5
34.3-36.7 F430B 70 2 5
36.8-43.8 F487B 70 3 5
43.9-46.6 F567B 70 3 5
46.7-52.6 F614B 100 2 4
52.7-55.6 F658B 100 2 5
55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5
58.8-67.1 F772B 100 3 5
J 67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
F848B
F914B
100
150
3
2
6
4
76.4-88.7 F104C 150 2 5
88.8-93.4 F114C 150 3 5
93.5-105.0 F118C 150 3 5
106.0-114.0 F133C 150 3 5
115.0-128.0 F149C 150 4 6
129.0-130.0 F161C 150 4 6
J8
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 6 – 600:5 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater SG Instantaneous
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
181-197 C220A 400 MIN. 4
Size 4 (Standard) 198-214 C239A 400 2 5
215-238 C268A 500 MIN 4
Motor Full- Heater SF Mag-Break
239-258 C301A 500 MIN 4
259-290 C326A 500 2 5
291-346 C356A 600 MIN 5
28.8-32.0 F357B 70 2 4
347-387 C379A 600 2 5
32.1-34.2 F395B 70 2 4
388-424 C419A 600 3 MAX
34.3-36.7 F430B 70 2 5
36.8-43.9 F487B 70 2 5
44.0-46.6 F567B 70 3 5 Size 6 – 600:5 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
46.7-52.6 F614B 100 2 4
52.7-55.6 F658B 100 2 4 Motor Full- Heater SK Instantaneous
55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5 Load Amps Number Rating Trip Setting
58.8-67.1 F772B 150 LO 4 3-Ph, 3 Heater CR123 Plug Rec. Max.
67.2-70.6 F848B 150 LO 4 181-197 C220A 400 LO 4
70.7-76.3 F914B 150 2 4 198-214 C239A 400 2 4
76.4-88.7 F104C 200 LO 4 215-238 C268A 400 3 5
88.8-93.4 F114C 200 LO 4 239-258 C301A 500 LO 4
93.5-102.0 F118C 200 LO 5 259-290 C326A 500 2 5
103.0-110.0 F133C 200 2 6 291-346 C356A 800 LO 4
111.0-122.0 F149C 200 2 6 347-387 C379A 800 LO 5
123.0-131.0 F161C 200 2 6 388-423 C419A 800 2 5
424-467 C466A 1000 LO 4
468-516 C526A 1000 2 4
Size 4 (Ambient Comp.) 517-540 C592A 1000 2 5
Motor Full- Heater SF Mag-Break
28.8-32.0 F357B 70 2 4
32.1-34.2 F395B 70 3 4
34.3-36.7 F430B 70 3 5
36.8-43.8 F487B 70 3 5
43.9-46.6 F567B 70 3 5
46.7-52.6 F614B 100 2 4
52.7-55.6 F658B 100 2 4
55.7-58.7 F719B 100 2 5
58.8-67.1 F772B 150 LO 4
67.2-70.6 F848B 150 LO 4
70.7-76.3 F914B 150 2 4
76.4-88.7 F104C 200 LO 4
88.8-93.4 F114C 200 LO 4
93.5-105.0 F118C 200 LO 5
106.0-114.0 F133C 200 2 6
115.0-128.0 F149C 200 2 6
129.0-130.0 F161C 200 2 6
Size 5 – 300:15 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater SG Instantaneous
106-115 C592A 250 LO 3
116-125 C630A 250 LO 4
126-135 C695A 250 2 4
136-151 C778A 250 2 5
152-164
165-179
C867A
C955A
300
300
2
2
4
5
J
180-195 C104B 350 2 4
196-215 C113B 350 2 5
216-231 C125B 400 2 4
232-255 C137B 400 2 5
256-270 C151B 400 3 5
J9
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables

Overload Relays
Electronic Overloads for Circuit Breaker Controllers

Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25
service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service
factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.
NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number Breaker Frame & Type
1 0.8 to 1.7 CR324CXD E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1 1.8 to 3.4 CR324CXE E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1 3.2 to 6.8 CR324CXF E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1 6.5 to 13.5 CR324CXG E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1 13 to 27 CR324CXH E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
2 6.5 to 13.5 CR324DXG E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
2 13 to 27 CR324DXH E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
2 25 to 50 CR324DXJ E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
3 17 to 35 CR324FXK E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
3 35 to 70 CR324FXL E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
3 65 to 135 CR324FXM E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
4 17 to 35 CR324FXK E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
4 35 to 70 CR324FXL E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
4 65 to 135 CR324FXM E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
5À 35 to 70 CR324GXN G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
5À 65 to 135 CR324GXP G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
5À 130 to 270 CR324GXQ G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
6Á 130 to 270 CR324HXS G,K Mag. & Thermal Mag.
6Á 260 to 540 CR324HXT K Mag. & Thermal Mag
À 300:15 CT’s
Á 800:5 CT’s
Overload Relays for Compact 6" Starter CL45A310MJ, NEMA Size 1

FLA Range Class 10 Class 20
in Amps Catalog Number Catalog Number Breaker Frame & Type
0.4-.65 RTN1D E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
0.65-1.1 RTN1F E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1-1.5 RTN1G E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1.3-1.9 RTN1H E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
1.8-2.7 RTN1J E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
2.5-4.1 RTNIK RT12K E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
4.0-6.3 RTNIL RT12L E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
5.5-8.5 RTNIM RT12M E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
8.0-12 RTNIN RT12N E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
10.0-16 RTNIP RT12P E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
14.5-18 RTNIS RT12S E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
17.5-22 RTNIT RT12T E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
21-26 RTNIU RT12U E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
J10
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the mini-
mum value of full-load current multiplied by 1.25.
Heaters for Fused Controllers
The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum Provide short-circuit protection in accordance with the
trip setting. National Electrical Code, except Fuses are not to exceed the
value shown in the table.
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor than the maximum RMS symmetrical amperes indicated in
full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. the table below, 600-volts maximum, when protected by an
appropriate fuse having an interrupting rating not less than
the available short-circuit current.
Table 1–Maximum Fuse and Short-Circuit Rating Motor Full- Heater Maximum
Load Amps Number Fuse
Class RK Fuse Class J Fuse Class K-1, K-5 Fuse
3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating
NEMA Max. Max. RMS Max. Max. RMS Max. Max. RMS Size 1
60À
Size Clip Sym. Amps Clip Sym. Amps Clip Sym. Amps 17.2-18.1 C198B
1 30A 100,000 60A 100,000 Fuse 5,000 18.2-20.0 C214B 60À
2 60 100,000 100 100,000 per 5,000 20.1-21.5 C228B 60À
3 100 100,000 200 100,000 Overload 5,000 21.6-22.5 C250B 60À
4 200 100,000 400 100,000 Heater 10,000 22.6-23.9 C273B 60À
5 400 100,000 600 100,000 Table 10,000 24.0-26.3 C303B 60À
26.4-27.0 C330B 60À
WARNING: Opening of the fuse(s) may be an indication that a fault current has been inter-
rupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying
parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.
Motor Full- Heater Maximum
Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) 5.48-5.85 C630A 20
Motor Full- Heater Maximum 5.86-6.47 C695A 20
Load Amps Number Fuse 6.48-7.35 C778A 25
3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating 7.36-8.06 C867A 30
.41-.45 C054A 3 8.07-9.03 C955A 30
.46-.49 C060A 3 9.04-9.61 C104B 35
.50-.53 C066A 3 9.62-10.5 C113B 35
.54-.59 C071A 3 10.6-11.6 C125B 40
.60-.65 C078A 3 11.7-12.5 C137B 45
.66-.76 C087A 3 12.6-13.6 C151B 50
.77-.84 C097A 3 13.7-16.7 C163B 60
.85-.93 C109A 3 16.8-17.9 C180B 60
.94-1.04 C118A 3 18.0-18.7 C198B 70À
1.05-1.15 C131A 3 18.8-20.4 C214B 80À
1.16-1.27 C148A 3 20.5-22.7 C228B 80À
1.28-1.39 C163A 3 22.8-24.7 C250B 90À
1.40-1.55 C184A 6 24.8-26.3 C273B 90À
1.56-1.73 C196A 6 26.4-29.5 C303B 100À
1.74-1.89 C220A 6 29.6-32.5 C330B 100À
1.90-2.05 C239A 6 32.6-36.7 C366B 100À
2.06-2.28 C268A 6 36.8-41.9 C400B 100À
2.29-2.47 C301A 6 42.0-43.2 C440B 100À
2.48-2.79 C326A 10 43.3-45.0 C460B 100À
2.80-3.31 C356A 10
3.32-3.70 C379A 12 À See Table 1 for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.
3.71-4.06 C419A 15
4.07-4.47 C466A 15
4.48-4.95
4.96-5.49
C526A
C592A
15
20 J
5.50-5.91 C630A 20
5.92-6.47 C695A 25
6.48-7.20 C778A 25
7.21-8.22 C867A 30
8.23-8.72 C955A 30
8.73-9.67 C104B 35À
9.68-10.4 C113B 35À
10.5-11.0 C125B 40À
11.1-12.4 C137B 45À
12.5-13.2 C151B 50À
13.3-15.4 C163B 60À
15.5-17.1 C180B 60À
17.2-18.0 C198B 60À
J11
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full- Heater Maximum
Heaters for Fused Controllers 3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating
28.8-32.0 F357B 110
Size 3 (Standard) 32.1-34.2 F395B 125
34.3-36.7 F430B 125
Motor Full- Heater Maximum 36.8-43.9 F487B 150
Load Amps Number Fuse 44.0-46.6 F567B 175
3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating 46.7-52.6 F614B 175
19.0-19.3 F233B 70 52.7-55.6 F658B 200
19.4-22.1 F243B 80 55.7-58.7 F719B 225À
22.2-23.4 F270B 80 58.8-67.1 F772B 225À
23.5-27.0 F300B 90 67.2-70.6 F848B 250À
27.1-29.1 F327B 100 70.7-76.3 F914B 275À
29.2-31.8 F357B 110À 76.4-88.7 F104C 300À
31.9-33.9 F395B 125À 88.8-93.4 F114C 350À
34.0-37.6 F430B 125À 93.5-105 F118C 350À
37.7-41.9 F487B 150À 106-114 F133C 400À
42.0-47.7 F567B 175À 115-128 F149C 400À
47.8-52.1 F614B 175À 129-131 F161C 400À
52.2-55.8 F658B 200À 132-135 F174C 400À
55.9-59.7 F719B 200À
59.8-68.1 F772B 200À
68.2-71.5 F848B 200À Size 5 – 300:15CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
71.6-78.2 F914B 200À
78.3-87.5 F104C 200À Motor Full- Heater Maximum
87.6-90.0 F114C 200À Load Amps Number Fuse
109-118 C592A 600
Size 3 (Ambient Comp.) 119-128 C630A 600
129-138 C695A 600
Motor Full- Heater Maximum 139-155 C778A 600
Load Amps Number Fuse 156-168 C867A 600
3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating 169-184 C955A 600
17.8-18.4 F233B 70 185-200 C104B 600
18.5-21.1 F243B 80 201-221 C113B 600
21.2-22.1 F270B 80 222-237 C125B 600
22.2-26.1 F300B 90 238-262 C137B 600
26.2-28.0 F327B 100 263-270 C151B 600
28.1-31.3 F357B 110À
31.4-33.3 F395B 125À
33.4-34.3 F430B 125À Electronic Overload Table for Fusible Controllers
34.4-40.9 F487B 150À
41.0-44.7 F567B 150À Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25 service
44.8-51.0 F614B 175À factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial
51.1-52.0 F658B 200À to 0.9 motor FLA.
52.1-55.4 F719B 200À
55.5-63.3 F772B 200À NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number Max. Fuse in Amps
63.4-66.1 F848B 200À 1 0.8 to 1.7 CR324CXD Class R 30 Class J 60
66.2-73.5 F914B 200À 1 1.8 to 3.4 CR324CXE
73.6-82.2 F104C 200À 1 3.2 to 6.8 CR324CXF
82.3-90.0 F114C 200À 1 6.5 to 13.5 CR324CXG
1 13 to 27 CR324CXH
2 6.5 to 13.5 CR324DXG 60 100
Size 4 (Standard) 2 13 to 27 CR324DXH
Motor Full- Heater Maximum 2 25 to 50 CR324DXJ
Load Amps Number Fuse 3 17 to 35 CR324FXK 100 200
3-Ph., 3-Heater CR123 Rating 3 35 to 70 CR324FXL
27.1-32.2 F357B 110 3 65 to 135 CR324FXM
32.3-34.0 F395B 125 4 17 to 35 CR324FXK 200 400
34.1-36.8 F430B 125 4 35 to 70 CR324FXL
36.9-44.6 F487B 150 4 65 to 135 CR324FXM
5À
J 44.7-48.4
48.5-53.9
F567B
F614B
175
175 5À
35 to 70
65 to 135
CR324GXN
CR324GXP
400 600
54.0-57.4 F658B 200 5À 130 to 270 CR324GXQ

57.5-60.0 F719B 225À 6Á 130 to 270 CR324HXS 600 Class L 1200
60.1-69.5 F772B 225À 6Á 260 to 540 CR324HXT
69.6-71.7 F848B 250À
71.8-79.9 F914B 275À À 300:15 CT’s
80.0-92.3 F104C 300À Á 800:5 CT’s
92.4-97.0 F114C 350À
97.1-108 F118C 400À
109-118 F133C 400À
119-131 F149C 400À
132-135 F161C 400À
À See Table 1 (page J-17) for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.
J12
Application Data
Starter Fuse Selection

The following tables are furnished as a guide. Check vendor
fuse characteristics before making final selection.
200 and 208 Volts

UL Class J Time-Delay RK-5
Typical Switch Time Delay No Time Delay BMC CSC
Size Hp FLA Amp CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip FRN Clip TR Clip
1/2 2.3 30 3 30 10 30 2.8 30 3.5 30
3/4 3.2 30 5 30 10 30 4 30 4.5 30
1 3.9 30 6 30 15 30 5 30 6.25 30
1 1/2 5.3 30 8 30 20 30 7 30 8 30
1 2 7.1 30 10 30 25 30 9 30 12 30
3 10.6 30 15 30 30 30 12 30 15 30
5 16.3 30 25 30 45 60 20 30 25 30
7 1/2 25.3 30 30 30 60 60 30 30 30 30
2 10 31.3 60 50 60 90 100 40 60 40 60
15 45.1 100 60 60 110 200 60 60 60 60
3 20 591 100 90 100 150 200 70 100 90 100
25 731 100 100 100 175 200 90 100 100 100
30 881 200 125 200 200 200 100 100 125 200
4
40 120 200 175 200 225 400 150 200 175 200
50 150 400 225 400 300 400 175 200 225 400
5 60 174 400 250 400 350 400 200 200 225 400
75 210 400 300 400 450 600 250 400 300 400
BMC–Bussman Fuse
CSC–Chase Shawmut Fuse
230 Volts
UL Class J Time-Delay RK-5
Size Hp FLA Amp CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip FRN Clip TR Clip
1/2 2.0 30 3 30 10 30 2.5 30 3 30
3/4 2.8 30 4 30 15 30 3.5 30 4 30
1 3.4 30 6 30 15 30 4 30 5.6 30
1 1/2 4.6 30 8 30 30 30 6.25 30 8 30
1 2 6.2 30 10 30 25 30 8 30 10 30
3 9.2 30 15 30 30 30 12 30 15 30
5 14.2 30 25 30 45 60 17.5 30 25 30
7 1/2 22.0 30 30 30 60 60 25 30 30 30
10 27.2 60 40 60 90 100 35 60 40 60
2 15 39.2 60 60 60 – – 50 60 60 60
15 39.2 100 60 60 110 200 – – – –
20 51.4 100 80 100 150 200 60 60 80 100
3 25 63.6 100 100 100 175 200 80 100 100 100
30 76.6 100 100 100 200 200 100 100 100 100
40 104 200 150 200 225 400 125 200 150 200
4 50 130 200 200 200 300 400 150 200 200 200
60 151 400 225 400 350 400 175 200 225 400
5 75 183 400 300 400 400 400 225 400 300 400
100 240 400 350 400 600 600 300 400 350 400
125 296 600 450 600 600 600 350 400 450 600
6 150 348 600 500 600 – – 450 600 500 600
200 468 600 – – – – 500 600 600 600
J13
Application Data
Starter Fuse Selection

460 Volts
UL Class J Time-Delay K-5
Size Hp FLA Amp CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP FRS Clip TRS Clip
1/2 1.0 30 1.5 30 3 30 1.25 30 1.4 30
3/4 1.4 30 2 30 3 30 1.6 30 2 30
1 1.7 30 3 30 6 30 2 30 2.5 30
1 1/2 2.3 30 4 30 6 30 2.8 30 4 30
1 2 3.1 30 5 30 10 30 3.5 30 5 30
3 4.6 30 8 30 15 30 5 30 7 30
5 7.1 30 10 30 25 30 9 30 10 30
7 1/2 11.0 30 15 30 35 60 15 30 15 30
10 13.6 30 20 30 40 60 17.5 30 20 30
15 19.6 60 30 30 50 60 25 30 30 30
2 20 25.7 60 40 60 90 100 35 60 40 60
25 31.8 60 50 60 100 100 40 60 50 60
30 38.3 100 60 60 110 200 45 60 60 60
3 40 52.0 100 80 100 125 200 60 60 75 100
50 65.0 100 100 100 150 200 80 100 100 100
60 75.5 200 110 200 175 200 90 100 110 200
4 75 91.5 200 150 200 225 400 110 200 150 200
100 120 200 175 200 225 400 150 200 175 200
125 148 400 225 400 300 400 200 200 225 400
5 150 172 400 250 400 350 400 225 400 250 400
200 224 400 300 400 500 600 300 400 350 400
250 295 600 450 600 600 600 350 400 400 400
6 300 343 600 500 600 – – 400 400 500 600
350 396 600 600 600 – – 450 600 600 600
400 453 600 – – – – 500 600 600 600
575 Volts
UL Class J Time-Delay K-5
Size Hp FLA Amp CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP FRS Clip TRS Clip
3/4 1.1 30 2 30 3 30 1.25 30 1.6 30
1 1.4 30 2 30 6 30 1.6 30 2 30
11⁄2 1.8 30 3 30 6 30 2.25 30 3 30
1 2 2.5 30 4 30 10 30 2.8 30 4 30
3 3.7 30 6 30 15 30 4.5 30 6 30
5 5.7 30 10 30 20 30 7 30 9 30
7 1/2 8.8 30 15 30 30 30 10 30 15 30
10 10.9 30 15 30 35 60 15 30 15 30
15 15.7 60 25 30 45 60 20 30 25 30
2 20 20.6 60 35 60 60 60 25 30 35 60
25 25.4 60 40 60 80 100 35 60 40 60
30 30.6 100 45 60 100 100 40 60 45 60
3 40 41.6 100 60 60 110 200 45 60 60 60
50 52.0 100 80 100 125 200 60 60 80 100
60 60.4 200 90 100 150 200 70 100 90 100
4 75 73.2 200 125 200 175 200 90 100 125 200
100 96.0 200 150 200 225 400 110 200 150 200
125 118 400 175 200 225 400 150 200 175 200
5 150 138 400 225 400 300 400 175 200 225 400
200 179 400 300 400 400 400 225 400 300 400
250 236 600 350 400 500 600 300 400 350 400
J 6 300
350
274
317
600
600
450
500
600
600
600
–
600
–
350
400
400
400
450
500
600
600
400 363 600 600 600 – – 450 600 600 600
J14
Application Data
Control Transformer Fusing Heat Loss Considerations
600V Type ATMR or Equivalent

Secondary Volts 250V In determining the heat loss of a motor control center for air
Type TRM or Equivalent conditioning requirements, 250 watts per foot of lineup is a
XFMR 200-230V 240V 380-400V 416V 440-480V 575-600V 110-120V 220-240V
VA 60HZ 60HZ 50HZ 50HZ 60HZ 60HZ 50HZ 50HZ
reasonable assumption.
60 1 1 3/4 6/10 1/2 1/2 6/10 3/10
75 1-1/2 1-1/2 8/10 8/10 3/4 6/10 8/10 1/2 Actual heat loss will vary due to section loading and diversity
100 2 2 1-1/4 1 1 3/4 1 6/10 factors. A typical motor control center may operate normally
150 3-1/2 3 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-6/10 8/10 at 60 percent of maximum possible loading.
200 4 4 2 2 2 1-1/2 2 1
250 5 5 2 2 2 2 2-8/10 1-1/2
Fully rated circuit breaker starters with CPT’s, approximate
300 6 6 3-1/2 3-1/2 2 2 3-2/10 1-6/10
500 6 6 6 6 5 4 5 2-8/10
losses are:
Size 1– 27 Watts
Size 2– 57 Watts
Control Fusing for Non-CPT Applications
Size 3–130 Watts
Type Control Fuse Amps (Class CC)
Size 4–200 Watts
Line to Line 10
Size 5–300 Watts
Line to Neutral 10
Common Control 6
Size 6–650 Watts
Separate Source 6
Heat losses for feeders and mains vary depending on frame
size, loading and type of trip with electronic trips having
Typical CPT Ratings (480V/120V Shown)
Open Circuit
lower losses. The following table provides a general guide
VA %R %X
Secondary Volts for estimating losses assuming 80 percent loading. For critical
60 9.05 1.03 131.9 applications refer to the Company.
100 6.39 1.18 129.4
150 5.02 1.01 127.3
200 5.09 1.06 126.2 Type Frame Loss (Watts)
250 6.81 .88 127.8 SE150 15
300 5.15 .73 126.4 Molded Case SF250 20
500 5.84 1.45 128.7 Breaker Frame SG600 25
SK800 40
SK1200 50
800A 80
Insulated Case 1600A 210
Power Break 2000A 305
2500A 375
Typical losses for transformers:

1kVA, 1-Ph 75 Watts
5 kVA, 1-Ph 190 Watts
Horizontal and vertical bus losses, when loaded to capacity

are approximately 100 watts per section.
Solid State Starters or VFDs will typically generate 3 watts

per ampere of load during operation. J
J15
Application Data
Motor Loads Non-motor load ratings are based on the use of two poles
to control single-phase loads and three poles to control
NEMA Contactor Ratings three-phase loads.
Normal Starting Duty HP/KW rating by NEMA Size
Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 Capacitor switching, requires special considerations. A dis-
Single Phase
115V 2 3 7.5 – – – charged capacitor acts essentially like a short circuit, and the
230V 3 7.5 15 – – –
inrush current is limited by the impedance connected in
200V 7.5/5.5 10/7.5 25/18.5 40/30 75/55 150/110
230V 7.5/5.5 15/11 30/22 50/37 100/75 200/150 series with the capacitor which includes connecting cables.
Three Phase 380/415V 10/7.5 25/18.5 50/37 75/55 150/110 300/260 Therefore, the maximum capacitance which can be
460V 10/7.5 25/18.5 50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260
switched by a contactor will increase with higher series
575V 10/7.5 25/18.5 50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260
impedance. Switching more than one capacitor or capacitor
bank in close electrical proximity to each other should be
avoided as the energized capacitor bank can increase the
inrush current to the second bank when it is energized.
Non-Motor Loads Reactors or resistors may be required between the two
capacitor banks to limit inrush currents.
When selecting contactors for non-motor loads, the following
load characteristics should be considered: NEMA Standards require shunt capacitors to operate satis-
1. Voltage and maximum continuous current. factorily at 135 percent of rated KVAR due to manufacturing
2. Maximum peak inrush current and duration. tolerances and other variations. The higher inrush and steady
3. RMS current and duration of maximum current on cyclic loads. state currents associated with these capacitors should be
4. Frequency of operation. taken into consideration.
5. Maximum interrupting current, voltage, power factor and
wave form. NEMA Publication ICS2-210 covers non-motor loads.
6. Available short-circuit current.
NEMA Contactor Ratings

Maximum Transformer Primary Switching (kVA)
Cont. Inrush Tung Transformers having inrush currents of not more Transformers having inrush currents of over
Size of Amps Current stenÀ Resistive than 20 times FLA 20 through 40 times FLA
Contactor (Amps Lamps LoadsÀ Single-Phase Volts Three-Phase Volts Single-Phase Volts Three-Phase Volts
Peak) 120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600
0 18 140 10 18 0.6 1.2 2.4 3 1.8 2.1 4.2 5.2 0.3 0.6 1.2 1.5 0.9 1.0 2.1 2.6
1 27 288 15 27 1.2 2.4 4.9 6.2 3.6 4.3 8.5 11 0.6 1.2 2.5 3.1 1.8 2.1 4.3 5.3
2 45 483 30 45 2.1 4.1 8.3 10 6.3 7.2 14 18 1.0 2.1 4.2 5.2 3.1 3.6 7.2 8.9
3 90 947 60 90 4.1 8.1 16 20 12 14 28 35 2.0 4.1 8.1 10 6.1 7.0 14 18
4 135 1581 120 135 6.8 14 27 34 20 23 47 59 3.4 6.8 14 17 10 12 23 29
5 270 3163 240 270 14 27 54 68 41 47 94 117 6.8 14 27 34 20 24 47 59
6 540 6326 480 540 27 54 108 135 81 94 188 234 14 27 54 68 41 47 94 117
À 300-volts maximum, Tungsten lamp loads include infrared lamps having Tungsten
filaments.
Á Resistive loads include electric discharge lamps such as fluorescent, mercury, vapor, etc.
J16
Application Data
Non-Motor Loads
NEMA Contactor Ratings for Single Capacitor or Capacitor Bank Switching
Size of Continuous Three-Phase Rating of Capacitor
Controller Ratings RMS Maximum Size of Three-Phase Capacitor in kVAR or Available CurrentÀ in Amperes RMS Sym.
Amperes 3000 5000 10,000 14,000 18,000 22,000
At 230 Volts, 60 Hertz
2 45 12 8 4 3 2 2
3 90 27 27 15 11 9 7
4 135 40 40 40 30 24 20
5 270 80 80 80 80 80 75
6 540 160 160 160 160 160 160
2 45 25 16 8 6 4 4
3 90 53 53 31 23 18 15
4 135 80 80 80 61 49 41
5 270 160 160 160 160 160 149
6 540 320 320 320 320 320 320
2 45 31 20 10 7 6 5
3 90 67 67 39 29 23 19
4 135 100 100 100 77 61 51
5 270 200 200 200 200 200 189
6 540 400 400 400 400 400 400
Disconnect minimums: thermal magnetic breakers rated 135%, fused switch rated 165%.
NEMA Contactor for Heating Loads

Continuous Maximum kW RatingsÁ
NEMA Current 575 Volts 460 Volts 230 Volts 115 Volts
Size Rating 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Amps 1-Ph 3-Ph 1-Ph 3-Ph 1-Ph 3-Ph 1-Ph 3-Ph
00 9 5 9 4 7 2 3.5 1 1.75
0 18 10 18 8 14 4 7 2 3.5
1 27 15 25 12 20 6 10 3 5
2 45 25 43 20 34 10 17 5 8.5
3 90 50 86 40 68 20 34 10 17
4 135 75 130 60 105 30 52 15 26
5 270 150 260 120 210 60 105 30 52
6 540 300 515 240 415 120 210 60 105
7 810 450 775 360 625 180 315 90 155
8 1215 700 1200 540 960 270 480 135 240
9 2250 1290 2200 1020 1740 510 880 255 440
Application of Starters for Heating and Lighting Loads

1. No Tungsten lamp loads, No transformer loads.
2. Contactor loading must meet table above.
3. Overload heaters may be sized for maximumÂ.
4. Disconnect must be thermal magnetic or fused switch rated
per NEC @ 125% of load amps.
J
À Available at capacitor terminals.
Á Applicable only to resistive loads having inrush currents not exceeding 1.5 times
the continuous current rating.
® Spectra CB will permit deletion of overload heaters for these loads.
J17
Application Data
Non-Motor Loads
Application Rated
Maximum kVA of Transformer for Primary Switching (50/60Hz)a

Catalog Max. Peak Inrush = 20 x Normal Inrush = 40 x Normal
Number Closing Current Phase 120V 208V 240V 480V 600V 120V 208V 240V 480V 600V
CL00 450 Amps 1 0.6 1 1.2 1.7 2.1 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1
3 1.1 1.9 2.2 3.1 3.8 0.5 0.9 1.1 1.5 1.9
CL01 450 Amps 1 0.8 1.4 1.7 2.4 3.0 0.4 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.5
3 1.5 2.6 3.0 4.2 5.2 0.7 1.3 1.5 2.1 2.6
CL02 450 Amps 1 1.2 2.0 2.5 3.5 4.4 0.6 1.0 1.2 1.7 2.2
3 2.2 3.8 4.5 6.3 7.7 1.1 1.9 2.2 3.1 3.8
CL25 550 Amps 1 1.8 3.1 3.7 5.2 6.4 0.9 1.5 1.8 2.6 3.2
3 3.2 5.5 6.5 9.1 11.2 1.6 2.7 3.2 4.5 5.6
CL04 550 Amps 1 2.2 3.8 4.5 6.3 7.8 1.1 1.9 2.2 3.1 3.9
3 4.0 7.0 8.0 11.2 13.7 2.0 3.5 4.0 5.6 6.8
CL45 550 Amps 1 2.8 4.8 5.7 8.0 9.7 1.4 2.4 2.8 4.0 4.8
3 5 8.6 10 14.0 17 2.5 4.3 5 7.0 8.5
CL06 1000 Amps 1 3.4 5.9 6.8 9.5 12 1.7 2.9 3.4 4.7 6
3 6 10.4 12 16.8 21 3 5.2 6 8.4 10.5
CL07 1000 Amps 1 4.2 7.2 8.5 12 14.2 2.1 3.6 4.2 6.0 7.1
3 7.5 13 15 21 25 3.7 6.5 7.5 10.5 12.5
CL08 1000 Amps 1 5.7 10 11.4 16 20 2.8 5.0 5.7 8.0 10
3 10 17.3 20 28 35 5 8.6 10 14 16
CL09 1280 Amps 1 7.1 12.3 14.2 20 22.8 3.5 6.1 7.1 10 11.4
3 12.5 21.6 25 35 40 6.2 10.8 12.5 17.5 20
CL10 1280 Amps 1 8.5 14.7 17.1 24 28.5 4.2 7.3 8.5 12 14.2
3 15 26 30 42 50 7.5 13 15 21 25
CK75 1850 Amps 1 10 17.2 20 28 31.3 5 8.6 10 14 15.6
3 17.5 30.3 35 49 55 8.75 15.1 17.5 24.5 27.5
CK08 1850 Amps 1 11.4 19.7 22.8 32 34.2 5.7 9.8 11.4 16 17.1
3 20 34.6 40 56 60 10 17.3 20 28 30
CK09 2500 Amps 1 14.2 24.6 28.5 40 48.5 7.1 12.3 14.2 20 24.2
3 25 43.3 50 70 85 12.5 21.6 25 35 42.5
CK95 3700 Amps 1 18.5 32.0 37.1 52 62.8 9.2 16.0 18.5 26 31.4
3 32 55.4 65 91 110 16 27.7 32 45 55
CK10 7000 Amps 1 22.8 39.5 45.7 64 85.7 11.4 19.7 22.8 32 42.8
3 40 69.3 80 112 150 20 34.6 40 56 75
CK11 7000 Amps 1 28.5 49.4 57.1 80 97.1 14.2 24.7 28.5 40 48.5
3 50 86.6 100 140 170 25 43.3 50 70 85
CK12 8400 Amps 1 45.7 79.2 91.4 128 160 22.8 39.6 45.7 64 80
3 80 138.6 160 224 280 40 69.3 80 112 140
Maximum Three-Phase kVAR Rating for Switching Capacitors

Catalog 10,000 Amps RMS 22,000 Amp RMS
Number Maximum Available Fault Current Maximum Available Fault Current
200V 230V 460V 575V 200V 230V 460V 575V
CL00 3 3 5 5.7 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.8
CL01 435 4.5 9.5 11 2.2 2.2 4.5 5.5
CL02 6.5 6.5 11 12.5 3.2 3.2 5.5 6.2
CL25 9 9 15 17.5 4.5 4.5 7.5 8.2
CL04 12.5 12.5 21 24 6.2 6.2 10.5 12
CL45 17 17 30 35 8.5 8.5 15 17.5
CL06 22 22 40 50 11 11 20 25
CL07 25 25 45 65 12.5 12.5 22.5 32.5
CL08 30 30 50 70 15 15 25 35
J CL09 40 40 65 95 20 20 32.5 47.5
CL10 50 50 80 120 25 25 40 60
CK75 60 60 100 150 60 60 100 150
CK08 70 70 130 175 70 70 130 175
CK09 95 95 165 230 95 95 165 230
CK95 105 105 190 288 105 105 190 288
CL10 135 135 260 370 135 135 260 370
CL11 190 190 325 450 190 190 325 450
CK12 250 250 400 600 250 250 400 600
J18
Application Data
Non-Motor Loads
Application Rated
Utilization in Category AC-1, General Use

CL Contactors CK Contactors
3-pole Contactors
00 01 02 25 04 45 06 07 08 09 10 75 08 09 95 10 11 12
Max. operational current 40°C A 25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 500 600 650
at ambient temperature 55°C A 25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 425 510 546
of: (for all voltages) 70°C A 20 20 25 25 41 44 62 78 81 80 80 130 155 175 270 335 432 468
CL Contactors CK Contactors
4-pole Contactors
01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 08 09 95 10 11 12
Max. operational current 40°C A 25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 500 550 650
at ambient temperature 55°C A 25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 425 462 543
of: (for all voltages) 70°C A 20 25 28 41 52 78 88 80 155 175 270 335 462 468
Horsepower/kilowatt ratings are shown below

Catalog General Purpose 1 Phase-HP A 3 Phase-HP A Power In
Number Ratings Max. FLA 115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V 380/400V kW A
CL00 25 10 .5 (9.8) 1.5 (10) 3 (11) 3 (9.6) 5 (7.6) 7.5 (9) 4 (9)
CL01 25 13.8 .75 (13.8) 2 (12) 3 (11) 3 (9.6) 7.5 (11) 10 (11) 5.5 (12)
CL02 32 17.5 1 (16) 3 (17) 5 (17.5) 5 (15.2) 10 (14) !5 (17) 7.5 (18)
CL25 32 22,22,17À 1.5 (20) 3 (17) 5 (17.5) 7.5 (22) 15. (21) 15 (17) 11 (25)
CL04 54 32A 2 (24) 5 (28) 10 (32) 10 (28) 20 (27) 25 (27) 16 (32)
CL45 55 34,34,27À 3 (34) 5 (28) 10 (32) 10 (28) 25 (34) 25 (27) 18.5 (40)
CL06 80 48 3 (34) 7.5 (40) 15 (48) 15 (42) 30 (40) 40 (41) 22 (50)
CL07 100 62 5 (56) 10 (50) 20 (62) 20 (54) 40 (52) 50 (52) 30 (65)
CL08 110(O) 102 (E) 68 5 (56) 15 (68) 20 (62) 25 (68) 50 (65) 60 (62) 37 (80)
CL09 140 (O) 120 (E) 80 7.5 (80) 15 (68) 25 (78) 30 (80) 60 (77) 75 (77) 45 (95)
CL10 140 (O) 120 (E) 104,96,80À 10 (100) 20 (88) 30 (92) 40 (104) 75 (96) 75 (77) 55 (105)
CK75 150 140 10 (100) 25 (110) 40 (120) 50 (130) 100 (124) 125 (125) 75 (154)
CK08 175 156 15 (135) 30 (136) 50 (149.5) 60 (145) 125 (156) 125 (125) 90 (185)
CK09 200 192 – – 60 (169.4) 75 (192) 150 (180) 150 (144) 132 (250)
CK95 310 302 – – 100 (285) 100 (248) 250 (302) 300 (289) 160 (310)
CK10 500 398 – – 125 (358) 150 (360) 300 (361) 400 (382) 220 (420)
CK11 600 480 – – 150 (414) 200 (480) 400 (477) 500 (472) 280 (550)
CK12 650(E) 750 (O) 602 – – 200 (552) 250 (602) 500 (590) 600 (574) 375 (700)
J19
Application Data
Publication References
Construction Equipment and Components
Publication Description Stocking Location
GEP-1100 Buylog Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products Bloomington
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
GET-2779 Application and Selection Guide for Molded Case Circuit Breakers Bloomington
GEZ-7000 MCCB Time-Current Curves Bloomington
GET-7002 Spectra RMS Molded Case Circuit Breakers Bloomington
Power Break Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
GET-6211 Selection and Application Bloomington
GEZ-7001 Time-Current Curves Bloomington
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
GEI-86150 Installation and Operation Instructions Bloomington
GEK-7310 Maintenance Manual Bloomington
GEZ-7002 Type AKR Time-Current Curves Bloomington
GES-6227 Type AKR MicroVersaTrip RMS-9 Time Current Curves Bloomington
GES-6228 MicroVersaTrip Ground Fault Time-Current Curves Bloomington
Disconnect Switches
GET-6205 Type HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches, Technical Bloomington
GEZ-7003 Type HPC Time-Current Curves Bloomington
Ground Fault Protective Products
GET-2964 Ground Break Systems Bloomington
GEZ-7003 Ground Break Time-Current Curves Bloomington
Panelboards
GET-6592 “A” series Tech. Specifications Bloomington
GEA-11316 A Series Bloomington
Factory Automation Products

PublicationÀ Description Stocking Location
GE Fanuc Programmable Logic Control
GFW-0067 Automation Solutions Catalog Charlottesville
GE Fanuc I/O
GEK-90486 Genius I/O System User’s Manual Charlottesville
GFA-089 Genius I/O System Charlottesville
GEI-86150 Installation and Operation Instructions Bloomington
GFA-150 Field Control™ Charlottesville
GFT-298 VersaMax I/O Charlottesville
GFA-180 VersaMax Charlottesville
Motor Control Center Equipment

Spectra Series and 8000-Line MCC
DEA-036 Spectra Series Product Brochure Bloomington
GEF-4628 8000-Line Renewal Parts Bulletin Bloomington
GEH-4961 Installation and Maintenance (Instructions) Bloomington
À For more information visit our website at www.gefanuc.com/default2.htm
J20
Application Data
Publication References
General Purpose Controls
GEP-1260 Control Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products Bloomington
Magnetic Motor Starters
GEA-10928 300-Line Magnetic Motor Starters, Descriptive Bloomington
GEH-5190 300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVNR Bloomington
GEH-5190 300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVR and 2-Speed Bloomington
Pilot Devices
GEA-10877 CR104P Push-buttons and Pilot Lights Bloomington
Relays and Timers
GEA-10639 CR122B, CR122BT, Series A Relays Bloomington
GEH-4115 CR120B AC Relays Bloomington
GEH-4120 CR120B Latched Relays Bloomington
GEH-4147 CR122B Time-Delay Relays Bloomington
GEH-4139 CR122BP Time-Delay Relays Bloomington
GEH-6435 Spectra ECM Instructions Bloomington
DET-069 Spectra ECM Product Brochure Bloomington
Variable Speed DrivesÀ
GEI-100364 AF 300P User Guide Fort Wayne
GEI-100363 AF 300G User Guide Fort Wayne
Solid State Starters
DEH-40397 ASTAT–CD Plus User Manual Bloomington
GEH-6533 ASTAT–CD Plus Instructions Bloomington
DEH-40396 ASTAT–IBP Plus User Manual Bloomington
DEH-40417 ASTAT–IBP Plus Instructions Bloomington
Web Access
À G11/P11 Drives — www.ge.com/industrialsystem/drives/catalog/af300g11/index.htm
J21
Application Data
Electrical Data Defining the Load
Rotating Motion Linear Motion

Motor horsepower output may also be calculated as follows:
Horsepower
HP = V x A x Pf x EFF HP = T x N HP = F x V
746 5250 33,000
Where: T = Torque (lb-ft) Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)

Rules of Thumb (Approximation) N = Speed (RPM) V = Velocity (FPM)
At 1800 RPM, a motor develops a 3 lb. – ft. per HP. HP = T x N HP = F x V
At 1200 RPM, a motor develops 4.5 lb – ft. per HP. 63,000 396,000
At 460 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 1.25 amp per HP.
At 230 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 2.5 amp per HP. Where: T = Torque (lb-in) Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)
N = Speed (RPM) V = Velocity (in/min)
Conversion Formulas
Accelerating Torque/Force
To find Alternating Current Three-Phase TA = WK2 x N FA = W x V
Amperes when HP x 746
308t 1933t
Horsepower is known 1.73 x V x Eff x fp
Amperes when Kw x 1000
Kilowatts is known 1.73 x V x pf Where: TA = Accelerating torque Where: FA = Accelerating Force
Amperes when Kva x 1000 (lb ft) (lb-ft)
Kva is known 1.73 x V WK2 = Total system inertia W = Weight (lb)
Kilowatts 1.73 x A x V x pf that must be accelerated. V = Change in velocity (FPM)
1000 This includes motor rotor, t = Time (sec.)
Kva 1.73 x A x V speed reducer (if used),
1000 and load. (lb-ft2)
Horsepower - 1.73 x A x V x Eff x pf
(Output) 746
KW (alternating current) = KVA x Power Factor
Torque
KW (direct current) = V x A x .001 T= Fx R
KWH = KW x Hours
HP = KW Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)
Motor Efficiency F = Force (lb)
R = Radius (ft)
Values Ohms Law
V=Volts I=E/R
WK2 – reflected
A or I = Amperes (amps) R=E/I
Work/P = Watts/Power E=IXR
KW=Kilowatts P=IXE Reflected WK2 = WK2 of Load
KwH=Kilowatt Hours P=IXIXR (Reduction Ratio)2
KVA=Kilovolt Amperes
Pf=Power Factor, Table This is for either belt or gear reductions.
Ph= Phase Factor, Table
FPM to RPM
RPM = FPM
kVAR Calculation When Motor Operating .262 x (diameter in inches)
Characteristics Are Known
If motor HP, full-load power factor (PF) and efficiency (eff)
are known, its easy to calculate the correct kVAR necessary
to improve PF to any value.
Example: 75HP, 3600 RPN, NEMA B motor with full-load PF of 87% and eff. of 92% cor-
rected to 95%PF
J Original PF = .87 Cos: Tan: = .567

Desired PF = .95 = Cos: Tan: = .329
Difference = .238
KW = HPx.746 or 75x.746 = 62
Eff. .902
.238 X 62 = 14.8 kVAR (use 15 kVAR)
J22
Application Data
Electrical Data Other Useful Formulas
Gear Ratio - Most Favorable

Centrifugal Loads
GR = WK2 + Tf2 + Tf
Flow Rate: Flow1 = RPM1
WKM2 TM2 TM
Flow2 = RPM2
Where: WK2 = WK2 of the load
Torque: Torque1 = RPM1 2
WK2M = WK2 of the motor
Torque2 = RPM2
Tf = Friction torque of the laod
TM = Average motor torque during acceleration
Pressure: Pres1 = RPM1 2
Pres2 = RPM2
If friction torque is low compared to accelerating torque this can
be reduced to:
Horsepower: BHP1 = RPM1 3
BHP2 = RPM22 GR = WK2
WK2
Fans & Blowers: BHP = CFM x PSF
3300 x (fan efficiency) Duty Cycle Calculations
BH = CFM x PIW HP = HP21t + HP22t + HP3t2 + etc

6350 x (fan efficiency) RMS t 1 + t2 + t3 + etc
BHP = CFM x PSI

229 x (fan efficiency)
Pumps: BHP = GPM x TH x (specific gravity)

3960 x (pump efficiency)
BHP = GPM x PSI x (specific gravity)

1713 x (pump efficiency)
Where: BHP = Brake horsepower

PSF = Pounds per square foot
PIW = Pressure in inches of water guage
PSI = Pounds per square inch
GPM = Gallons per minute
TH = Total head (including friction)
J23
Drawings/Tests
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System Number the front view arrangement from left-to-right 1, 2, 3 …
or A, B, C … Line off the space required for the top and bottom
The General Electric Engineering Documentation System will horizontal wireways. Then line off the interconnecting vertical
accept a 3-character unit address designation consisting of wireway in each vertical section. Note that some units
a combination of letters and/or numbers (such as: 12J, ABC, (including large starters, transformers, panelboards, etc.) may
A1D, 2AD, etc.). The recommended unit addressing system is require full width of section and that no separate vertical
illustrated and described in the following paragraphs. wireway door will be adjacent to these units.
Note: Should customer’s (3-character maximum) unit numbering system differ from Example:
the following GE unit addressing system, then both can appear when requested on the
CAD-generated motor control center unit summary drawings issued from the factory. Assume that the top horizontal wireway is to be 12 inches
high. In the first section a full-voltage non-reversing NEMA
Benefits Size 1 combination starter is to be installed in the first available
When ordering NEMA Class I or II motor control centers where position below the top horizontal wireway. Assuming
factory interconnections are required, this system produces conventional unit sizing (FVNR-1 equals 1X or 12-inch unit
a uniform numbering format for engineering documentation. height), the unit location assignment becomes:
The GE unit numbering system produces a unique unit address
designation. When wiremarkers are specified, it ensures 1 A D
consistency and ease of wire tracing/troubleshooting between Motor Control Center
factory-wired units and other devices within the motor control Vertical Section
center lineup such as programmable control I/O racks. Unit Location
General Continue lining off the unit space requirements for various
Typical 3-Character Designation 1 A D units and future spaces as required until the lineup is com-
Motor Control Center number/character plete and all spaces have been addressed. Notice that every
Vertical Section number/character unit location has a unique unit location designation. This
Unit Location (line number/character) unit designation will not be repeated again within the order.
Since every motor control center lineup also has a unique
Note: The motor control center number/character assignment may be a number (1, 2, panel catalog number, then the unit nameplate and catalog
3, 4, etc.) provided the number of MCC lineups on an order does not exceed 9. If 10 or
greater, then the motor control center character should be a letter of the alphabet (A,
number will never be duplicated.
B, C, D, etc.). Likewise, the vertical section character should be an alphabetic entry for
lineups exceeding 9 sections. Example: ML # 0447X0542L01 – 1AD
MCC Cat Number
The outline summary drawing furnished with the equipment Unit Location
cross-references the unit location and the service designation
specified for each unit. A reminder about future spaces: If a 2X future space is to be
arranged into two 1X compartments, then the outline sketch
must be lined off into 1X compartments with individual unit
Motor Control Center No. 1
addresses. This will ensure that the necessary unit doors
A B C D
and shelves will be provided by the factory.
A
B
C
1AD
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
K
N
O
Front View
K1
Drawings/Tests
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System

Mebane CAD documentation system permits the engineer
to perform virtually all design functions without the need of
traditional drafting tools and associated equipment. This
computer-based system is used to translate equipment
functional requirements into detailed equipment designs
and material lists. These computerized drawings are used in
the manufacturing process to increase product assembly
accuracy, repeatability and consistency. Standardization of
production procedures and methods has been improved
such that given devices are consistently located in the same
position on or within the equipment. Unit wiring is handled
in the same manner, resulting in improved wiring accuracy
and productivity.
The following drawing elements are included in the standard

documentation package. Customer will receive A-size
(81/2 x 11 inches) prints.
1) Lead Sheet Fig. 1

2) Outline Fig. 2
3) Summary Tables Fig. 3
4) Unit Elementaries Section K
1. Lead Sheet – Contains special Customer notes and manu-

facturing or test instructions.
2. Outline – Presents front view plan drawings showing the
physical arrangement of units and associated equipment
within the motor control center lineup.
3. Summary Tables – Provides all necessary functional detail
of each unit including nameplate inscriptions.
Fig. 1
K2
Drawings/Tests
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System
Fig. 2
> < INCLINE
UL UL UL UL 600
FVNR FVNR FDRCB/

ACC ADC
1 1.5
FDRCB/ SPACE
FRONT AAD ABD ACD ADD
VIEW FVNR FVNR FDRCB/ SPACE
1.5 1.5 ACE
FDRCB/
AAF ABF ACF ADF
FVNR FVNR FDRCB/ SPACE
1.5 1.5 ACG
FDRCB/ ADH
AAH ABH ACH
FVNR FVNR FDRCB/ FDRCB/
1.5 1 ACI ADI
SECT. HEIGHT 90 INCHES FDRCB/ FDRCB/
AAJ ABJ ACJ ADJ
1.5 1 ACK
FDRCB/
AAL ABL ACL ADL
1.5 1 ACM
FDRCB/ ADN
UL SECT. NO. AAN ABN ACN
X=SHIPPING
LENGTH
001 002
>=SPLICE
1 2 3 4
MOD SHEET
SECT. WXD FRONT 20X20 FRONT 20X20 FRONT 20X20 FRONT 20X20
VERT. BUS A
300 300 300 600/300
Fig. 3
UNIT SUMMARY EVOLUTION SERIES MCC
REQ. NO. ENG. NAME JBC DWG. FOR INSTALLATAION
PANEL CAT. NO. ISSUED 01/16/1996 REV. GE INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS DWG. NO. SH F01A
FRONT REV NO. 0 MEBANE, NC USA CONT. ON SH F01B
CAT# 273A7916P3FC D TOTAL NOT LABELED
UNIT CUST R S HP TRIP
W OL OL AUX
CB
UNIT ELEM CONN. S FUNCTION I KW FLA RPM SF FUSE/ FUSES INILK CATALOG
MOD UNIT
NAMEPLATE I Z HEATER RELAY
SW UL CSA SC CPT
LOC Z E K-KW CLIP BY NUMBER
SH NO E
CR123 TYPE 0 0 LABEL LABEL MARKER VA
AAD 6-MILL 100 200A FVNR 1 1 1.8 1000 1.150 C220A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150 IA52-102437
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
AAF 6-MILL 100 200A 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150
FVNR IA52-102438
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
AAH 6-MILL 200A 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150
100 FVNR IA52-102438
FEED END
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
AAJ 6-MILL 100 200A 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150
FVNR IA52-102438
DISCHARGE END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
AAL 6-MILL 1.5 1000 3 0 157
100 200A FVNR 1 2.4 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 UL 150 IA52-102439
DISCHARGE END
EXT. LUBE PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
AAN 6-MILL 100 200A 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150
FVNR IA52-102439
DISCHARGE END
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
ABD 7-MILL 100 200A 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150
FVNR IA52-102438
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
ABF 7-MILL 100 200A FVNR 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150 IA52-102438
FEED END
EXT. LUBE PUMP
ABH
RED RUN PTT LT
7-MILL
FEED END
100 200A FVNR 1 1.5 2.4 1000 1.150 C301A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150 IA52-102438
K
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
ABJ 7-MILL 100 200A FVNR 1 1 1.8 1000 1.150 C220A AMBIENT SELI 3 3 0 UL 157 150 IA52-102437
DISCHARGE END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
K3
Drawings/Tests
Paint Finish Packaging and Storage

Indoor Equipment Domestic Packaging
The standard Mebane paint system consists of the following Normally a motor control center Lineup is shipped in groups
two processes. of three vertical sections for ease of handling. Each shipping
split is mounted on a hardwood skid to facilitate moving by
Phase I–Cleaning rollers or fork-lift truck. Lifting eyes are also provided for
In a 7-stage spray washer, steel parts are cleaned and moving by crane. Shipping blocks are placed on the face of
sprayed in the controlled cleaning solutions. the sections to protect handles and devices. The shipping
splits are wrapped in clear stretch polyfilm to protect the
Stage Temperature Chemical Solution(s)
1–Cleaning 115-120° Ferro Clean GE
equipment from the usual dust and dirt encountered during
2–Rinse 105-118° None shipment. Necessary bus splice bars are included for connecting
3–Iron Phosphate 90-105° Secure Low Foam the shipping splits together.
4–Rinse Ambient None
5–Non Chrome Sealer Ambient Non Chrome Final Seal
6–Rinse Ambient None Export Crating
7–Deionized Rinse Ambient None The sections are bolted to a skid with a solid floor. The
equipment is then enclosed in a 3/8" plywood crate with 2 x 4
Cleaned steel parts enter a drying oven at 300-350°F. The reinforcing at the top and corners. Three 1 1/4" steel bands are
preceding operating parameters have been determined to placed horizontally around the crate for additional reinforcing.
produce an Iron Phosphate coating of a minimum of 150
milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Spec. TT-C-490. All equipment should be protected against moisture and
temperature extremes during shipment and storage. See
Phase II–Painting by Electro-static Powder Process Environmental Considerations in Section A (General). For
Primed metal parts are electrostatically coated with a powder prolonged shipping periods where export crating is involved,
paint consisting of the following: it is recommended the equipment space heaters (when
670-011 ANSI-61 Polyester Paint (Light Gray) specified) be wired for connecting to an external power source
while in transit, to minimize condensation.
Metal parts will enter drying oven at 375-400°F and remain
for 20 minutes. The standard color is ANSI-61 light gray with Storage
a gloss of 60±5, and a thickness of 1.5 mils. This system will If it is necessary to store the equipment for any length of
withstand a minimum of 1000 hour humidity test, plus 1000 time, the following precautions should be taken:
hours salt spray test. 1. Uncrate equipment.
2. Store in a clean, dry area at moderate temperature. Cover
with a suitable canvas or heavy-duty plastic cover to prevent
entrance of foreign material.
3. If equipment must be stored in cool or damp areas, not
only should the equipment be completely covered, but heat
should be provided to prevent condensation of moisture
in the equipment. Energize space heaters (if furnished in
the equipment) or place a standard 120-volt lamp rated
75 watts inside the bottom of each vertical section.
K4
Drawings/Tests
Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection Continuity Tests – Control Wiring and Power Cables
The correctness of the individual circuit wiring contained in
General each assembly and the assembly wiring interfaces shall be
The following summary description defines the standard verified as in accordance with the connection diagram, wiring
factory tests and inspections performed during manufacture. table, or elementary drawing. The continuity of each circuit
All GE motor control center equipment is tested and inspected shall be checked.
for conformance with NEMA ICS 18-2001. Production tests and
inspections encompass the verification of physical configuration Functional Operations Test
of assembly and workmanship, the mechanical adjustments All equipments shall be subjected to an operational test. The
of parts and components, and the sequencing and functional test shall verify the functional operation of the control and
operations of the control systems. These tests and inspections power circuits and related components, devices and sub-
are performed on manufactured products to verify conformance assemblies-modules under simulated operating conditions
of the equipment to a previously qualified design. The tests (excluding loading of the power circuits).
do not include type testing or other destructive tests on
equipment to be shipped to a customer. Any additional factory Devices
tests beyond those listed in the following paragraphs must be All devices, including subassemblies-modules, shall be oper-
referred to Mebane to verify availability of test facilities and ated, set and checked for their functional characteristics in
qualified manpower. Additional testing beyond the scope of accordance with the instructions for each and any additional
the following standard commercial tests will affect normal characteristics peculiar to a device:
shipment schedules. • Pick-up
• Drop-out
Production Tests • Contact wipe
The following list of inspection activities shall be performed to • Amperes
assure proper and correct materials, workmanship and for any • In-rush current
damage conditions in accordance with the manufacturing • Time-delay
documentation and drawings:
• Components, parts and material Contactors must pick-up and hold-in at or below the following
• Physical condition of components, parts, wire insulation percentage or rated coil voltage:
• Location and orientation of components and parts
Device Type Voltage Source Pick-up (Percentage)
• Finish–plating–painting DC DC 63
• Wire/cable type, size, insulating and clamping support AC AC 85À
DC AC with rectifier 70 with holding resistor
• Wire terminations, insulation removal and crimping of
DC AC with rectifier 75 with holding and pick-up resistor
terminals
• Tightness of electrical connections and torque of bus bar bolts À If a control power transformer is used, apply 90 percent voltage to primary
of transformer.
• Wire markers and terminal markers (where specified)
• Labeling of components, parts, etc.
• Tightness torque of assembly bolts and hardware
• Welds (spot only) Sequence and Timing Circuits
• Mechanical clearance Assemblies and systems involving sequential operation of
• Electrical clearance (potential hazards) devices and time delays shall be tested to assure that the
devices in the sequence function properly and in the order
Mechanical Operations Test intended.
Mechanical operating tests shall be performed to insure proper
functioning of operating mechanisms and interchangeability. Polarity – Phase-sensitive Circuits
The polarity of direct-current circuits and phase connections
a. The operation of shutters, mechanical interlocks, circuit- of alternating-current circuits shall be verified by application
breaker-door interlocks, operating handles, trip mechanisms, of power and measurement of the relative polarities and
solenoid armature travels, contact wipes, electromechanical phase sequence.
interlocks, physical clearances for mechanical and electrical
isolation including any additional mechanically related Grounding
operating functions shall be verified.
b. The interchangeability of removable units designed to be
The grounding circuits and buses shall be verified. K
interchangeable shall be verified as well as the rejection
functions of non-interchangeable units.
K5
Drawings/Tests
Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection Option – Insulation Resistance (Megger) tests
Insulation resistance tests measure the amount of circuit
High Potential – Insulation Tests
resistance to current leakage. This test is performed when
this resistance measurement is desired and so specified. A
Control Wiring Insulation Tests
nominal charge will be assessed.
A dielectric test (hi-pot) shall be performed on circuit wiring
to confirm the insulation resistance to withstand breakdown
The test voltage and minimum insulation resistance shall be
to a selected test voltage. The test voltage – amplitude and
selected as specified by the contract. Standard test values are:
waveshape, method of application and duration of time
applied – shall be specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001. a. 500 volts DC with 10 megohms minimum
b. 1000 volts DC with 1 megohm minimum
Power Cable Insulation and Isolation Test
Power cables and buses shall be tested, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground for insulation breakdown resistance
and circuit isolation as specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001.
Note: These test conditions are as specified for newly constructed equipment and
performed in a clean, temperature- and humidity-controlled factory environment.
The test voltages include the standard test voltage (two

times rated plus 1000), times 120 percent (for one-second
application).
Rated Circuit Voltage High Potential Duration

AC or DC Test Voltage of Test
120 1500 1 second
240 1800 1 second
480/600 2700 1 second
The frequency of the test voltage shall not be less than the
rated frequency of the equipment tested and shall be
essentially sinusoidal in wave shape.
Note: Consideration shall be made for low-voltage devices, semiconductors, meters,

instruments, transformers, grounding circuits, etc., in preparation for the dielectric tests.
Example of standard test report available on request for a nominal charge.
K6
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 1-4

Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
TB
61
Stab 60
M 51
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5)OL (6) 50
L3 (H-O-A Only) 5
K3 K6 T3 4
CB 3
(2) (3) (4) (3) (3) 2
(4) (4) 1A
OR
L2 K2 K5 1
T2 X2
LSW T3
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR T2
T1
L1 K1 K4 T1
(1) (3)
2FU M
(15) (16)
50 51
(2) (4)
H1 H2 (13) M (14)
(H1) (H2) 60 61
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
No Pilot Devices Red Ind. Light
M OL M
(A) (B) (7) (8) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
3 3 40
M M R
(12) (11) (12) (11) (1) (2)
2 2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
(2) IFU (1) GND
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
Red/Green Ind. Lights
GND
Start/Stop PB's
M
(A) (B) (7)OL (8)
3 40
START M
(13) STOP(14) (3) (10) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
1A 2 3 M R
(12) (11) (1) (2)
2
M
(12) (11)
M
2 (13) G
(14) (5) (6)
4
(2) IFU (1)

(2) IFU (1) 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 GND
GND
Start/Stop PB's
Red Ind. Light
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
SW
START(10) M
Hand Auto
M (13) STOP(14) (3) (A) (B) (7)
OL
(8)
(13) OFF (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
(14) 1A 2 3 40
1A 3 40
M R
(12) (11) (1) (2)
(15) (16) M
(11) (12)
x=Closed(MC) 5 2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
(2) IFU (1)
Start/Stop PB's
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 Red/Green Ind. Lights
GND
On/Off Switch START(10) M

(13) STOP(14) (3) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
1A 2 3 40
SSW
M
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7)OL (8) M R
3 40 (12) (11) (1) (2)
x=Closed(MC) 1A
M
(11) (12)
2
(13)
M
(14)
4
(5)
G
(6) L
L1
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 1-4

L1 L2 L3
TB
61
Stab 60
M 51
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5)OL (6) 50
L3 (H-O-A Only) 5
K3 K6 T3 4
CB 3
(2) (3) (4) (3) (3) 2
(4) (4) 1A
OR
L2 K2 K5 1
T2 X2
LSW T3
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR T2
T1
L1 K1 K4 T1
(1) (3)
2FU
(15) M (16)
50 51
(2) (4)
H1 H2 (13)
M (14)
(H1) (H2) 60 61
ASW
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1) (1B) (X1) To Remote
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 XB X1 Control Source X2
GND
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red Light
SW
Hand Auto
OFF M M
(13) (14) (A) (B) (7)OL (8) (A) (B) (7)
OL
(8)
1A 3 40 1A 3 40
TB
(15) (16) M R M X1
(11) (12) (1) (2) (12) (11)
x=Closed(MC) 5 2 5 2 61
60
51
(2) IFU (1) 50
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 5
GND 4
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
3
Red/Green Lights 2
1A
SW
Hand Auto 1
(13) OFF
(14) (A)
M
(B) (7)
OL
(8) X2
1A 3 40
(15) (16) M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
x=Closed(MC) 5 2
M
(13) (14) G
(5) (6)
4
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
On/Off SW
Red Light
SSW
M OL
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
x=Closed(MC)
M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
On/Off SW
Red/Green Light
SSW
M OL
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
x=Closed(MC)
M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
2
M
L (13) (14)
4
(5)
G
(6)
L2
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 5-6

Typical Circuit Diagrams OL OL
(1) (2)
S-5 S-6 20 23 TB
61
(3) (4) 60
21 51
50
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 (5) (6)
(H-O-A Only) 5
22 4
3
(5) (6) (5)
M
(6) (5) (6) (5)
M
(6) (1) (2)
2
1A
L3 K3 T3 L3 K3 3CT T3 1
CB CB
(3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) (1) (2)
X2
OR OR
L2 K2 T2 L2 K2 2CT T2
LSW LSW
(1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) MOTOR
(2)
L1 K1 T1 L1 K1 T1
ICT
3FU 3FU 2FU 2FU GND

(2) (2) (1) (3) (4)
(1) (3) (4)
H1 K1 K2 H2 H1 K1 K2 H2
CR M
(1) (2) (A) (B) M
CR
41 (3) (4) (A) (B) M (16)
(15)
41 50 51
(13) M (14)
2FU 2FU 2FU 2FU 60 61
(1) (2) (H1) (H2) (4) (3)
(1) (2) (H1) (H2) (4) (3)
H1 H2
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
No Pilot Devices Red Ind. Light
CR
(A)
CR
(B) (7)OL (8) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
3 40 3 40
M R
M (12) (11) (1) (2)
(12) (11)
2 2
(2) IFU (1)

(2) IFU (1) 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) GND
X2
GND
Red/Green Ind. Lights
Start/Stop PB's
CR
(A) (B) (7)OL (8)
START CR 3
(13) STOP(14) (9) (10) (A) (B) (7)
OL
(8)
40
1A 2 3 40
M R
(12) (11) (1) (2)
M 2
(12) (11)
M
(13) (14) G
(5) (6)
4
(2) IFU (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 (2) IFU (1)
GND 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Start/Stop PB's
SW Red Ind. Light
Hand Auto
OFF CR
(13) (14) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
1A START(10) CR
3 40 (13) STOP(14) (9) (A) (B) (7)
OL
(8)
1A 2 3 40
(15) (16) M
(11) (12)
5 2 M R
x=Closed(MC) (12) (11) (1) (2)
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
Start/Stop PB's
On/Off Switch Red/Green Ind. Lights
SSW
CR START(10) CR
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7)OL (8) (13) STOP(14) (9) (A) (B) (7)OL (8)
1A 3 40 1A 2 3 40
x=Closed(MC)
M M R
(11) (12) (12) (11) (1) (2)
2
M
(13) (14) (5)
G
(6)
L
L3
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 5-6

OL OL
S-5 S-6 (1)
20
(2)
23 TB
61
(3) (4) 60
21 51
50
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 (5) (6)
(H-O-A Only) 5
22 4
3
M M 2
(5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6) (1) (2)
1A
L3 K3 T3 L3 K3 3CT T3 1
CB CB
(3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) (1) (2)
X2
OR OR
L2 K2 T2 L2 K2 2CT T2
LSW LSW
(1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) MOTOR
(2)
L1 K1 T1 L1 K1 T1
ICT
3FU 3FU 3FU 3FU GND

(2) (2) (1) (3) (4)
(1) (3) (4)
H1 K1 K2 H2 H1 K1 K2 H2
CR M
(1) (2) (A) (B) M
CR
41 (3) (4) (A) (B) M
(15) (16)
41 50 51
(13) M (14)
2FU 2FU 2FU 2FU 60 61
(H1) (H2) (1) (2) (H1) (H2) (4) (3)
(1) (2) (4) (3)
H1 H2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red Light
SW
Hand Auto
OFF CR OL
(13) (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
(15) M R
(16) (11) (12) (1) (2)
x=Closed(MC) 5 2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red/Green Lights
SW
Hand Auto
OFF CR OL
(13) (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
(15) (16) M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
x=Closed(MC) 5 2
M
(13) G
(14) (5) (6)
4
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
On/Off SW Red Light
SSW
CR OL
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
x=Closed(MC)
M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
2
(2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
On/Off SW
Red/Green Lights
SSW
CR OL
(13) Off On (14) (A) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 40
x=Closed(MC)
M R
(11) (12) (1) (2)
2
L (13)
M
(14) (5)
G
(6)
4
L4
Typical Circuits
FVR Size 1-4

L1 L2 L3
R
(5) (6)
Stab
(3) (5) F OL
(6) (5) (6) (5) (6) TB F
L3 K3 9 (17) (18)
(3) (4) K6 T3 8 50 51
CB 5
(3) 3 (17) R (18)
(2) OR (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) 1A 52 53
L2 K2 (1) (2) K5 T2 1 F
X2 (15) (16)
LSW 60 61
T3
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR T2 (15) R (16)
T1 62 63
L1 K1 K4 T1
(1) (3)
2FU
(2) (4)
H1 H2
(H1) (H2)
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
Amber/Red/Green/
No Pilot Devices
Ind. Lights
① F
F R (7)OL (8)
(12) R(11)(A) (B) OL
(7) (8) (12) (11)(A) (B)
3 6 40 3 6 40
①
F F (13) R
(14) (13) (14) (1) (2)
8 8
①
F R F R
(12) (11) (A) (B) (12) (11) (A) (B)
5 7 5 7
①
R R A
(14) (13 (14) (13) (17) (18)
9 9
F R G
(15) (16) (15) (16) (9) (10)
16 13
(2) IFU (1)

(2) IFU (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
GND
Rev/Fwd/Stop PB
Fwd/Rev/Stop PB Amber/Red/Green Lights
STOP FWD R F OL
STOP FWD R F (13) (14) (8) (6) (12) (11) (A) (B) (7) (8)
(13) (14) (8) (6) (12) (11) (A) (B) (7)OL (8) 1A
1A 3 6 40
3 6 40
F (13) R
(14) (11) (12)
(14) F (13)
8
8
REV F R
REV F R (21) (22) (12) (11) (A) (B)
(21) (22) (12) (11) (A) (B) 5 7
5 7
R (14) R (13) (17)

A
(18)
(14) (13)
9
9
F R G
(15) (16) (15) (16) (9) (10)
16 13
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
Rev-Off-Fwd SW
Rev-Off-Fwd SW Amber/Red/Green Light
SW
SW R O F F
R O F (13) (14) (12) R (11) (A) (B) (7)
OL
(8)
F
(12) R (11) (A)
OL 1A 3 6 40
(13) (14) (B) (7) (8)
1A 3 6 40
F R
(14) (13) (1) (2)
F 8
(13) (14)
8
F R
(15) (16) (12) (11) (A) (B)
F R X=Closed (MC) 5 7
(15) (16) (12) (11) (A) (B)
X=Closed (MC)
5 7
R A
(14) (13) (17) (18)
9
R
(13) (14) G
① Polarity sensitive (all options).
9
F R
(15) (16) (15) (16)
16 13
(9) (10)
L
L5
Typical Circuits
RVAT Size 2-6

Size 2, 3-65, 80% Taps
Size 4, 5, 6-50, 65, 80% Taps optional
Power Factor Capacitor
L1 L2 L3
TB
IS AT 53
(5) (6) 52
R (FC) (3C) (1C) (0C) OL 51
* (5) (6) (5) (6) (2C) 0C 50
L3 K3 (3) (4)
(4) T3 (H-O-A Only) 5
CB 2S
(6) 4
FB (FB) (3B) (1B) (0B) (3) 2S 3
* (3)
OR
(4) (3) (4) (2B) 0B
(1)
(5) 2
1A
L2 K2 (1) (2) 2S T2
(2) 1
LSW FA (FA) (3A) (1A) (0A) X2
* (1) (2) (1) (2) (2A) 0A MOTOR
T3
L1 K1 T1 T2
Size 2-4 T1
Size 5 and 6 CT Operated
(2) 3FU (1) 3FU (4)

(3)
H1 K1 K2 H2
* Stab-in up to 5
TR 1S 2S R
(C) (NO) (5) TR (3) (13) (14) (A) (B) (13) (14)
43 TO 44 45 46
Inst.
1S
(A) (B)
(15) R (16)
2S R 50 51
(5) TR (1) (13) (14) (A) (B)
R
TC 47 48 (21) (22)
52 53
2FU 2FU
(1) (2) (4) (3)
(H1) (H2)
(2) IFU (1) T

T
(2) IFU (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
GND
Start/Stop PB's
Red/Green Ind. Lights On/Off Switch
OTT SSW
START(10) TR
(13) STOP(14) (3) L1
OL
L2 (7) (8) (1) (2) TR OL OTT
1A (13) Off On (14) L1 L2 (7) (8) (11) (12)
2 3 40 39
TDAE 1A 3 TDAE 40 39
(10 Sec.) x=Closed(MC)
IS R (10 Sec.)
(11) (12) (1) (2) IS
(12) (11)
R 2
(11) (12) R
(12) (11)
R
(15) G
(16) (5) (6)
T
4 (2) IFU (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
(2) IFU (1) T
GND
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 On/Off SW
GND Red/Green Lights
Hand – Off – Auto SW
Red/Green Lights SSW
TR OL OTT
SW (13) Off On (14) L1 L2 (7) (8) (11) (12)
Hand Auto OTT
OFF TR 1A 3 TDAE 40 39
(13) (14) L1 L2 (7)OL (8) (1) (2) x=Closed(MC)
1A 3 39 (10 Sec.)
40
TDAE IS R
(10 Sec.) (11) (12) (1) (2)
(15) (16)
IS R 2
(11) (12) (1) (2)
5 R
x=Closed(MC) (11) (12)
R
(11) (12) R
(15) (16) G
(5) (6)
R 4
(15) (16) G
(5) (6)
4
T
(2) IFU (1) T (2) IFU (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
X2
GND GND
Hand – Off – Auto SW On/Off SW
Red Light Red Light
SW SSW
Hand Auto OTT OTT
TR TR OL
(13) OFF
(14) L1 L2 (7)OL (8) (1) (2) (13) Off On (14) L1 L2 (7) (8) (11) (12)
1A 3 40 39 1A 3 TDAE 40 39
TDAE x=Closed(MC)
(10 Sec.) (10 Sec.)
(15) (16)
IS R IS R
(11) (12) (1) (2) (11) (12) (1) (2)
x=Closed(MC) 5
L (11)
R
(12)
R
(11) (12)
2
L6
Typical Circuits
2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4

TB
9 FS
Note: See GEM-1000A SS SOL 8 (17) (18)
(5) (6) (5) (6)
K6 T3 5 50 51
3 FS
(3) (4) (3) (4) 1A (15) (16)
60 61
K5 T2 1
X2 SS
(17) (18)
(1) (2) (1) (2) T13 52 53
L1 L2 L3
K4 T1 T12
STAB MOTOR T11 SS
(15) (16)
FS FOL T3
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6) 62 63
T13
T2
L3 K3 K9 T1
CB
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
L2 K2 K8 T12
LSW
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)
L1 K1 K7 T11
(1) (2)
2FU
H1 (3) (4) H2
(H1) (H2)
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND GND
Amb/Red/Grn Ind.
No Pilot Devices
Lights
1
FS SS SOL FOL SOL
FS SS FOL
(12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8) (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
3 6 40 39 3 6 40 39
1
SS SS A
(13) (14) (13) (14) (1) (2)
8 8
SS FS SS FS
(12) (11) (A) (B) (12) (11) (A) (B)
5 7 5 7
1
FS FS R
(13) (14) (13) (14) (17) (18)
9 9
SS FS G
(15) (16)(15) (16) (9) (10)
16 13
(2) IFU (1)

(2) IFU (1) 1 X1 (X1) (X2)
X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 GND
GND Fast-Slow-Off-Auto
SW
Fast/Slow/Stop PB
SW
(13) F S O A FS SS SOL FOL
FS (14) (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
STOP SLOW SS SOL FOL 1A 3 6 40 39
(13) (14) (5) (6) (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
1A 3 6 40 39
SS
(14) (13)
SS 8
(13) (14)
8
(15) (16) (12) IS (11)(A)FS (B)
FAST SS FS 5 7
(21) (22) (12) (11) (A) (B)
5 7
FS
(25) (26) (14) (13)
FS 14 9
(13) (14)
9
(27) (28)
x=Closed (MC)
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

1 X1 (X1) (X2) 1 X1 (X1) (X2)
X2 Fast - Slow- Auto-SW X2
SW GND GND
AMB/Red/Grn Ind.
F S O A FS SOL FOL Fast/Slow/Stop PBs
(13) (14) SS
(12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
39 Amb/Red/Grn Lights
1A 3 6 40
SS R STOP SLOW FS SS SOL FOL

(14) (13) (1) (2) (13) (14) (5) (6) (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
8 3 6 40
1A
IS FS SS A
(15) (16) (11) (12)(A) (B) (13) (14) (1) (2)
5 7 8
FS FAST SS FS
(25) (26) (14) (13) R (21) (22) (12) (11) (A) (B)
(17) (18)
9 5 7
FS R
(27) (28) (13) (14) (17) (18)
SS FS 3
SS FS G
(15) (16) (15) (16)
(16)
x=Closed(MC)
(13)
(9)
G
(10)
(15) (16) (15) (16)
(16) (13)
(9) (10)
L
L7
Typical Circuits
2S1W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4

Note: See GEM-1000A SS SOL TB
(5) (6) (5) (6) FS FOL
T3 (5) (6) (5) (6) 9
K6
K6 T5 8
(3) (4) (3) (4)
(3) (4) (3) (4)
5
K5 T2 3
Constant HP Constant or K5 T4 1A
(1) (2) (1) (2) Variable Torque 1
(1) (2) (1) (2)
K4 T1
K4
X2
(7) (8) T4
T6 T6
(7) (8) T2 T5
T3
T4
MOTOR T3
L1 L2 L3 (9) (10) MOTOR
L1 L2 L3 (9) (10) T2
STAB
FS T1 T1
(3) FOL (6) STAB
(5) (6) (5) (6) (5) SS SOL (6)
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5)
L3 K3 K9 T5
CB L3 K3 K9 T3 FS
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) CB (17) (18)
OR (2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4) 50 51
L2 K2 K8 T4 OR
LSW L2 K2 K8 T2 FS
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) LSW (15) (16)
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 60 61
L1 K1 K7 T6
(1) (3) L1 K1 K7 T1 SS
2FU (1) (3) (17) (18)
2FU 52 53
H1 (2) (4) H2 SS
(H1) (H2) H1 (2) (4) H2 (15) (16)
(H1) (H2) 62 63
(2) IFU (1) (2) IFU (1)

(X1) (X2) 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
1 X1 X2
GND GND
Amb/Red/Grn Ind.
No Pilot Devices Lights
1 1
FS FS SS SOL FOL
SS SOL FOL (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
(12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
3 6 40 39
3 6 40 39
1 1
SS A
SS (13) (14) (1) (2)
(13) (14)
8
8
1 1
SS FS
SS FS (12) (11) (A) (B)
(12) (11) (A) (B) 7
5
5 7
1
1
FS R
FS (13) (14) (17) (18)
(13) (14)
9
9 SS FS G
(15) (16) (15) (16) (9) (10)
(2) IFU (1) 16 13
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 (2) IFU (1)
GND
1 X1 (X1) (X2) Fast-Slow-Off-Auto SW
Fast/Slow/Stop PB's X2
AMB/Red/Grn Lights SW GND AMB/Red/Grn Ind.
(13) F S O A FS SS SOL FOL
(14) (12) (11) (A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
STOP SLOW FS SS SOL FOL 1A 3 6 40 39
(13) (14) (5) (6) (12) (11)(A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
1A 3 6 40
SS A
(14) (13) (1) (2)
SS A 8
(13) (14) (1) (2)
8
(15) (16) (12)SS (11) (A)FS (B)
FAST SS FS 5 7
(21) (22) (12) (11) (A) (B)
5 7
FS R
(25) (26) (14) (13) (17) (18)
FS R 14 9
(13) (14) (17) (18)
9
SS FS
G (27) (28)
(15) (16) (15) (16) (9) (10)
16 13
x=Closed (MC)
1 (2) IFU (1) SS FS G

X1 (X1) (X2) (15) (16) (15) (16) (9) (10)
X2 Fast - Slow- Off - 16 13
GND
Auto-SW
SW (2) IFU (1)

F S O A FS 1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
(13) (14) SS SOL FOL
(12) (11) (A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8) GND
1A 3 6 39
40
Fast/Slow/Stop PB
SS
(14) (13)
8 FS SOL FOL
STOP SLOW SS
(13) (14) (5) (6) (12) (11) (A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
SS FS 3 6 40 39
(15) (16) (11) (A) (B) 1A
(12)
5 7
SS
(13) (14)
FS 8
(25) (26) (14) (13)
14 9 FAST SS
(21) (22) FS
(12) (11) (A) (B)
5 7
(27) (28)
FS
(13) (14)
L 1 Polarity sensitive (all options).
x=Closed(MC)
3
L8
Typical Circuits
2S-PW Size 1-5

M2 OL2
(5) (6) (5) (6)
K9 T9
(3) (4) (3) (4)

K8 T8
L1 L2 L3 (1) (2) (1) (2) For 9 Leads - WYE

K7 T7 Connect Term. 4.5.6
STAB MOTOR
together at motor
M1 OL1 (6)
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) Terminal Box
L3 K3 K6 T3
CB For 9 Leads - Delta
(2) (3)
OR
(4) (3) (4) (3) (4) Connect Term. 4 & 8, 5 & 9,
L2 LSW
K2 K5 T2 6 & 7 together in three
separate pairs at motor
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) terminal box
L1 K1 K4 T1
Size 5 CT Operated Overload
61
(2) 3FU (1) (3) 3FU (4)
60
H1 K1 K2 H2
51
50
M1 7
TR
(13) (14) (A) (B)
4
43 3
2
1A
M2
(67) TR (68) (B)
1
(A)
X2
TC 44
T9
T8
T7
T3
(1) 2FU (2) (4) 2FU (3)
T2
H1A (H1) (H2) H2A T1
T
(2) IFU (1)
TB
1 X1 (X1) (X2)
X2
Gnd
SW PB
TR OL1 OL2 M2
Off On
(13) (14) (A1) (A2) (7) (8) (7) (8) (21) (22)
JPR 40 38 50 51
3
1A
X-Closed (MC)
M1 R M2
(11) (12) (1) (2) (15) (16)
2 60 61
PB
M2
(11) (12)
7
M2 G
(13) (14) (5) (6)
4
PB
L
L9
Typical Circuits
Wye-Delta Open Transition

WYE - Delta 2M
(1) (2)
Open Transition
K9 T6
rpe GE M–034E2 S
Fig .1 6 (2) (1)
K10
(3) (4)
K8 T4
(4) (3)
(5) (6)
K7 T5
L1 L2 L3
(6) (5)
STAB 1M MOTOR
(3) (5) 1OL
(6) (5) (6) (5) (6)
L3 K3 K6 T3
CB
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
LSW K2 K5
L2 T2
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)

L1 K1 K4 T1
Size 5CT Operated
(2) 3FU (1) (3) 3FU (4)
H1 K1 K2 H2
CR 1M
(13) (14) (A) (B)
44
TR
(A1) (A2) 61
DAET 60
(10 sec.) (H-O-A only) 5
TR S
(55) (56) (A) (B) 4
TD 45 3
2M
2
TR S
(67) 8)(6 (11) (12) (A) (B) 1A
TC 46 47 1
X2
(1) 2FU (2) (4) 2FU (3) TB
(H1) (H2)
H1A H2A T6
(2) IFU (1)
T T5
1 X1 (X1) (X2) T4
X2
T3
Gnd
T2
T1
atS rt CR 1OL 2OL 1M

(13) Stop (14) (9) (10) (A1) (A2) (7) (8) (7) (8) (13) (14)
1A JPR 2 PB 3 40 39 60 16
PB
1M
(12) (11)
NOTE: no C rt lo circuit tiop nso similar ot t he FVNR iS z e5
L
L10
Typical Circuits
Wye-Delta Open Transition

2M
(1) (2)
K11 T6
RC S2 IS
(R1) (R)4 )(2 )(1 (2) (1)
WYE - Delta
K7 K10
Closed Transition
(3) (4)
per GE M–E430 2
K12 T4
Fig .1 6
RC
(R2) (R)5 )4( )(3 (4) (3)
K8
(5) (6)
K13 T5
RC
(R3) (R)6 6)( 5)( (6) (5)
K9
L1 L2 L3
STAB 1M MOTOR
(3) (5) 1OL
(6) (5) (6) (5) (6)
L3 K3 K6 T3
CB
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
LSW K2 K5
L2 T2
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)

L1 K1 K4 T1
Size 5CT Operated
(2) 3FU (1) (3) 3FU (4)

H1 K1 K2 H2
CR 2S 2M 1S
(13) (14) (13) (14) (1) (12) (A) (B)
41 42 43
1S 1M
(13) (14) A)( (B)
44
TR
(A1) (A2) 61
TDEA 60
1M
(10 sec.) (H-O-A only) 5
1S 2M
(15) (16) (1) (12) (A) (B) 4
45 3
2S
2
TR 2M
(67) (68) (15) (16) (A) (B) 1A
TC 46
1
47
X2
(1) 2FU (2) (4) 2FU (3) TB
(H1) (H2)
H1A H2A T6
(2) IFU (1)
T T5
1 X1 (X1) (X2) T4
X2
T3
Gnd
T2
T1
atS rt CR 1OL 2OL 1M

(13) Stop (14) (9) )(10 (A1) (A2) (7) (8) (7) (8) (13) (14)
PB 1A JPR 2 PB 3 40 39 60 61
1M
(12) (11)
NOTE: no C rt lo circuit opit ons similar ot t he FVNRiS z e5
L
L11
Typical Circuits
Distribution Transformers
Single-Phase Single-Phase
480/120-240V 240/120V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
STAB STAB
(5) (6) (5) (6)
L3 L3
CB CB
(3) (3)
OR OR
L2 LSW L2 LSW
(1) (2) T (1) (2) T

L1 (H1) (H2) (H3) (H4) L1 (H1) (H2) (H3) (H4)
(X4) (X3) (X2) (X1) (X4) (X3) (X2) (X1)
GND GND
Three-Phase
480/208-120V
L1 L2 L3
STAB
(5) (6)
L3 K3
CB
(3)
OR (4)
L2 LSW K2
)
(H1
(H4
(2)
) (
(1)
3)
H2
T2
) (H
K1
T1
L1
)
(H3
(H2
) (
)
(H1
H4
)
(H4) (H3) (H2) (H1)
T3
T1
(X
3)
1)
(X (X
(X
1) 4)
3)
2)
(X
(X
(X
2)
4)
N
T2
(X
K4 K5
GND
(X4) (X2)
T3
(X3) (X1)
K6
L
L12
Typical Circuits
Single-Phase Panelboard
L1
MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)
L2
L3
STAB
Feeder & Transformer Unit

CB
480V/120-240V
GND
BUS
Panelboard Unit
CB
(N)
(L1) (L2)
1 2
A A
3 4
A A
5 6
A A
7 8
A A
9 10
A A
11 12
A A
L
L13
Typical Circuits
Three-Phase Panelboard
L1 MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)
L2
L3
STAB
Feeder & Transformer Unit

T2
T1
T3
480V/120-240V
T1
T3
N
Gnd Bus
T2
Panelboard Unit
CB
Gnd (if required)
A A
A A
L
L14
Typical Circuits
FVNR with PLC

L1 L2 L3
STAB M OL
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6)
L3 K3 K6 T3
CB
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
L2 K2 K5 T2
LSW
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR
L1 K1 K4 T1
(1) (3)
2FU
TB
(2) (4) 4
(H1) (H2) 3
2
1FU T 1
(2) (1)
X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 T3
Gnd T2
T1
M OL
(A) (B) (7) (8)
[ Output ]
3 40
M
(12) (11)
2
[ Input ]
FVR with PLC
L1 L2 L3
R
(5) (6)
STAB F OL
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5) (6)
L3 K3 (3) (4) K6 T3
CB
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
OR
L2 K2 (1) (2) K5 T2
LSW
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) MOTOR
L1 K1 K4 T1
(1) (3)
2FU TB
9
(2) (4) 8
(H1) (H2) 5
3
1FU T 1
(2) (1)
X2
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2 T3
Gnd
T2
T1
➀
R F OL
(12) (11) (A) (B) (7) (8)
[ Output ]
3 6 40
➀
F
(14) (13)
8
[ Input ]
➀F R
(12) (11) (A) (B)
[ Output ]
5 7
➀
R
(14) (13)
➀ Polarity sensitive. 9
[ Input ]
L
L15
Typical Circuits
RVNR-AT with PLC

Starting Autotransformer Autotransformer
1 2 Taps Line Volts
Connection
3 1 50% Size 4 - Tap 2
2 65%
F
0 3 90%
Size 4
L1 L2 L3 AT
1S
(5) (6)
STAB R FC (FC) (3C) (1C) (9C) 0C OL
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (2C) (5) (6)
L3 K3 (3) (4) (4) 2S K6 T3
(3) (6)
CB FB (FB) (3B) (1B) (9B) 2S
(2) (3) (4) (3) (4) (2B) 0B (5) (3) (4)
OR (1) 2S
L2 K2 (1) (2) K5 T2
LSW FA (FA) (3A) (1A)(2A) (2)
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (2A) 0A (1) (2) MOTOR
L1 K1 K4 T1
3FU 3FU
(2) (1) (3) (4)
H1 K1 K2 H2
TR 1S 2S R
(13) (14) (65) TR (66) (13) (14) (A) (B) (13) (14)
43 TO 44 45 46
Inst.
1S
(A) (B) TB
3
2
1
2S R X2
(57) TR (58) (13) (14) (A) (B)
T3
TC 47 48 T2
T1
(H1) (H2)
1FU
(2) (1) T
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
Gnd
TR OL OTT
(A1) (A2) (7) (8) (1) (2)
[ Output ]
3 40 39
TDAE
(10 sec)
1S
(11) (12)
2
R
(11) (12)
[ Input ]
L
L16
Typical Circuits
2S2W with PLC

2S2W SOL
SS
Ref GEN 1000A Fig 5 (5) (6) (5) (6)
K9 T3
(3) (4) (3) (4)

K8 T2
L1 L2 L3 (1) (2) (1) (2)

K7 T1
STAB FS MOTOR
(3) (5) (6) (5) (6) (5)FOL(6)
L3 K3 K6 T13
CB
(2) (3) OR (4) (3) (4) (3) (4)
L2 K2 K5 T12
LSW
TB
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 9
L1 K1 K4 T11 8
5
2FU 3
1
X2
(H1) (H2)
T13
(2)1FU (1) T T12
X1 (X1) (X2) T11
1 X2
Gnd
T3
T2
T1
➀
FS SS SOL FOL
(11) (12) (A) (B) (7) (8) (7) (8)
[ Output ]
3 6 4Ø 39
➀
SS
(14) (13)
8
[ Input ]
➀
SS FS
(11) (12) (A) (B)
[ Output ]
5 7
➀
FS
(14) (13)
9
[ Input ]
➀ Polarity sensitive.
L
L17
Typical Circuits
Solid-State Starter – ASTAT CD

Typical Circuit Diagrams OL BP
(5) (6) (5L3) (6T3)
K6
(3) (4) (3L2) (4T2)

K5
(1) (2) (1L1) (2T1)

L1 L2 L3 K4
SSS
CB
STAB FU1
(3) (5) (6)
OL
L3 (5) (6) K3 K9 (5L3) (6T3) T3
(2) (3) (4)

OL
L2 (3) (4) 17 K8 (3L2) (4T2) T2
(1) (1) (2)

MOTOR
OL
L1 (1) (2) 18 K7 (1L1) (2T1) T1
(1) (3)
2FU
(2) (4)
(H1) (H2)
H1 H2
1FU T
(2) (1)
X1 (X1) (X2) X2
2
GND (B2)
(B1) CONTROL
(A2) VOLTAGE
(A1)
RUN(COM)
(11) 14
START AUX OL
STOP (A1) (A2) 6
(S4) (S5) (S6) (S7) (96) (95)
S FAULT
5
JPR 1A 5 3 40 19 (12) RUN
(1) 7 4
3
2
AUX COMMON
(13) (14) 1A
(57)
4 X2
24 (24) RUN X2
BPX (43) (44) TB
(A1) (A2)
STOP
JPR1 S (2) 8
END OF
BP
(13) (14) RAMP
INTERNAL
RELAY
OUTPUT
AUX (57) 13
(23) (24)
23 (23) BPX
(43) (44)
OVERRIDE
AUX BPX BP (3) 12
(33) (34) (13) (14) (A1) (A2)
S RUN(NO)
9 10 (14)
JOGGING
(4)
(5) T5
THERMISTOR
(6)
INPUT (7)
R
(R1) (R2)
(8)
OUTPUT
RUN 0-10V
(13) (14)
(9)
14
(33)
DC BRAKE
OUTPUT
RUN G
(21) (22) (S1) (S2)
(34)
6
TD RD SG
BP RUN
(43) (44) (A1) (A2)
S R3232
11
COMMUNICATION
AUX
(43) (44)
L
L18
Typical Circuits
Solid-State Starter – IBP

IBP
L1 L2 L3
CB
STAB FU
(3) (5) (6)
OL
L3 (5) (6) K3 K6 (5L3) (6T3) T3
(2) (3) (4)

OL
L2 (3) (4) 12 K5 (3L2) (4T2)
T2
(1) (1) (2)

MOTOR
OL
L1 (1) (2) 13 K4 (1L1) (2T1) T1
(1) (3)
2FU
(2) (4)
(H1) (H2)
H1 H2
1FU T
(2) (1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
(B2)
CONTROL
(B1) VOLTAGE
(A2) 9
5
(A1)
4
3
START RUN 2
STOP (23)
(S4) (S5) (S6) (S7) (A1) (A2)
S END 1A
JPR 1A 5 3 1
OF
RAMP X2
(24) X2
RUN IBP TB
(13) (14)
JPR1 (COM) (COM)

(11)
(NC) RUN
(12)
(NO) (1) 7
(14)
(57)
RUN
(43) (44)
(2) 8
ENERGY
(3)
SAVER
OVERRIDE
(57)
RUN R INCHING
(33) (34) (R1) (R2)
(4)
4
(5)
THERMISTOR
RUN G
(21) (22) (S1) (S2)
(6)
9
TACH (7)
OUTPUT
0-5VDC
(8)
(33)
DC BRAKE
OUTPUT
(34)
L
L19
Typical Circuits
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Variable Speed Drives

L1 L2 L3
CB
STAB AFU (6) BP
(3) (5) (5L3) (6T3)
L3 (5) (6) K3 K6
AFU (4) BP
(2) (3) (3L2) (4T2)
L2 (3) (4) K2 K5
AFU (2) BP
(1) (1) (1L1) (2T1)
L1 (1) (2) K1 K4
(1L1) (3L2) (5L3)

IC IC IC
(2T1) (4T2) (6T3)
K7 K8 K9
[E105A]
MECH.
INTL.
AF6
(91) (92) (93)

(L1) (L2) (L3)
TB
4-20mA C1 (54) LFTR
OR (C1) (C2) (5L3)(N)(6T3) OL
0-10VDC SHLD (55) (5) (6)
REMOTE TB (96) W K15 K12 T3
GND
11
12 (53) (B1) (B2) (3L2)(N)(4T2) (3) OL(4)
AF-600FP / AF-650GP
FREQ. (97) V K14 K11 T2
ADJ. (3) 13 (50)
POT
(A1) (A2) (1L1)(N)(2T1) (1) OL (2) MOTOR
FAP
(2) (98) U K13 K10 T1
(1)
SHLD (99)
GND
(95) RELAY 2 TB
GND (06) 71
TB
(05) 72
RUN TB
(14) (13) [START] (04) 70
FWD (18)
[REVERSE]
CM (19) RELAY 1
(03)
[+24V OUT]
(12) (02)
[+24V OUT]
(13)
(01)
(20)
Analog (39)
[COAST/LOW] Output
(27) 4-20mA
(42)
PB
SW OFF [JOG]
HAND AUTO (29)
(H5) (H6) RS-485 (68)
Interface
X=CLOSED(MC) (69)
(32)
(61)
(33)
(82)
Brake
Resistor
(81)
L
L20
Typical Circuits
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Variable Speed Drives

K1 K2 K3
(1) (3) (1)
2FU 2FU
(2) (4) (2)
H1 H2
(H1) (H2)
(2)
1FU (1) T
1 X1 (X1) (X2) X2
GND
TB
SW PB TB TB
TEST NORM
ISO IC
(I1) (I2) (A1) (A2) TB
4 S
(I3) (I4)
AF6
(FAULT) N RUN
(I5) (I6) (02) (01) (13) (14) (A1) (A2)
3D 3E 3F S
X=CLOSED(MC)
NX
(A1) (A2) AI
TB TB S
TDAD
JPR 1A 3C 1-60 SEC.
SET @ 20 SEC.
SW PB
AFC BYPASS
18 (BP3) (BP4)
SW PB
HAND AUTO
OFF NX (66) BPR
(H1) (H2) (BP1) (BP2) (65) (A1) (A2)
S
3 3A TC 3B
X=CLOSED(MC)
(H3) (H4) TB TB
5
(H5) (H6)
Wired
to Drive
X=CLOSED(MC)
NX (58) BP N
(57) (02) (01) (A1) (A2)
27 28 S
TO
MECH.
INTERLOCKED
BPR N BP OL
(13) (14) (02) (01) (A1) (A2) (96) (95)
29 30 S 96
N FAN
(33) (34) (1) (2)
35
BYPASS
BP B
(13) (14) TB (B1) (B2)
31
PB
N R
(43) (44) TB (R1) (R2)
32
PB
RUN BPR G
(21) (21) (21) (22) TB (S1) (S2)
33 34
PB
RUN ETM
(43) (44) (E1) (E2)
36
(43)
BPR
(44) L
L21
Typical Circuits
High-Resistance Ground
Typical Circuit Diagrams T1 35
SW1
37 T2 31 10
TB1
L1
F1 TO 240-600V
T3 36 40 11 TB2
F6 L2 SOURCE
30 32 L3
F7 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
14
TB3
13 13 33 32
AS ARC SUPPRESSOR
TB6
TB7
TB8
F2
AS 15 CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER
34 11
F4
51
F(X) LINE FUSE

17
18
52
50
G 32
GND GROUND BUS
TB17
F3
12 NGR NEUTRAL GRD RESISTOR

Pulse External Com
Silence
Reset PB1 TEST PUSHBUTTON
System Normal Gnd Fault Alarm Future Relay Horn
External Control PX
TR PX PULSING CONTACTOR
19 SW1 DISCONNECT SWITCH
Neutral Voltage Neutral Current TB14
Ctrl Power TB12 24
Neutral Ground Neutral Ground Line Com
TR TEST RELAY
TB13
TB15
Display Cable
GND T(X) TRANSFORMER
NGR TEST RESISTOR
UVR UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY
13
14 12 GND
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
GND
TEST RESISTOR
UVR CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER
17 G
14
Operator Interface
18 16 TR
UVR
SYSTEM TEST
PB1
UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY NOTES
1. ALL INTERNAL CONTROL WIRING TO BE 600V,
#14 AWG TERMINATED W/PREINSULATED SHANK
RING & COMPRESSION TERMINAL. RESISTOR WIRING
TO BE #8 TEFLON WIRE. EQUIPMENT & DEVICE
GROUND WIRE SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY
TERMINATED ON THE GROUND BUS.
15 2. DASHED CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE BY CUSTOMER.

L1 L2 L3 T2
T1 T3
(240-600/120V) (240-600/120V) (240-600/120V)
T1 T2
L1 L2
CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS TB L1 L2 L3
TB17 12 PX 24 TB15 31 H1 40 H1 30 H1
16 SW1
18 1 SW1-L1 X1 37 X1 35 X1 36
240-600V(L-L) H2 H2 H2
2 SW1-L2
(50 OR 60 Hz) H3 H3 H3
SYSTEM TEST 3 SW1-L3 G 10 11 32 X2 35 X2 36 X2 37
PB1 4 14 H4 14 H4 14 H4
5 PULSING CONTACTOR DISCONNECT SWITCH
GROUND FAULT NO 6 52
ALARM CONTACTS COM 7 50
17
(SYSTEM NORMAL) NC 8 51 20
10 11 32 32 32 11 19
9 6 5 4 3
10 F1 F6 F7 F2 F3 F4 0
2 4 3 16
11 .8A 3.5A .8A
12 GND 6 8 7 G
1
TO GROUND BUS 31 40 30 33 20 34
13 GND
TR 13 33 7 8 1 2
TO TEST RESISTOR 14 19
TO RESISTOR (PULSE LEVEL) 15 24 FUSES G 34
PX-L1 GND 13
16 CPT 14
UVR
TO RESISTOR(FAULT LEVEL) 17 12 FUSES
PX-T1
TERMINAL
STRIP NGR F1 F6 F7
1-7A 2.5A 2.5A 2.5A
1-10A 3.5A 3.5A 3.5A
TOP VIEW
TOP BANK
17 1/2"
15 3/4"
LC660 LC660 2"
N1
LC300 LC300 3"
TEST
LC300 3"
GND
(4) 7/8" X
5/8" DIA. SLOTS
BOTTOM BANK
17 1/2"
15 3/4"
LC440 LC210 2"
N2 N3
LC88 LC132 3"

N5 N4
LC63 LC75 3"

N6 N7
LC75 LC75
(4) 7/8" X
LC75 LC75 5/8" DIA. SLOTS
GND
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW
12"
6"
12"
2 BANKS, EACH 17 1/2

L (1) 10 COILS/BANK. (1) 5 COILS/BANK. 2727-5P
ENDFRAMES. TURN FLANGES IN. TERMINALS UP.
FURNISH JUMPERS.
L22
Typical Circuits
LM10
L
L23
Specifications
Specification for Motor Control Centers permit the installation of field wiring and shall isolate this wiring
from the adjacent unit. No terminal blocks shall be located
600 Volts and Below in the vertical wireway. Cable tie supports shall be furnished
in the vertical wireway to hold cable and wiring in place. The
1.0 General
vertical wiring trough shall be covered by a removable
This specification covers low voltage motor control centers
hinged door. [A low-level signal raceway shall be provided.]
with combination starter units.
3.0 Incoming Power/ Main Protective Device
1.1 Standards
Incoming power to the motor control center shall be [cable]
The motor control centers shall be manufactured and tested in
[bus duct]. [Incoming power cables shall enter the [top] [bot-
accordance with NEMA ICS 2-3 and UL Standard 845. Vertical
tom] of the motor control center.] [Incoming cables shall be
sections and individual units shall be UL Labeled where possible.
of the size and number shown on the plans.] [Incoming bus
duct shall enter the top of the motor control center and shall
1.2 Service
have a current rating as shown on the plans.]
Each motor control center shall be suitable for use on a
_______ volt, three phase, _____ wire, ______ Hertz power
The motor control center main protective device shall be a
system having a short circuit availability of _____________
[molded case circuit breaker] [insulated case circuit breaker]
amperes RMS symmetrical.
[fused switch]. The main device shall be of the ampere rating
shown on the plans and shall have an interrupting rating
1.3 Wiring
equal to or greater than the available short circuit current.
Wiring shall be NEMA Class [ I ] [ II ], Type [ A ] [ BD ] [ BT ]
[ C ]. Where Type C wiring is required, the master terminal
4.0 Bus System
blocks shall be located at the [top] [bottom] of the vertical
section. Combination starter units shall be wired out to split
4.1 Main Horizontal Bus
type terminal blocks for easy removal of the starter unit
Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous horizontal
without disturbing either factory or field installed wiring. All bus with a current rating of [600] [800] [1200] [1600] [2000]
control terminal boards shall be accessible from the front. [2500] amperes. The main bus shall be [tin-plated .0003 inch
thick] [standard silver-plated .0002 inch thick] [heavy silver-
2.0 Construction plated .0005 inch thick] copper. The main bus shall be braced
Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA Type [1- Gasketed] [2] [12 ]. for [65,000][100,000] amperes RMS symmetrical. The main
Indoor enclosures shall be suitable for front mounting. Outdoor bus shall be isolated by barriers from wire troughs, starters,
enclosures when specified, shall be NEMA [3R Non-Walk-In] and other areas. There shall be double bolt connections on
or [3R Walk-in]. The motor control center shall be seismic main bus joints and splice connections. Main bus splicing
rated for UBC/CBC Zone 4. between shipping splits shall be accomplished from the
front with no structural disassembly. The main bus shall be
Each motor control center shall consist of the required number fully rated and arranged for future extension.
of vertical sections of heavy gauge sheet steel bolted together
to form a rigid self-supporting assembly. A removable lifting 4.2 Vertical Bus
angle shall be mounted to the motor control center at the The vertical bus in each section shall be rated [300] [600]
top. Removable bottom channel sills shall be mounted front [850]*amperes and shall be [tin-plated] [silver-plated].
and rear of the vertical sections and shall extend the width *(1200A Main bus or greater)
of the lineup.
The vertical bus shall be braced for [65KAIC] [100KAIC]. The
Motor control center vertical sections shall be nominally 90- vertical bus shall have a flame-retardant polyester-glass
inch high and 20-inch deep. Alternate section heights shall insulation / isolation system. This system shall insulate the
be 78" or 66". Alternate section widths shall be 24-inches or
vertical bus front and rear. In addition, the barrier shall isolate
30-inches wide when required.
each phase bus. Openings in the vertical bus insulation/iso-
lation system shall permit the entry of unit stabs. Unused
2.1 Horizontal Wireway
openings shall have plugs or covers to prevent the entry of
Each vertical section shall contain a minimum 12-inch high top foreign objects. [The openings in the vertical bus used for
horizontal wireway and a 6” bottom wireway. When loads exit starter connections shall be covered by an automatic shutter
the bottom a 12” bottom wireway shall be provided. The hori- mechanism. The shutters shall automatically cover the
zontal wireway shall be covered by a removable hinged door. openings when the starter is removed.]
2.2 Vertical Wiring Trough The vertical bus bracing AIC rating shall be the same as the
A separate vertical wiring trough shall be furnished in each
vertical section adjacent to plug-in unit. The wire trough shall
main horizontal bus. M
M1
Specifications
4.3 Ground Bus disengaged from the vertical bus and no power can enter
A copper ground bus shall extend the full width of the motor the unit.
control center. The ground bus shall be rated [300] [600]
amperes. The ground bus shall be drilled and lugs furnished Combination starter units specified with Type B or C wiring
as specified. [There shall be a vertical copper ground bus in shall be supplied with split-type terminal blocks. These terminal
each section. This ground bus shall be accessible to a bus blocks shall be mounted in front of the unit and shall allow the
stab mounted in the unit compartment area and arranged removal of the unit without disconnecting any of the control
so that the unit ground stab engages before the power wiring. Combination starter units up to size 5 shall be plug-in
stabs engage the vertical bus]. [A motor load ground lug construction and shall be capable of being removed without
shall be mounted in the unit and used for terminating the disconnecting any control leads from their terminal blocks.
ground of multi-conductor cables.]
Overload relays shall be: {select one}
4.4 Neutral Bus [Bimetallic, ambient compensated]
A neutral bus shall be furnished when shown on the plans.
[Bimetallic, non-ambient compensated]
The neutral bus shall be [300] [600] [800] [1000] [1200] [1250].
The neutral bus shall [be in the incoming section only] [Solid-state, ambient insensitive, self powered, adjustable
[extend the full-width] of the motor control center. When a FLA, adjustable phase unbalance, phase loss protection,
neutral bus is specified, bottom plates shall be furnished. and selectable overload class (10, 20, 30) with 2% accuracy
Lugs of the proper ampacity shall be furnished. and repeatability, built-in thermal memory to prevent hot
motor starts, isolated 1NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts]
5.0 Units [Advanced microprocessor based motor protection, Dip
Combination motor controller and feeder units shall employ switch selectable Phase loss protection/Phase Unbalance,
[molded case circuit breakers] [fusible switches with clips for adjustable FLA, Selectable overload class (10, 20, 30)]
J or R type fuses] for branch circuit protection. Circuit breaker [Ground fault protection]
disconnects for combination motor starters shall be [thermal-
magnetic] [magnetic only]. Provisions to Communicate over the following Protocol:
[DeviceNet] [Modbus RTU]
All combination starter and feeder units of plug-in construction
shall utilize a positive guidance system to insure positive The following minimum information shall be available over
connection of the unit stabs to the section vertical bus. the Network.
Insertion and removal of each unit shall not require the use • Metering (Average Phase Current in Amps, Control Voltage,
of special tools. Unit shelves shall be of a lift out design. Motor Run Time)
Connection from the power stabs to the unit disconnect • Starter Status and Configuration Notification (Run,
shall be a direct connection. Each circuit breaker starter unit Overload, Ground Fault, Phase Unbalance, Commanded
size 1 through size 5 shall be of plug-in construction. Each Trip, Class setting)
circuit breaker feeder 600A or less shall be plug-in. • Information (Voltage, Internal failure, 100% Motor Load
Warning)
Each unit compartment shall be equipped with a flange-formed • Remote Control (On, Off, Trip, Reset)
pan type door. The door shall be mounted on the vertical
section with removable hinges. [Provide a Display Module for accessing at the unit all Network
data] [Door mounted] [Hand held using phone jack on the door].
Each unit shall be equipped with an operating handle. The
handle shall be connected to the disconnect operator using a Control power for starter units shall be from: {select one}
direct drive and requiring no adjustment of linkage. The handle
[Individual control power transformers furnished in each
shall be mechanically interlocked with the door, preventing
starter unit. One secondary lead shall be furnished with a
door opening with disconnect closed. The interlock shall also
fuse and the other lead shall be grounded. Control power
prevent disconnect being closed with the door open and prevent
primary fuses are required].
the unit from being removed or installed with disconnect ON.
The interlock shall be capable of being defeated, allowing the [Line voltage. Control circuits on all starter units with line
door to be opened with disconnect closed or disconnect closed voltage control power shall be provided with current limiting
with the door open. The unit handle shall have provision for up fuses mounted in both legs of the control circuit].
to three padlocks in the off position. On circuit breaker units the [Separate source (common control)] Two wired terminal
handle shall have a “tripped” position in addition to OFF/ON. points shall be provided. One leg shall be wired through a
normally open auxiliary contact in each disconnect and a
Each unit shall be capable of being padlocked in a partially control power fuse rated 1 amp shall be provided.]
M withdrawn position. In this position, the unit power stabs are
M2
Specifications
Starter units shall be provided with the following auxiliary

devices:
[auxiliary starter interlocks, ______ N/O, ______N/C].
[control / timing relays (as shown on the drawings)].
[door mounted pilot devices: Start-stop pushbutton, H-O-A
selector switch, Indicating lights (quantity and color)].
Miscellaneous Units
The following units shall be included in the motor control

center(s) as indicated on the drawings:
[Lighting and Power transformers]
[Lighting panelboards]
[Power metering and associated instrument transformers,
where required]
[Power factor correction capacitors]
[Reduced Voltage Solid State]
[Variable Frequency Drives]
[PLC’s]
M
M3
GE
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com
imagination at work
DET-291C (02/09)

Catccme9000 CCM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catccme9000 CCM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catccme9000 CCM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

™

Evolution Series E9000

General – Section A Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches ................................................................3

SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT RATING

BUS TYPE AND CAPACITY

ENCLOSURE TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

INCOMING LINE TERMINATION AND MAINS

SPECIAL FEATURES REQUIRED

SPECIAL CIRCUIT AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS

These steel-enclosed control centers can be joined together

New doors mounted on the case feature a removable hinge pin

Units can be withdrawn to a disconnected

A paint finish is applied to all un-plated steel parts. The powder

An interlock release system is provided so that – if it becomes nec-

The vertically mounted integral handle can be locked in the OFF

New oversized laser-engraved unit nameplates on 12” units and

Lift up handle design to allow full access to fuses and CB rating

Easily removable plastic knock-outs are provided in the vertical

(Option) Motor terminal blocks can be supplied in Size 1 & 2 to

Standard colors are:

Note: Not all colors are available with optional wiring.

The standard unit service designation nameplate is of 2-ply

Six-inch units and the F-frame circuit breaker come with a

NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring Examples of custom drawings are:

Wiring Features by NEMA Classification

Type of Drawings Furnished

Codes and Standards Section Label

The National Electrical Code covers installation of electric conductors

Where a motor control circuit transformer is provided, the trans-

A SPECTRA (MOLDED CASE SWITCH) OR A NON-AUTOMATIC

For full protection against all levels of arcing faults on

Combination Motor Control Units Environmental Considerations

Fuse Classification For ambient temperatures above 40°C, special consideration

NEMA Enclosure Types E9000 Indoor Enclosure

Type 3R – Rain-proof, Outdoor NEMA 2 Drip-proof Construction

Side Elevations 20" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus

Side Elevations 22" Deep Section 1600A to 2500A Main Bus

Bottom Conduit Entry 20" Deep Section

Bottom Conduit Entry 25" Deep Section

Top Conduit Entry 30" Deep Section

Details for Auto Transformer

Drip Pan — Nema II 20", 22", 30" Deep Sections

Drip Pan — Nema II 25" Deep Section Back-to-Back

Used for L and U Shaped Motor Control Center Arrangements

Outdoor Enclosures • Three-point door latch

Indoor Enclosures Extra Width Vertical Wireway

A terminal board for connecting an external 120-volt power

Indoor Enclosures Center of Gravity

Optional Heavy Base

ARC ARC WELD ALL FOUR

Estimated shipping weights per section

Bus Selection Vertical Bus Extensions

600 X X X 1/4" x 2" Bus

Vertical 300Á X X X 3/8" x 3/4"

300 X X 1/4" x 1"

Vertical Grounds 150 X X 1/8" x 1"

À Requires a 22" deep section.

Mains Fused Switch Mains

Refer to specific breaker publications for time-current char-